^ ^i^. V^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 ■u lU 12.2 I.I u w u 140 lliiiJi^U4 ^V^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 4" i\ 93 WIST MAIN STRMT WIMTffR,N.Y. t4SM (7I*)I79-4M» ■'. CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHJVI/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Instituta for Historical IViicroraproductions / Inatitut Canadian da microraproductions historiquaa Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. D D D D D D Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagie Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaurte et/ou peiliculAe □ Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque loured maps/ Cartes gAographiques en couleur I I Coloured maps/ □ Coloured ink (I.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bieue ou noire) r~~1 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Reii* avec d'autres documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re liure serrAe peut causer de i'ombre ou de la distortion le long de la marge intArieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lors d'une restauratlon apparaissent dans le texte, male, lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont pas At* fiimAes. Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplAmentcires: L'Instltut a microfilm* le meiileur exemplaire qu'il lui a *t* possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-*tre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la m*thode normale de filmage sont indiqu*s ci-dessous. The toti I I Coloured pages/ D This Item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqu* ci-dessous. Pages de couleur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagAes □ Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaurtes et/ou pellicui*M Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages dAcoiorAes, tachetAes ou piquAes {T7| Pages detached/ Pages ditachAes Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prir Qualit^ in^gale de I'impression Includes supplementary materii Comprend du matiriei suppKmentaire Only edition available/ Seule Mition disponible rri Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ I I Includes supplementary material/ |~n Only edition available/ The post oft film Ori| begl the sion othfl first sion oril Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont 4t* fiimAes i nouveau de fapon i obtenir la meilleure image possible. The shal TINI whU Map diffe entir begii right requi metli 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X J 12X itx 20X 24X mi a2x air* I details iuas du t modifier igar una I ffilmage 1/ utes Tha copy filmad hara haa baan raproducad thanica to tha ganaroalty of: Library of tha Public Archivat of Canada Tha imagas appearing hara ara tha baat quality posaibia conaidaring tha condition and lagibility of tha original copy and in Icaaping with tha filming contract apacificationa. Original copiaa in printed paper covera ara filmad beginning with the front cover and ending on the laat page with a printed or iiluatratad imprea- sion, or the becic cover when appropriate. All other original copiaa are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or iliuatrated imprea- sion, end ending on the laat page with a printed or iliuatrated impresaion. The leat recorded frame on each microfiche shell contein the symbol — ^ (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol y (meening "END"), whichever appliea. L'exemplaire filmA fut reproduit grAce it la ginAroait* da: La bibiiothique das Archives publiques du Canada Les images suivantea ont AtA reproduites avac la plua grand aoin, compta tenu de la condition at da la nettet* de I'exempleire film*, at en conformity avac les conditions du contrat de filmaga. Lea exemplairas originsux dont la couverture en pepier eat imprimte aont filmAs an commandant par la premier plat at en terminant soit par la darnlAre pege qui comporte una empreinte d'impression ou d'iilustration. soit par la second plet, selon le cas. Tous lea autres exemplairas orlginaux aont filmte en commenpant par la premiire page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'iilustration at an terminant par la derniire pege qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symbolas suivanta apparaftra aur la darnlAre imege de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbols — ^ signifie "A SUIVRE", la symbols V signifie "FIN". lire by errata lad to •nt me pelure, epon i Mapa, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed et different reduction ratioa. Thoae too lerge to be entirely included in one expoaure ara filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right end top to bottom, es many framea aa required. The following diagrama iiluatrata the method: 1 2 3 Lea cartes, plenches, tableaux, etc.. peuvant Atre filmto i dee taux de rAduction diffArents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atra reproduit en un seul clichA, 11 est f iimi A partir de Tangle aupAriaur geuche. de geuche i droite, et de haut en bes. en prenent le nombre d'imagas nicessaira. Lea diagrammea auivanta iiluatrant le mithode. 32X 1 2 3 4 5 6 I .H BY HIS MAJESTY'S COMMAND. ADJUTANT-GENERALS OFFICE. RULES AND REGULATIONS FOU THE FORMATIONS, FIELD-EXERCISE, AND MOVEMENTS, OP HIS MAJESTY'S FORCES WAR OFFICE, PRINTEDi AND SOLD BY T. Egertov, at the Military Library, Wh 1811. ITEIIALL. [Price Six Shiilings in Bornds.] »■,:ervicc. • To attain this important purpose, it is necessary to reconcile celerity with order ; to prev«nt hurry, which must always produce ~-* ^•.'tt.vl ..^ 1 ( vi ) produce confusion, loss of time, unsteadiness, irresolution, inaitcntion to cummand, &c.; to ensure precision and correct- ness, by which alone great bodies will be able to arrive at their object in good order, and in the shortest space of time ; to inculcate and enforce the necessity of military dependence, and of mutual support in action, which are the great ends of discipline} to simplify the execution, and to abridge the va- riety of movements, as much as possible, by adopting such only as are necessary for combining exertions in corps, and that can be required or applied in service, regarding all matters of parade and show merely as secondary objects j to ascertain to all ranks the part each will have to act in every change of situ- ation that can happen, so that explanation may not retard at the moment when execution should take place: to enable the commanding officer of any body of troops, whether great or small, to retain the whole relatively as it were in his hand and management, at every instant, so as to be capable of restraining the bad eft'ects of snch ideas of independent and individual > exertions as are visionary and hurtful, and of directing them to their true and proper objects, tliose of order, of combined ef- fort, and of regulated obedience, by the united force of all which a well disciplined enemy can only be defeated. The rules hereafter laid down will be found few, simple, and adapted to the understanding and comprehension of every individual; but they will require perfect attention in all ranks. In the Soldier, an equal and cadenced march, acquired and confirmed by habit, independent of music or sound : In the Officer precision and energy of command; the pieservation of just distances; and the accurate leading of divisions on given points of march and formation. These circumstance<5, toge- ther Vi ( vii ) ther with the united exertions of all, will soon attain that pre- cision of movement, which is so essential, and without which valour alone will not avail. These Regulations are divided into PARTS, and each part sub'divided into Heads, and Sections of explanation. PARTI. 0/ Me DRILL or INSTRUCTION o/- Me RECRUIT. The several articles of Instruction, and the progression and manner in which they are to be taught, are explained in 40 Sections. PART «-' ( Viii ) PART II. Of the PLATOON or COMPANY. The Instruction, and various operations of the company \rhich enable it to act in battalion, are explained in Z65 Sections. PART III. Of the BATTALION. . The several operations, changes of position and movements necessary for the battalion, when acting singly, or in line with ethers, are explained in 108 Sections. P A R T IV. ■ . »i «' ;' ^ ^^ Of the Ll^ E. The principal circumstances relative to the movements of a considerable line, are explained in 32 Sections. M. CONTENTS. I I \ I ; y * • t * • * . *'^ ' , CONTENTS. PART I. RECRUIT. Instruction of the Recruit Without Arms. t M a; V C 2 J o ^ V e Si S 1. Position of the Soldier 2. Standing at ease 3. Turning eyes 4. The facings 5. Position in marching 6. Ordinary step 7. TAe /ifl/^ ^ 8. Oblique step 9. Dressing 'whe7i halted 10. Stepping out 11. MarA: /tme .^ 12. Stuping short 13. Changing the feet 14. 3'Ae «irf VC 3 4) b. If) U r^ ■1^ -c C« t»; ^ a g s iTi rt o < With Arms. Position of the Soldier Different motions of thejircloek 21 22 "^ rJ 1*1 3 O* lu ;ft C< *J ji c ^ ■ p.. •* 25. 26. 27. 28. 30. 31. 32. 33. 3I-. "< 35. 36\ 1' s' . Attention informing the squad ' - 22 Open Order - - - 23 Close Order - - - 23 Manual exercise - - 24 Platoon exercise « ■ - ^-21 J'irings - - - 24 Marching to the front and rear - 24 Open and close order on the march - 27 March in fie to a flank - - 27 Wheeling in fie • '! - 28 Oblique marching in front - - 29 Oblique marching in fie - - 30 Wheeling foruard from the halt - 30 38. Wheeling .«««■ t CONTENTS. xl Page - 14 - 16 'e 17 rch 18 18 '.able - 19 22 23 23 24 2; 24 24 V 27 28 29 30 30 ling -si. 'i ■ii i. 1 . 1 1. Aiif Page - 30 6Vc^ 38. Wheeling backward 39. Wheeling from thj inarch on a halted \ - . and moveable pivot - 3 40. Stepping outy stepping shorty mark 1 timCy changing feet y the sidestep, > 31 stepping back - • j ... , . Vnvi v."i* > . . jC . EwD OF First Part. '^^'"5 i'^>- ■■ ■'- -^— ^ ■■■• i.ni'vn^i'l • t t ' PART II. t'^'H >> r ■ ^ ■il. Formation of the Platoon •>-'^ i '*» :• 'j •- 33 42. Marching to the front - - - 34 43. The side step • • - 36 44. The back step - . - - 37 45. File marching - - - 37 46. Wheeling from a halt - - - 38 47. Wheeling forward by sub-divisions from line - 40 48. Wheeling backwards by sub-divisions from line - 40 49. Marching on an aligncment in uptn column of\ . ^t. u • \ .. ._ . < >. ., .... « Platoox or Compant. •-•■.*••#< I } } sub-divisions 50. Wheeling into line from open column of sub-di- . .^ visions - - - 51. Sub-divisions wheeling into a new alignement 43 52. Sub-divisions wheeling into a new direction on 7 . . a movenbk pivot . . j b 2 53. Counter- i ■^M," -^ ■ . .^IpaJt M ..^Ti' Xll CONTENTS. 'H .'.'«. •Jii.' Sect. 53. Countermarch hyjiles 54w WketUng on the center of the jdatoon 55. OMique marching - - ^ • 56. Increasing and diminishing the front of anl open colamh halted - - y 57. Increasing and diminishing on the march 58. Sub-divisions pass (f dc^le, by hreaUng off files 59. Marching in quick time - • 60. Forming to the front from file 61. Forming from file to either fiank 62. To form to cither fiank from column of sub- 7 divisions ., -i jj / .- 3 63. March in echellon by sections 64. From three ranks, forming itt two ranks 65. From two ranks, forming into three ranks 66. Page 46 47 . 48 4S 50 51 . 53 ■ 53 . 54 55 56 57 5S 66.-) 67. f 68. ( 690 J.'* > Exercise of the company - 59 ^2 #€ .1- 04 . - - iftonV-.^A >^^^^\4A^>u^m .1?* , • 1 . ■awif. i .at>. ."ivV .i^ ' ' KvD OF Second Paht. v\.i:«S^A '. -^^ I ' ..— .. ... vn4A»uiV«''<^afi ( - \k\»U ^4. l.t 'Jt ti I -, CONTENTS. Page 46 47 48 4S 50 51 53 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 '>;. ,> n h\ ft X}11 PART III. f. TT • ^f >r, iT rr » *.. /t . •/ ■; ! , vj( J- ; ; iv -iVi A\ ,". •in''':>''~'j!\ -i?. > r.-t BATTALTON. I -1 / tl Sect. - . '""''^ ■;■; { Formation of the Com'pany 70. Company to take open order from close order 71. Company to take close order from open order iM Formation OP THE B ATT ALioiT 72. Battalion to take open order • 73. Battalion to resume close order ■**..' Page . 63 64 65 66 • 69 71 f!» General Circumstances OF Movement 73 74. Commands - •**' • - 73 75. Distance affiles - • v.,^.... » 75 76. jyistance of' ranks - -" ' - 76 77. I^r?*^^ (f format ion - - , » 77 78. 3/M«jf a/»rf drums - - » 78 79' Marching >.^ - . a , - ^ . 78 80. H' heeling • - - - 80 SI. Movements ' - ; ».*.,,. . - 85 82. Points of march . • • - 87 83. TAc alignement - ^ .!».>.•... - 87 84. Poj«/5 of formation - 88 85. Dressing - • . • - 91 • !• ') '^i 'I '-iiLrr O.EN Column ' , .t bS - J)4 Battalion «. ! 7"~T^ \ : It t 1 \ XIV Sect. CONTENTS. Battalion open Columk Assembly, &c. of the Battalion 86. Exercise of the Battalion ... , • Battalion standing in open Co- ^:ti LUMN Diminish or increase pront LUMN !M II' f*'"'''^H On the march 88. Increase 3 89. Diminish 7 j^^^ ^^^^^^ 90. Increase 3 ONT of Co- 7 Passage of Bridge or Defile from Line • ] 91. To the front 92. To the rear . - , - 93. Marching off in column from one flank to-l wards another - - } 94. March of the Battalion in File 95. General formation from fie 96. Formation in open column from fie Countermarch by Files 98! } Co«^f'^""°'''^ \frZ ae^^nter ^9. Counter-march by divisions Countermarch in Column Page - 96 104 105 105 112 113 114 116 118 118 119 120 - 122 - 122 . 124 - 125 - 126 - 127 - 128 - 129 100, Divi" ■n ^M ) . ti CONTENTS. Sect. 100. Divisions by Jiles - - - 101. The column by divisions from the rear 102. By tilings standings and chang^ing ground 103. By toings passing through each other General Chanoes of Position t Page 129 131 132 133 131 104. The several changes of position of a battalion 137 105. The several entries on a new line in open Column 139 Wheel and March from Line into Column, and from Column into J^ 144 Line - , , - lOCr 107 7 > Wheel foruard into open line ' > Wheel back into open column 110. Wheel into column of sub-divisions 111. March in prolongation of the line 112 7 - „* > Change of direction on a moveable pivot 114. Wheel on a halted pivot in an alignement \ 5 144. I 145 C 14(» 1 147 115. 7 116. \ 117. 3 147 148 149 149 150 Wheel of open column into an alignement^ 152 152 i 118. Halt^ and wheel up of column into line 119. Wheel of sub-division column into line 120. 121. Chanoeh op position in orF.v Co- "^ LUMN FROM LiNE i On a flank halted division b4 { to the front to the rear 153 157 158 158 160 122. On ^' XVI Sect. 122. 123. 124. 125. 126. 127. 128. 129. 130. 131. 132. 133. 134. 135. CONTENTS. On a central division halted - - • - To a distant position, by Jiling divisions ( ff^hcn the open column arrives where its I head is to remain ( IFhen the open column arrives where its \ rear is to remain When the open column arrives where a cen- tral division is to remain When the open column enters the new line by the echellon march When the divisions of the open column pass each other to form on the line When the open column forms in line by the even tail movement { { 1 Page l6l 162 I 165 J 166 } 167 I l68 } 169 ' Changes of Position of the Open Column - - . lchan^eofpo-^''"''f'''f ") > v.- "^1 A J division - on a rear j In front rear - To either flank - (In ihi (To ] i } 170 171 172 173 174 174 174 136. formation to /lank not the pivot one Close Column - • 175 Formation oe close Column from 7 ,-,^ Line - - - - J *"^ 1 37. Before or behind aflank company 138. On a central company 139. March of a column to flank - 177 - 178 - 179 140. March .3 \ CONTENTS. xvu Sect. Page 140. March of column to the front - - 180 141. The column halted takes a new direction - 181 142. The column marching changes direction - 181 143. Countermarch in close column - - 182 Deploymext into Line. - 182 Close column of companies deploys. 184 • ■ U ^^j { Column of Companies forms column of tii:o 1 g« \ companies - - } 144. On the front 1 145. On the rear > division 146. On a central} 84 86 88 » ,» Deploys 148. On the front 1 14i). On the rear > division ' 1 50. On a central ) OfiLiiiUE Deployments . • A. - 189 {i 89 90 191 - 192 151. 7 r» .!• I- \ advanced - - 193 152. l^^^^^^^'^^'^'^'i retired - - 193 r Formation of the line in the prolongation ) 153. < if the flank of the column, and on any > 194 (^ division - - - j ,, r ECIIELLON - , - - 195 Changes of Position by Company 7 .qq EciiELLONs - - - 3 y^ \S\.\yhcel 'I XVlll CONTENTS. Sect. 154. Wheel of battalion into echellon - ^ - 155. March and halt into ecliellon 156. Wheel back into parallel line - ^" 1 57. March ttp info oblique line Formation in line from open column by the 7 J ^ „ J Forma, \ eche lion march ] 159. ^ The battalion ^forward Ion a flank 160. \ throtvn \ backxcard \ company 161. Change qf^ position on a central company 162. Change of position on a distant point . /-« C March of direct echellon to the front and ) 1 formation in line k - - ) Page 200 201 203 204 205 207 209 211 213 214 Echellon Changes by Sub-divisions 215 164. If the battalion is halted 165. If the battalion is marching in line ■1M Mauch or the Battalion in line X66. When the battalion advances 1 67. When the battalion dresses 168. When the battalion retires * 169. Changes a/direction when in movement Passage of Obstacle * • 170. When front of obstacle is considerable 171. When the obstacle increases • 172. When the obstacle is passed, or diminishes 173. When the battalion fires in passing 174. Passing the obstacle byjilcs - 215 - 218 - 220 - 221 - 227 - 229 - 230 - 233 - 234 - 235 - 236 - 238 - 23S 175. Passing ■Mm.^ C ON TENTS. XIX Sect. Page --t S Passing a uood by companies filing - \ ^^^ \ Passing through another battalion - j 176*. Retiring by alternate companies - - 243 ,-y { Advancing or retiring by half battalions, 7 ^aa I and^firing - - - - j 178. When the battalion forms a square or oblong 245 March by a face - - - 246 March by an angle - • • - - 247 Oblong formed from open column of march 248 March in open ground^ prepared against cavalry 2 50 )\ End of Third Part, '' . .-.^v. I •/^-■. > 1 I ij .^a ' '' INSPECTION or REFIEjy I LIGHT INFANTRY ■Trmr d' 'SI 1 4. , .1 I ^',^J J I • 253 273 • ' J. • r h J;.»V. U: ,: «■• a" '^' • "" -1."' ♦. 1l'' V A -■*?'• { .V'l 1: , ,^ ..,-:^« .* '^ .^ ■.» « ■>.■ . .- X- ; 7 l^i ' y XX CONTENTS. PART IV. 'I THE LINE. Sect. 179. 180. 181. 182. 183. 184. 185. Page 282 287 Movements op a line Open Column op the Line General Changes of Position of a 7 .q-. Line - - - - j ^89 Taking vp lines of march and formation - 293 { Open column^ enters, marches,forms on anl _„ - \ aligncment - - " i r Formation in line^ on detached adjutants 1 < from column or assembly in mass of bat- > 301 (^ talions - - - ' j C Entry and formation of the rear battalions 1 < of a column, on an alignement, when the > 306 (^ head ones hare halted on it - ) r :; ' f On a fixed flank division 307 1 \0n a fixed central di- 1 „,.^ <. Changes of position^ vision - j" -^ ^ J On a moving central ) „„q \, division - 3 ^ 1 86 S ^^^^S^ of position, by the vourff, or quick \ movement - . - Close Column of the Line } 3J1 313 i%7' 188. 189. 190. 191. 192. { From column of march, to form close column 7 „ , and line " " " 3 Oblique deployments - - - 318 When battalion close column forms square - 319 Several close columns,formedfrom the same line 321 Several close columns form in one line - 321 Trco columns exchange places - - 322 193. Tv)o f^i > II IIIII.M" Nl-M CONTENTS. XXI Sect, P^<^ 193b Two columns form in one line - - - 322 194. Tw9 columns form in two lines - - 323 EcHELLON Movements OF THE Line - 323 195. Oblique position taken by the echdlon march - 325 106 y ff^hen from an advance in echellon, the line 7 „2fi X changes position imvards - - 3 1 oT^ 5 IFhen echellons advance direct from flank 7 ««▼ ^'' 1 of line to the front - - - j ^^^^ 108* i^^^ a line formed on enemjfs flank at^l ^^^ * (. fflcA:* in echellon - - - J 100 S'^hen a line formed oblique to an enemy y\ ^2^ ^^' X attacks from aflank - - . I ^^^ iCParallen ^^^' ' Echellon taken from < Oblique > Position - 33 1 I Column ) Change of leading flank during echellon 7 «„<, movement - - - • ~ C '^ " March OF THE Line IN Front - - 333 201. Advance in line ..... 33,'; 202. Halt, and dressing of the line - - - 34I 203. Retire in line ----- 343 Lengthening the line to aflank - - 346 204. When a line passes a bridge or defle - - 346 205 S^^^^'^ ^ line advances or retires by half} „.» * X battalions ----- j 206. Firing in line . - . - 207. Square or oblong of several battalions Chequered Retreat of the Line Oblique position taken - - - . Jtetreat of two lines - - - - 349 351 353 355 356 Pas- •w* xxii CONTENTS. I ■ \ S€ci. Page PASSAGE or Lines .... 357 f . ■ fFAm the second line advances to relieve thejirst 357 When the second line remains posted - - 358 When a height is to be crowned - - 359 When a wing is thrown back - - - 359 When a wing is refused - - - - 350 1 1 K.^'. Second Lines 361 208. 209. 210. 211. f Txtfo lines change position on a central point 7 «r ^ i of thejirst - . - '^- J 364 5 Two lines change '^forward Ion a Jlank > S6& \ position \ backward J of thejirst y 366 ' ( Two lines in march 1 forward 1 by an altera-^ •^ change to a^ank> >tion of' their > 366 (_ position 3 backward) direction J Column of Route - - - _ 353 Creneral Remarks - - - - 37^ End of Fourth Part. ^.' v^^^'- ...v •- f . (>' -f / A ,.> .11 -Vu- I ;' » PARTI. S. 2. Standing at Ease. On the words Stand at Ease, the right foot is to be drawn back about six inches, and the greatest part of the weight of the body brought upon it j Stand at Ease.'{ the left knee a little bent j the hands brought together before the body j but the shoulders to be kept back and square; the head to the front, and the ^ whole attitude without constraint. On the word Attention, the hand* are to fall smartly down the outside J of the thighs j the right heel to be ^ brought up in a line with the left ; I and the proper unconstrained position ^of n soldier immediately resumed. When standing at ease for any considerable time in cold weather, the men may be permitted, by com- mand, to move their limbs, but without quitting their ground, so that upon the word Attention , no one shall have materially lost his dressing in the line. Attention. S, 3. Eyes to the Right. Etjcs Right. Eyes Left. Eyes Front. On the words Eyes to the Right, glance the eyes to the right, with the slightest turn possible of the head. At the words Eyes to the l>eft, cast •{ the eyes in like manner to the left. On the words Eyes to the Front, the look and head are to be directly to the front, the habitual position of the ^soldier. These motions are only useful on the wheeling of divisions, or when dressing is ordered after a halt; and particular attention must be paid in the several turnings of the eyes, to prevent the soldier from mov- ing his body, which should be preserved perfectly square to the front. ,^ '5.4. < \k R E C R U I T.— Without Arms. S. 4. Tlie Facings, fn going through the facings, the left heel never quits the ground} the body must rather incline for- ward, and the knees be kept straight. To the Right, face. * w ■ • - To the Left, face. To the Rij^ht aboutfface. \.| •' i • To the Left about, face. 1st. Place the hollow of the right foot smartly against the left heel^keep- ing the shoulders square to the front. 2d. Raise the toes, and turn to the right on both heels. r 1st. Place the right heel against the 1 hollow of the left foot, keeping the < shoulders square to the front. i 2d. Raise the toes, and turn to the V.left on both heels. 1st. Place the ball of the right toe against the left heel, keeping the shoulders square to the front. \ sd. Raise the toes, and turn to the I right about on both heels. 3d. Bring the right foot smartly I back in a line with the left. f 1st. Place the right heel against I the ball of the left foot, keeping the I shoulders square to the front. \ 2d. Raise the toes, and turn to the I left about on both heels. 3d. Bring up the right smartly in l_a line with the left. The greatest precision must be observed in these facings, for if they are not exactly executed, a body of men, after being properly dressed, will lose their dressing, on every small movement of facing. B 3 S. PART I. S. 5. Position in Marching, n \ March. •*Vv "j.i, In marching, the soldier must main- tain, as much as possible, the posiflon of the body as directed in Sect. 1. He must be well balanced on bis limbs. His arms and hands without stiffness, must be kept steady by his sides, and not suffered to vibrate. He mustwot be allowed to stoop forward, still less to lean back. His body must be kept square to the front, and thrown rather more forward in marching than when halted,%iat it may accompany the movement of the leg and thigh, which movement must spring from the haunch. The ham must be stretched, butwithout stiffening the knee. The toe a little pointed, and kept near the ground, so that the shoe- soles may not be visible to a person in front. The head to be kept well up, straight to the front, and the eyes not suffered to be cast down. The foot, without being drawn back, must be placed _6at on the ground. ^ ■^ S.6, Ordinary/ Step. \ The length of each pace, from heel to heel, is 30 inches, and the recruit must be taught to take 75 of these steps in a minute, without tottering, and with perfect steadiness. The ordinary step being the pace on r'l occasions whatever, unless greater celerity be paiiicularly or- dered, "■'■—' *^ to- —- n- — R E C R U I T.-- Without Arms. 7 dered, the recruit must be carefully trained, and tho- roughly instructed in this most essential part of his duty, and perfectly made to understand, that he is to maintain it for a long period of time together, both in line and in column, and in rough as well as smooth ground, which he may be required to march over. This is the slowest step which a recruit is taught, and is also applied in all movements of parade. Halt. S. 7. The Halt, On the word Halt, let the rear foot be brought upon a line with the advanced one, so as to finish the step which was taken when the conmand .was given. N. B. The words Halt, wheel— Halt, front-' Halt, rf/eM — are each to be considered as one word of command, and no pause made betwixt the parts of their execution. To the Left Oblique, March. S. 8. Oblique Step. When the recruit has acquired the regular length and cadence of the or- dinary pace, he is to be taught the oblique step. At the words. To the Left, oblique — March, without alter- ing his personal squareness of posi- tion, he will, when he is to step with his left foot, point and carry it for- ward 19 inches in the diagonal line, to the left, which gives about 13 in- ches to the side, and about 1 3 inches to the front. On the word Tuo, he fi 4 will * i[ ■M " !". ! —. ' t Fig.) ii PARTI. will bring his right foot 30 inches forward, so that the right heel be placed 13 inches directly before the left one. In this position he will pause, and on the word Ttoo, conti- nue to march, as before directed, by advancing his left foot 19 inches, pausing at each step till confirmed in his position; it being essentially ne- cessary to take the greatest care that his shoulders be preserved square to the front. From thf combination of these two movements, the general ob- liquity gained will amount to an angle of about 25 degrees. When the re- cruit is habituated to the lengths and directions of the step, he mu^t be made to continue the march, with- out pausing, with firmness, and in the cadence of the ordinary pace/ ^viz. 76 steps in the minute. As all marching (the side step excepted) invariably begins with the left foot, whether the obliquing com- mences from the halt, or on the march, the fiist dia- gonal step taken is by the leading foot of the side in- clined to, when it comes to its turn, after the com* mand is pronounced. The squareness of the person, and the habitual ca- denced step, in consequence, are the great directions of the oblique, as well as of the direct, march. Each recruit .should be separately and carefully instructed in the principles of the foregoing eight sections of the drill. They form the basis of all military move- , ments. • ^. * «V tic Three '"Tf^r;-"-5fr'>, ., ite ii^.a .j,jf-5^i^^''^''^^^'*aB»ws::,i5ieii R E C R U I T.-- Without Anns. 9 Three or four recruits will now be formed in one rankj at very open files^ and instructed as follows : S. 9- Dressinfi: 'ii^hen halted. f Dressing is to be taught equally by the left as by the right. On the word Dress. D/f.vy, each individual will cast his eyes to the point to which he is order- ed todress, with the smallest turn pos- sible of the head, b^t preserving the shoulders and body square to their front. The whole person of the man must move as may be necessary, and bending backward or forward is not ^ to be permitted. He must take short quick steps, thereby gradually and ex- actly to gain his position, and on no account be suffered to attempt it by any sudden or violentalteration, which must infallibly derange whatever is beyond him. Thefacesof themen.and not their breasts or feet, are the line of dressing. Each man is to be able just to distinguish the lower partof the face of the second man beyond him. In dressing, the eyes of the men are always turned to the officer, who gives the word Dress ; and who is posted at the point by wh'ch the body halts ; and who from that point corrects his men^ on a point at or be- yond his opposite flank. The faults to be avoided, and generally committed by the soldier in dressing, are, passing the line ; the head too for\<'»rd and body kept back ; the shoulders not square 3 the head turned too much. Two, or more men, being moved forward or back- ward^ agivcD number of paces, and placed in the new line .# 10 PART I. , M 1 IM ^^ line and direction, the following commands will be given. By the Right, forward — Dress. By the Right, backward'— Dress. By the Left , forward — Dress. By the Left, backward — Dress. Eyes front. As soon as the d.essing is accom- plished, the words' Eyes front, will be given, that heads may be replaced, and remain square to the front. No rank, or body, ought ever to be dressed, without the person on its Hank appointed to dress it, determin- ing, or at least supposing a line, on which the rank, or body, is to be formed, and for that purpose taking as his object the distant flank man, or a point beyond such flank, or a man thrown out on purpose ^ — dressing must then be made gradually, and progressi v^ely, from the fixed point, towards the distant flank one; and each man successively, but quickly, must be brought up into the true line, so as to become a new point, from whence the person directing proceeds in the correction of the others ; and he himself, when so di" recting, must take care that bii* nerson, or his eyes at least, be in the true line, which he is then giving. ^ 5.10. Stepping out, f The squad marches as already di- I rected in ordinary time. On the Stev out } word Step out, the recruit must be P ' I taught to lengthen his step to 33 I inches, by leaning forward a little, L but without altering the cadence. This step is necessary when a temporary exertion in line, and to the front, is required j and is applied both to ordinary and quick time. 5. 1 1 . X « > iSfiM J iiT- - CMMMfc R E C R U I T.-^mthout Arm. tl Mark Time, Ordinary Step. -S, 11. Mark Time. On the words Mark Time, the foot then advancing completes its pace^ after which the cadence is continued, without gaining any ground, but al- ternately throwing out the foot, and bringing it back square with the other. At the words Ordinari/ Step, the usual [ pace of 30 inches will be taken. This step is necessary nnarching in line, when any particular battalion is advanced, and has to wait for the coming up of others. S, 12. Stepping Short. Step Short. Ordinary Step. On the word Step Short, the foot advancing will finish its pace, and af- terwards each recruit will step as far •^ as the ball of his toe, and no farther, until the word Ordinary Step be given, when the usual pace of 30 in- ches is to be taken. This step is useful when a momentary retardment 9f either a battalion in line, or of a division in column, ihall be required. S» 1 3. Changing the Feet. Change Feet. .Wi To change the feet in marching, the advanced foot completes its pace, the ball of the other is brought up quickly ] to the heel of the advanced one, which instantly makes another step forward, so that the cadence may not be lost. This m PART I. J t»': 4 ''>4 This may be required of an individual, who is step- ping with a different foot from the rest of his division ; in doing which he will in fact take two successive steps with the same foot. • ; - S. 14. The Side or Closing Step. The side or closing step is performed from the halt in ordinary time, by the following commands : ' ^ t" V Close to the Right— March. • -' Close to the Left — March, Close to the Right, March. Halt. Step back. March. In closing to the right, on the word March, eyes are turned to the right, and each man carries his right foot about 12 inches directly to his right (or if theliles are closed, to his neigh- bour's left foot,) and instantly brings up his left foot, till the heel toucheshis right heel ; he then pauses so as to per- form this movement in ordinary time, and proceeds to take the next step in the same manner ; the whole with perfect precision of time, shoulders kept square, knees not bent, and in the true line on which the body is formed. — At the word Halt, the whole halt, turn their eyes to the front, and are perfectly steady. (Vide S. 43.) — ir. S. 15. Back Step. The Back Step is performed in the ordinary time and length of pace, from the halt, on the command Step back, — March, — the recruit must be ^ taught to move straight to the rear, preserving \' ;a^geg«g ^'" '■■' R E C R U I T.—mtfiout Arms. Jlf preserving his shoulders square to the front, and his body erect.— On the Halt. , word Halt, the foot in front must be , Lbrought back square with the other. A few paces only of the back step can be necessary at a time. VI ' Murc/i. 'nt '- It 6«H :/:. S. \6. The Quick Step. The cadence of the ordinary pace having become perfectlyhabitual to the recruits, they are now to be taught to march a quick time, which is 108 steps in a minute, each of 30 inches, making 27O feet in a minute. — The command Quick March, being given wiih a pause between them j the word Quick, is to be considered as a caution, and the whole to remain perfectly still and steady j on the word March, they step off with the left feet, keeping the body in the same posture, and the shoulders square to the front ', the foot to be lifted off the ground, that -^ it may clear any stones or other im- pediments in the way ; and to be thrown forward, and placed firm -, the whole of the sole to touch the ground, and, not the heel alone; the knees are not to be bent^ neither are they tu be stiffened, so as to occasion fatigue or constraint. — The arms to hang with ease down the outside of the thigh; a very small motion to pre- vent constraint may be permitted: but not to swing out, and thereby oc- casion the least turn, or movement of the shoulder ; the head is to be kept to the front, the body well up, and the utmost steadiness to be preserved. This t" — y u .V^VS. P A R T I. ^•j ' This is the psce to be used in aW^lings of division^ from line into Column, or from column into line ; and by battalion columns of manoeuvre, when inde- pendently changing position.- It may occasionally be used in the column of march of small bodies, when the route is smooth, and no obstacles occur } but in the march in line of a considerable body it is not to be required, and very seldom in a column of manoeuvre; otherwise fatigue must arise to the soldier, and more time will be lost by hurry and inaccuracy, than is at- tempted to be gained by quickness. The word March, given singly, at all times denotes that ordinary time is to be taken ; when the quick fiKM'ch is meant, that word will precede the other. — The word March marks the beginning of movements from the Halt : but it is not given when the body is in previous mbtion. S* 17. The Quickest Step. \V Tbt quickest time, or uheeling march, is iso steps of 30 inches each, or 300 feet in a minute. The di- rections already given for the march in quick time relate equally to the march in quickest time. This is applied chiefly to the purpose of wheeling, and is the rate at which all bodies accomplish their wheels, the outward file stepping 33 inches, wheth';r the wheel is from line into column, during the march in column, or from column into line. — In this time also should divisions double, and move up, when passing obstacles in line } or when u the column of march, the front of divisions is increased, or dimi- nished. Three or four rtcruits in one rank, with intervals of 18 inches between them, should be practised in the different steps, that they may acquire a firmness and independence of movement. '■■' * Many L. .'■k„ r ilO ' •^^MCP "mm R E C R U I T.^mthout Anns. 15 Many different times of march must not be re- quired of the soldier. — These three must suffice, ORDINARY TIME (75 steps in the minute), quick TIME (108 in the minute), wheeling, or ouickest TIME (120 in the minute). Plummets, which vibrate the required times of march in a minute, are of great utility, and can alone prevent or correct uncertainty of movement; they roust be in the possession of, and constantly referred to by, each instructor of a squad, — the several lengths of plummets, — swinging the times of the different marches in a minute are as follows : ^ Ordinary time • Quick time Quickest, or wheel- ing time - 75 steps in the minute - 108 - - - . 1 120 - - - - In. Iluiwf. 24 96 12 03 U 80 A musket ball suspended by a string which is not subject to stretch, and on which are marked the dif- ferent required lengths will answer the above pur- pose, may be easily acquired, and should be frequent- ly compared with an accurate standard in the adju- tant's, or serjeant-major's possession. The length of the Plummet is to be measured from the point of suspension to the centre of the ball. Accurate distances of steps must also be marked out on the ground, along which the soldier should be practised to march, and thereby acquire the just length of pace. Six or eight recruits will now be formed in rank, at close files, having a steady, well dril- led suldier on their flank to lead, — and file MARCHING may be taught than. S. li. 4i ■ «t 16 >r'« To the face. P A' R T r. S. J 8.* File Marchbio;.*'- The recruits must first facey and then be instructed to cover each other exactly in file, so that the head of the man immediately before, may con- ceal the heads of all the others in his front. — The strictest observance of all the rules for marching is particularly necessary in marching by tiles, which is first to be taught at the ordinary JmCf and afterwards in quick time. March, 1' r < On the word March, the whole are immediately to step off together, gain- ing at the very first step 30 inches, and so continuing each step without encreasing the distance betwixt each recruit, every man locking or plac- ing his advanced foot on the ground, before the spot from whence his pre- ceding man had taken up his, — no looking down, nor leaning back- ward is to be suffered, on any pre- tence whatever, — the leader is to be directed to march straight forward to some distant object given him for that purpose, and the recruits made to cover one another during the march, with the most scrupulous ex- actness, — great attention must be paid to prevent them from marching with their knees bent, which they will be very apt to do at first, from an apprehension of treading upon \j\\Q heels of those before them. \% ,*; i *\ S. I J). R E C R U I T,^mthout Arms, 17 S. 19. Wheeling of a single Rank, ordinafy Time, from the Halt, Right meel, March, 171 At the word. To the Right Wheel, the man on the right of the rank faces to the right ; on the word March, they step off together, the whole turning their eyes to the left (the wheeling flank) except the man on the left of the rank, who looks inwards ; and, during the wheel, becomes a kind of base line for the others to conform to, and maintain the uniformity of front. — The outward wheeling man always lengthens his step to 33 inches, the whole observe the same time, but each inan shortening his step in pro- portion as he is nearer to the stand- ing flank on which the wheel is made, — during the wheel, the whole remain closed to the standing flank; that is, they touch, without incom- moding their neighbour ; nor must they stoop forward, but remain up- right ; opening out from the stand- ing flank is to be avoided ; closing in upon it, during the wheel, is to be resisted. oOn the word, HaltyDresn, each man halts immediately, with- out jumping forward, or making any false movements. When the recruits are able to perform the wheel with accuracy in the ordinary time, they must be practised in wheeling in quickest time. Nothing will tend sooner to enable the recruit to acquire the proper length of step, according to his distance from the pivot, than continuing the wheel without halting for several revolutions of the circle. And als« giving the word Halt, Dress, at instants not C expected. Halt, Dress. A -If P A JR T I. expected, and when only a 6th, 8th, or any smaller proportion of the circle is completed. , V^' S. 20. JVIieel'mg of a single Rankyfrom the March, r\ "^X. Hall, Right -^; \u ',ir-) Halt, Dress. March. < The recruits are first to be taught to perform this wheeling at the ordi- tiarif time, and afterwards in the quickest^ or proper uhecUng time ; — the rank, marching to the front at the ordinary time, receives the word of command. Halt, Right Wheel, the man on the right of the rank instant- ly halts and faces to his right : the rest of the rank turning their eyes to the wheeling flank, as directed in the precedingseclion,immediatelychange the step together to wheeling time j as soon as the portion of the circle to be wheeled is completed, the words Half, Dress, will be given, (a pause of 2 or 3 seconds maybe made) and then March, on which the whole rank steps off together at the ordi- ^nary time. S.Ql. JVheeling haclmmrdsy a single Rank. On the Right, backwards, Wheel. March. At the words On the Right, back' wards Wheel, the man on the right of the rank faces to his left : At the word March, the whole step back- ward in wheeling time, dressing by the outward wheeling man } those nearest the pivot man making their steps extremely small, and those to- wards % . \ t cf. y * — ' •» R E C R U I T.^fTithout Arms. 19 I wards the wheeling man encreasing •{ them as they are placed nearer to him. — The recruit in this wheel must not bend forward, nor be suf* fered to look down ; but by casting {{ * his eyes to the wheeling flank, pre- >i serve the dressing of the rank. — On " '' the word Halt, the whole remain perfectly steady, still looking to the wheeling flank till they receive the word Rig/it Dress. * The recruits should be first practised to wheel back- wards at the ordinary step ; and at all times it will be necessary to prevent them from hurrying the pace } an error soldiers are very liable to fall into, particulaily in wheeling backwards. Where large bodies wheel from line into column, this wheeling is necessary to preserve the covering of pivot flanks, and the distances of the divi&ions^ which the line is to break into. Halt. Hight Dress. S. 22. J F heeling of a single Rank on a moveable Pivot, In wheeling on a moveable pivot, both flanks are moveable, and describe concentric circles round a point/which is removed a few paces from what would otherwise be the standing flank; and eyes are all turned towards the directing pivot man, whether he is on the outward flank, or on the flank wheeled to. When the wheel is to be made to the directing pivot flank (suppose the left) — the rank marching at the or- Right dinary pace, receives the word Right Shoulders Shoulders forward ; on which the forward. pivot man, without altering either the time or length of his pace, con* tinues his march on the circumfe- •{ rence of the lesser circle, and tracing »r.'^^' C2 out r !3 ■ 1- 1 \\ ] ■ '(^ <■ \ '"* I to * PART I. ^ out a considerable arch, on the prin* ciple of dressinif, gradually brings round his rank to the direction re- quired without obliging the other flank, which is describing the cir- cumference of a larger circle, to too Forward, great hurry: — On the word Forward, shoulders are squared, and the pivot marches direct to his front. When the directing pivot is on the outward flank, and lias todescribe the circumference of the larger circle, on Left the worrf Left Shoulders, forward, he Shoulders, will, without changing the time or forward. length of his pace, gradually bring round the rank to the required direc- 'W tion, so as to enable the inward flank to describe a similar arc of a lesser cir- cle, concentric to the one he himself I is moving on.— 'During both these j wheels, the rank dresses to the proper •< pivot, and when he describes the smaller circle of the wheel, the other flank, which has more ground to go over, will quicken his march and step . out.— When the pivot describes the greater circle of the wheel, the other flank, which has less ground to go over, will step shorter and gradually conform. In the first case, the re- cruit must be cautioned against open- ing out from the pivot; and, in the latter, from crowding on him. The just performance of this mode of wheeling de- pends so much on the directing pivot, that a well- drilled soldier should, at first, be placed on the flank named, as the proper pivot, and changed occasionally. It is used, when a column of march (in order to fcA- low the windings of its route) changes iti direction ia tcneral, leu than the quarter circle. ^ WiTB Vs.' C SI 3 With Arms. •-ii- S. 23. Position of the Soldier, WHEN the firelock is given, and is shouldered, the person of the soldier remains in the position de- scribed (Section 1.) except that the wrist of the left hand is turned out, the better to embrace the butt, the thumb alone is to appear in front, the four fingers to be under the butt, the left elbow is a little bent in* wards, without being separated from the body, or being more backward or forward than the right one. — The firelock is placed in the hand, not on the mid- dle of the fingers, and carried in such a manner that It shall not raise, advance, or keep back one shoulder more than the other ; the butt must therefore be for- ward, and as low as can be permitted without con- straint ; the fore part nearly even with that of the thigh, and the hind part of it pressed by the wrist against the thigh ; the piece must be kept steady and firm below the hollow of the shoulder ; should the firelock be drawn back, or attempted to be carried high, in that case, one shoulder will be advnncedj the other kept back, and the upper part of the body distorted, and not placed square with respect to the limbs. 1^ Each recruit must be separately taught the position of shouldered arms, and not tiUowed to proceed until he has acquired it. ct. {...^tj, ; C 3 " iiff ^'wU» 4h 22 PART I. *S'. 24. Different Motions of the Firelock. Tiie following motions of the firelock will be taught and practised as here set down, until each recruit is perfect in them j they being necessary for the ease of the soldier in the course of exercise. ' Supporting arms. As mentioned Carrying arms. '^ ' ' in the J Ordering arms. Manual j Standing at ease. Extrcise, \ Attention. [^Shouldering from the order. The recruit must be accustomed to carry his arms for a considerable time together ; it is most essential he should do so, and not be allowed to support them so often as is practised, under the idea of that long carrying them is a position of too much constraint. - A platooUji company, or battalion, are never to MARCH, or HALT, Or FORM IN LINE, Or tO DRESS, (which are situations where the greatest accuracy of front is required,) but with carried arms.— —When such bodies are standing and halted, arms may be oc- casionally supported. — When marching in column, or that small divisions are moving any distance in file, firelocks may also be supported, V' I — ■ - S, 25. Attention informing the Squad, j When the Sauad or division (consisting of from six to eight files) is ordered io fall iu^ each man with carried arms, will, as quick a^ possible, take his place in his rank, beginning from the fiank to which he is ordered to form ; he will dress himself in line by the rule already given } assume the ordered position of a soldier^ m RECRUIT. A ^^'iM Arws. 23 soldier, and stand perfectly still, and steady, until or- dered to stand at ease, w that some other command be given him. Attention must be paid that the files are correctly closed j that the men in the rear ranks cover well, looking their file leaders in the middle of the neck : — That the ranks have their proper distance of one pace (30 inches) from each other: — That all the ranks are equally well dressed : — That the men do not turn their heads to the right or left ; and that each man has the proper unconstrained attitude of a soldier. Rear Hanks take Open Order. March. S.Q6. Open Order. " f The recruits being formed in three ranks at close order, on the word Rear Rankstake open Orders the flank men on the right and left of the center and rear ranks, step briskly back one and two paces respectively, face to their right, and stand covered, to -{ mark the ground on which each rank is to halt, and dress at open order j every other individual remains ready to move.— On the word March, the dressers front, and the centre and rear ranks fall back one and two paces, each dressing by the right the instant ^it arrives on the ground. Rear Ranks take Close Order. March. ■ (l\Jti S.Q7' Close Order. SOn the word Rear Ranks take Close Order, the whole remain perfectly steady; at the worAMarchf the ranks close within one pace, marching one and two paces, and then halting. C 4 S.QB. \ '■-■ H P A-R T I. yJ *,3 1.' 6'. 28. Maniml Exercise. J ^-^ : According to Regulation. >v v 1 V\ « f ■ - .S'. 29. Platoon Exercise, . According to Regulation. .if' aS^ 30. Firings, When the recruits have acquired the management of their arms, and are perfect in the motions of the manual and platoon exercises^ they will be instructed at closed ranks in firing. Direct to their front. , _ Obliquely to the right and left, f By files. 1. *S'. 31. Marching to the Front and Rear, Fig, sj. Caution, ^ The squads or division^ is to be par- ticularly well dressed j files correct; arms carried ; the rear rank covering exactly, and each individual to have his just attitude and position before the squad is ordered to move.— The march will be made by I he right or left flank, and a proper trained man will therefore conduct it. The word 6'9uacl or Division, may be given as a cau- tioo; 1 *! inn,Ki, iilMl»iWi«a.< ^i>ifciwte.> i .ii lM i » i n > R E C R U I T.—fVith Arms, 25 March. Halftfront, March. i tion ; and at the word March, each man steps forward a full pace. — Ttic recruit must not turn his head to the band to which he is dressing, as a turn- i ng of the shoulders would undoubted- \y follow.— His elbows must be kept steady, without constraint ; if they are opened from his body, the next man must be pressed upon } if they are closed, there arises an improper dis- tance which must befilled up; in either case waving on the march will take , place, and must therefore be avoided. C Turning to (he right or left, or J about, in march, is not to be at first J practised ; but the squad is to halt, (jront, by command, and then march. On many occasions where a body, great or small, after a movement to the rear, or in file, is immediate- ly to resume its proper front j instead of the words to halt, and face about, the word Halt front, as one command, will be given, when it is instantly to face to its proper front in line. Nor in general should there be any sensible pause between the halt front of any body; and it is after fronting, that the dressing, if necessary, is ordered to take place. , , ,^ "^ As the being able to march straight forward is of the utmost consequence, he who commands at the drill will take the greatest pains in making his squad do so;— For this purpose he will often go behind his squad, or division, place himself behind the flank file by which the squad is to move in marching, and take a point, or object, exactly in front of that file ; he will then command March, and, remaining in his place, he will direct the advance of the squad, by keeping the flank file always in a line with the object. — It is also from behind, that one soonest perceives the lean- ing back of the soldier, and the bringing forward or falling back of a shoulder 3 faults which ought in- stantly i !i PART I r^ » ' stantly to be rectified, as productive of the worst con- sequence in a line, where one man, by bringing tor- ward a shoulder, may change the direction ot the march, and oblige the wing of a battalion to run, in order to keep dressed. ] . In short, it is impossible to labour too much at making the soldier march straight forward, keeping always the same front as when he set off. — This is ef- fected by moving solely from the haunches, keeping the body steady, the shoulders square, and the head to the front ; and will without difficulty be attained by a strict attention to the rules given for marching, and the careful observance of sn equal length of step, and an equal cadence, or time of march. ,\ Changing from ordmary to quick time, and frora quick to ordimry time, must always be preceded by a previous, but instantaneous Aa/^; although this may not appear essential for the movements of a squad, di- vision, or battalion, it is absolutely so for those of a larger body, and is therefore required in small ones. Turning on the march, in order to continueit, though inaccurateand im- proper for a large body, is necessary when companies, or their divisions, -{ are moving in file, and that without halting, it is eligible to make them move on in front; or when moving in front, it is proper without halting to make them move on in file. Ui^'it Turn. Left Turn. As helps for fixing the true time, or cadence of the march, the plummet must be frequently resorted to ; the words left, right, may when necessary be repeat- ed, slowly for ordinary timey and quicker for quick time. — Strong taps of the drum, if in just time, and regulated by the plummet, are also directed to be given immediately before the word March, thereby to im- print the required measure on the mind of the recruit; but they are on no account, or in any situation, to be given during the march. 5.32. R E C R U I T.^mth Artrn. m S. 32. Open and Close Order, on the March. Rear Ranks, take Open Order. The squad, when moving to the front in ordinary time, receives the word Rear Riuiks take Ojjvn Order } on which the front rank continvies its ^ marchjWithout altering the pacf, and the center and rear ranks mark the time, viz. the center once, and steps off at the second step ; the rear step- ping off on the third pace. Rear Ranks take Close Order. f S. 33. March in File to a Flank. The accuracy of the march in file is so essential in all deployments into line, and in the internal move- ments of the divisions of the battalion, that the soldier cannot be too much exercised to it. The whole bat- talion, as well as its divisions, is required to make this flank movement without the least opening out, or lengthening of the file, and in perfect cadence, and equality of step. To the —face, '' After facing, and at the word Marcht March. the whole squad steps offat the same instant, each replacing, or rather over- stepping the foot of the man before him J that is, the right foot of the se- cond man comes within the left foot of the first, and thus of every one, more or less over-lapping, according to the closeness. .- -V, PART I. i 3 :^s , 'f »/ [ I I I closeness, or openness of the files, and the length of step. — The front rank will march straight along the given line, each soldier of that rank must r:! look along the necks of those before -^ him, and never to right or left: other- wise a waving of the march will take . } place, and of course the loss, and ex- tension of the line, and distance^ whenever the body returns to its pro- per front. — The center and rear ranks •r • fi V . must look to, and regulate themselves by their leaders of the front rank, and always dress in their file. — Although file marching is in general made in quick time ; yet it must also be prac- tised, and made in ordinary time. The same position of feet as above, takes place in all marching in front, where ^the ranks are close, and locked up. With a little attention and practice, this mode of marching, which appears so difficult, will be found by every soldier to be easier than the common method of marching by files, when on every halt the rear must run up to gain the ground it has unnecessarily lost. 5.34. Wheeling in File, ■ ' The squad, when marching in file, must be accus- tomed to wheel its head to either fjank ; each Ale fol- lowing successively, without losing, or encreasing dis- tance. — On this occasion, each nie makes its sepa- rate wheel on a pivot moveable in a very small degree, but without altering its time of march, or the eyes of the rear ranks being turned from their front rank.— • The front rank men, whether they are pivot men or not, must keep up to their distance, and the wheeling men must take a vtry extended step, and lose no time in moving on. Tke ^ -^^^'' ■■iMMVipMMMMa mx. R E C RTJ I T.'-Wkh Arms. 89 The head of a company or battalion marching in iile, must change direction in the same manner on the moveable pivot, by gradually gaining the new from the old direction, and thereby avoiding the sudden itop that otherwise would take place. S. 35. Oblique marching in Front. When the squad is marching in front, and receives the word To the Right Ob' Right ohliqtte: each man, the first lique. time he raises the right foot, will, in- stead of throwing it straight forward, carry it in the diagonal direction, as has been already explained in Sect. 8. taking care not to alter the position of his body, shoulders, or head. The greatest attention is to be paid to the shoulders of every man in the squad, that they remain parallel to the line •^ on which they first were placed, and that the right shoulders do not fall to I he rear, which they are very apt to do in obliquing to the right, and which immediately changes the direction of Forward. the front.— On the word Forward, the incline ceases^ and the whole march forward. — In obliquing to the left, the same rules are to be ob- served, with the difference of the left leg going to the left, and attention Jo keep up the left shoulder. The same instructions that are given for ordinary time serve also for quick time; but this movement, though it may be made by a squad, or division, cannot be required from a larger body in quick time. Obliquing to the right, is to be practised sometimes with the eyei to the leA } and obliquing to the left, with .'JO .*%'i^. ' I PARTI. I with the eves to thp • h towards Its center. '^ ""' "'" continue turned front »!? '""™ ""fc. and '.^.'""'""""■''e'-i- asbefor" '^''''"""f'he.houlder^r""'", ""> ""c «*s oerore it began — Tk: ^ • "' durin": the nhl.„., ™-''--4rare^,/^SsilHr" I whoie step toffeiher irf .u ™'*' "■« "heel, incline s?as t^l •*"■:'"« "■« P?^ftont rank m« '"rr ^''P™- '--SsT"C-r.'^--;.c.^^ wnec/, the rear ran ka ' may March. ffalt. ^' '^tpt-r R E C R U r T.-^mth Arms. 31 may pre§erve their distance of one pace from each ntber. — Great attention should be paid, to prevent the recruits from fixing their eyes on the ground. (Vide Sect. 21.) S. 39, Wheeling from the March y on a L . , halted and moveable Pivot. The directions for >vheeling on a halted, und on a moveable pivot, have already been given, in Sects. 20. and 52.— The squad should now be practised in both, until the recruits are thoroughly confirmed in thos^ movements. ]i' S. 40. Stepping out. — Stepping shorty — • ■ ' Marking the Time, — Changing the Feetf — The Side Sttpy — Stepping back. ( The squad must likewise be practised in stepping out, stepping short , markttig the time, changing the feet, the side step, and stepping back, the instructions for I which have been fully detailed in the L foregoing sections. It cannot be too strongly inculcated, or too often re- collected, that upon the correct equality of march, esta- blished and practised by all the troops of the same ar- my, every just movement and manoeuvre depends. When this is not attended to, disunion, and contusion must necessarily take place, on the junction of several battalions in corps, although, when taken individually, each may be in most respects well trained: It is in the original instruction of the recruit, and squad, that this great point is to be laboured at, and attained. —The time and length of step, on all occasions, are prescribed. The TIME is infallibly ascertained, by the frequent oorreclions of {\\g plummet , which, when so applied, will I W^ M J . 1 I U HW i« 98 PART I. ^ ' will soon give to each man that habitual measure so much desired j and therefore every driller must have it constantly in his hand ; and, as it has been already observed, before any squad, or larger body is put in march, 5 or 6 strong taps of the drum should often be given in exact time, as regulated by the plummet ; which will imprint the true measure on each ear, and prepare for taking an accurate step at the word March. The length of step is only to be acquired by repeated trial, and therefore, before the recruit, or squad, is put in motion, each instructor should ascertain the space on which he is to drill his men ; he will therefore (supposing that he himself is accurate in his paces, and that there is ground for that purpose) mark out an oblong square of 40 paces by 20, or 30, the corners of which he will ascertain by halberts, stones, or in any other visible manner; along the sides of this figure he will march the pivot flank of the squad, making correct wheels, and halts at the angles.— The time of march being so exactly ascertained, he will then see that the sides of the oblong are gone over at the known number of steps; and if there be any in- accuracy, he will lengthen or shorten the step, till the squad marches with the utmost precision ; every man preserving his just position, and all the other indis- pensable attentions in marching being strictly ob- served. Where there is a sufficiency of ground, the squads will occasionally march over greater spaces, but the distances should in the same manner be ex- actly ascertained, so that there may be no doubt as to the true length of the step.— In proportion to the strength of squads or drills, one or more formed sol- diers should accompany each, to march on the flank, give distances, and, in other points^ to regulate the motions of the drill. 4" D. D. End of Part First. > \ «■■■■■ C 33 ] f> PART 11. >iiP'' Of the Platoon, or Company* S. 41. Fortnation of the Platoon. 'T^HE Recruit belog thoroughly -*- grounded in all the preceding parts of the drill, is now to be instructed in the movements of the platoon, as a more immediate preparation for his joining the battalion ; for this purpose from lotosofiiesaretobeassembled, formed, and told off in the following njanner, as a company in the bat- (talion. The platoon falls in, in three ranks at close or- der, with shouldered firelocks } the files lightly touch- ing, but without crouding ; each man will then oc- cupy a space of about 22 inches.— -The commander of the platoon takes post on the right of the front rank, covered by a Serjeant in the rear rank, — Two other Serjeants will form a fourth or supernumerary rank, three paces from the rear rank. The platoon will be told off in sub-divisions, and if of sufficient strength, into four sections; but as a sec- tion should never be less than five files, it will often happen that for the purposes of march, three sections only can be formed. The four best trained soldiers are to be placed in the front rank, on the right and left of each sub-division. * £» When 34 PART II. '^. i When thus formed, the platoon will be practised in Opening, 1 and > Ranks. (Sect. 26 and 27.) Closing of 3 jtothefronf, 7 by the right Dressing j to the rear, ^ y^^J ( in an oblique direction, j and be exercised in the several motions of the firelock, as have been shewn in the preceding part. Close order is the chief and primary order in which the battalion and its parts at all times assemble and form. — Open order is only regarded as an exception from it, and occasionally used in situations of parade and show.— In close order, the rear ranks are closed up to within one pace, the length of which is to be taken from the heels of one rank to the heels of the next rank. — In open order, they are two paces distant from each other. In order to distingmsh the words of command given by tne instructor of the drill (who represents the com- mander of the battalion) from those given by the commander of the pla- toon, or its divisions, the commands of the former are in capital Letters, those of the latter in Italic. '1 lit.i 1 . ,-t,it. •T ... >■•■•'-:' ' J S. 42. Marching to the Front, Fig. Q, r , , . ,' " : > In the drill of the platoon, the person instructing must always consider it as a company in battalion, and regulate all its movements upon that principle ; be will therefore, before he puts it in mo- tion to front or rear, indicate which flank i .1 wmmm rmi— PLATOON, or COMPANY. 36 practised in 26 and 27.) [>y the right and left ; the firelock^ ter in which ssemble and n exception IS of parade s are cJosed lich is to be leels of the aces distant >e words of istructor of the com- from those )f the pla- commands ^L Letters, mt. ' the person ider it as a ^gulate all ciple j he it in mo- ate which flank If $)•'•.. iKy < flank is to direct, by giving the word EYES RIGHT, Or EYES LEFT} and then March. — Should the right be the directing flank, the commander of the platoon himself will flx on objects to march upon in a line truly perpendi- cular to the front of the platoon ; and when the left flank is ordered to di- rect, he and his covering serjeant will shift to the left of the front rank, and take such objects to march upon. To MARCH on one object only, and to preserve a straight line, is an operation not to be depended on ; the conductor of the platoon, before the word march is given, will therefore endeavour to remark some distinct object on the ground, in his own front, and perpen- dicular to the directing flank : he will then observe some nearer and inter- n-icdiate point in the same line, such as a stone, tuft of grass, &c. these he will move upon with accuracy, and as he approaches the nearest of those points, he must from time to time chuse fresh ones in the original direction, which he will by this means preserve^ never having fewer than two such points to move upon. If no object in the true line can be ascertained, his own squareness of person must deter- mine the direction of the march. A person placed in the rear of a body can, more readily than if placed in its front, determine the line >»hich is per- pendicular to such front, and could we suppose ranks and files most perfectly correct, the prolongation of each file would be a perpendicular to the front of the body. D2 As 4;sj .V I n ai^i Trm— 'T i- iit-M PART II. As the MARCH of every body, except in the case of inclining, is made on lines perpendicular to its then front, each individual composing that body must in his person be placed, and remain perfectly square to the given line ; otherwise he will naturally and insensibly move in a direction perpendicular to his own pers5n, and thereby open out, or close in, according to the manner in which be is turned from the true point of his march. — If the distortion of a single man operates in this manner, and all turnings of the head do so dis- tort him, it may be easily imagined what that of se- veral will occasion, each of whom is marching on a different front, and whose lines of direction are cross- ing each other. . " ' Accuracy and squareness of position, the equality of cadence and step, the light touch of the files, which is never to be relinquished, just distances and true lines of movement, will give, without apparent con- straint, the head being turned, or the least trouble taken in dressing, the most decisive exactness in the marches, and operations of the largest bodies. The platoon, during its march in line, will occasi- onally be ordered to Step out - ' ' vide Sect. - - 10. Mark Time - - ■ - - 11. • Step short • - -' - - 12. Open and close ranks — - - 32. Oblique - - • — — — - 2 . 35, ,- < .^ 5 S. 43. The Side Step. The side or closing step, must also be frequently practised : it is very necessary and useful on many oc- casions, when halted, and when a very small distance is to be moved to either flank.— As for instance to open or close files ; to join one division to, or open it from another } to regain an interval in line ; to move a whole- I- \ y MM *l'. EsursB PLATOON, or COMPANY. m whole battalion, or parade, 30 or 30 paces to a flank j to regulate distances between close columns before deploying ; alterations made in this manner are im- perceptible from the front, and better made than by /acing and file marching : the words of command must be decided and strong. When the whole platoon istoclose, at the word to the right close, the platoon officer takes one step to the front, and instantly faces about, the co- vering serjeant replacing him : On the word MARCH, the whole move toge- ther agreeably to the directions (in Sect. 14.) On the word halt, the platoon officer resumes his place, hav- ing stepped in the same manner as the men, but fronting them, and thereby (^assisted in preserving the direction. TO THE RIGHT CLOSE. MARCH. HALT. < S, 44. The Back Step, ITBP BACK, — >MARCH. The platoon must be accustomed from the halt, at the words step back. — march, to step back any ordered number of paces in the ordinary time and length, as it is an operation that may be frequently required from a battalion. • ^ * S. 45. File Marching, ■ 4 ,?'.' LEFT FACB. In marching by files, the commander of the platoon will lead the front rank j therefore when the movement is by the left ; on the word to the left face, D 3 he. 38 PART ir. ,«!• , QUICK MARCH. Halt, Front. '■- A i I he, and his covering serjeant, will in- ■^ stantly shift to the left flank of the pla- toon ; at the word quick march, the whole step off together (vide Sect. 18)} and on the word Halt, Front, the leader and his Serjeant will return to . their posts on the right. , S. 46. JFJieeling from a Halt, RIGHT WHEEL, MARCH. ,^J'• In wheeling either forward or back- ward from a halt, the commander of the platoon, on the word right or LEFT WHEEL, niovcs out, and places himself one pace in front of the center of his platoon : during the wheel, he turns towards his men, and inclines to- <( wards that flank which has been named as the directing or pivot one, giving the word Halt, Dress, when liis wheeling man bus just completed the required degree of wheel : he then squares bis platoon, but without moving what was the standing flank, and takes his post on the directing flank. 6'. 47. IV heeling forward by Sub-divisions from Line. CAUTION. 'o, On the caution by sub-divisions, TO THE RIGHT WHEEL, the command- er of the platoon places himself one pace in front of the center of the right sub- '\ J J. M MtoMMW^p^yM mttt* :>■-»■> — PLATOON, or COMPANY. 39 It, will in- ;'^B of the pla- •V^^B AARCH, the 'iW^K. ;Sect. 18)i -^^^B Front, the k^a^^B MARCH. 1 return to dB i ' •* . , ' ■ v" rd or back- imander of RIGHT or and places the center wheel, be nclines to< £en named giving the 3 wheeling B required quares his ; what was es his post iivisions rvisioNS, ommand- nself one the right sub- I sub-division, at the ?ame time the men on the right on the from rank of each sub-division face to the right. Fig. 3. A. Halt, Dress. 5, ''"^3 At the word march, each snb-divi- sion steps oft' in wheeling lime, observ- ing the directions given in Sect. 19 and 37. The commander of the platoon turning towards the men of the leading sub-division, and inclining to its left (the proper pivot flank) gives the word Halt, Dress, for both sub-divisions, as bis wheeling man is taking the last step that finishes the wheel square ; and in- stantly posts himself on the left, the pivot flank. — The serjeant coverer dur- •{ ing the wheel, goes round by the rear, and takes post on the pivot flank of the second sub-division. It is to be observed, that the commander of the platoon invariably takes post with the leading sub-division j therefore, when the platoon wheels by sub-divisions to the left, the commander of the platoon moves out to the center of the left sub- division, and during the wheel inclines towards the right, now become the proper pivot flanks of the sub-divisions. The proper pivot flank in column, is that which when wheeled up to, preserves the divisions of the line in the natural order, and to their proper front : the other may be called the reverse flank. In column, divisions cover and dress to the proper pivot flank; to the left when the right is in front j and to the right when the left is in front. D4 5. 43. ■— fYmi^iir- '- 40 PART II. ( * ? S. 48. Wheeling backwards By Sub-divi- ' "* sions from Line, N CAUTION. •ti • -*1 The platoon will also break into open column of sub-divisions by wheeling backwards. — When the right is intend- ed to be in front : at the caution by SUB'OIVISIONS ON THE LEFT, BACK- WARD WHEEL, the commander of the Elatoon moves out briskly and places imself in front of the center of the right sub-division. — The man on the left of the front rank of each sub-divi- Lsion at the same time faces to the right. MARCH. Fig. 4. A. Halt, Dress, On the word march, each sub-divi- sion wheels backward in quickest time, as directed in Sect. 21. and Sect. 38. During the wheel, the commander of the platoon turns towards his men, in- <{ dining at the same time to the ieft^ or pivot flank, and on completing the wheel, gives the word Halt, Dress, to both divisions : he, and his covering Serjeant, then place themselves on the left flanks of their sub-divisions. It may be considered as a rule almost general (the reasons for which are given in the following part) that all wheels of the battalion, or line (when halted, and when the divisions do not exceed l6, or 18 files) into column, should be backward.— And all wheels from column into line, forward.^-The only necessary exceptions seem to be in narrow ground, where there is not room for such wheels. , _ . I- i'.f *i S.49. H A ->■•-. -^.^■<»- - - ■— ^V^' PLATOON, cr COMPANY. 41 S. 49. Marching on an Alignment, in Opeti Column of Sub-divisions. The platoon having wheeled back- wards by sub-divisions from line, (as directed in the foregoing Section) and a distant marked object in the pro- longation of the two pivot flanks beln^ taken ; the comnnander of the p^atcion,, who is now on the pivot Bank ot l«>e leading sub-divisiosu imm^f/d^ald^' fixes on his intermediate poiati to si^^rch on, (Vide Sect. 42.) On ihe vc/d v> arch, given by the instrucior of he driil, both divisions step off at the s*ami? hi stant J the leader m the tlrst tlivissoD marching with t!>« utmost * :;'^adine3;> and equality of p3f c on th : poii'ts he has taken ; and the commnndcv of the second division preserving the leader of the first in the exact line wlib the dis- tant object ; at the same time he keeps the distance necessary for fornniiig from the preceding t^ivis5on, 'vhich distance is to be taken f;^om the frcnit rank.*— These objects are in themselvii sufificient to occupy the whole atten* tion of the leaders of iW. two divisions; therefore they rrr'sl not look to, nor endeavour tocornt.ct :ho mirch of their divisions, which caie inu:i bw entirely left to the non'cr^rnnassioned oificers of ,the supernuiT>ct'aiy r&uk. Fig. 4. A.^ ,m- i' S. 50. *' «^ .-^srwK ■*i. -. I fi !l i PART ir. 6'. 50. fVheeling into Line from Open Colmnn of Sub-divisions, The platoon being in open column of sub-divisions, marching at the ordi- nary step on the alignement, receives Halt. the word Halt, from the instructor of the drill ; both divisions instantly halt, and the instructor sees that the leaders of the divisions are correct on the line in which they have moved j he then gives the word (supposing the right of the platoon to be in front) by sub- LEFT divisions to thb left wheel into WHEEL liks ; on which the commander of into line, the platoon goes to the center of his sub-division, the two pivot men face to their left exactly square with the aligne- ment, and a serjeant runs out and places' himself in a line with them, so as to mark the precise point at which the right flank of the leading sub-divi- sion is to halt, when it shall have com- AiARCH. pleted its wheel. — At the word march, the whole wheel up in quickest time ; during the wheel, the commander of the platoon, turning towards his men, inclines to the wheeling flank, and gives the word Halt, Dress, at the mo- ment the wheel of the division is com- pleting ; the commander of the pla- i ♦ toon, if necessary, corrects the internal dressing of the platoon on the serjeant and pivot men : this dressing must be quickly made, and when done, the commander of the platoon gives \\\^ Ej/cs Front, ^'oxA Eyes front, in a moderate tone of voice, and takes post in line, as di- rected m Sect. 41, In Halt, Dress. PLATOON, or COMPANY. 4f$ In all wheels of the divisions of a column that are to be made on a halted pivot in order to form line, the flank firelock of the front rank on the hand wheeled to, is such pivot, not the officer who may be on that flank, and whose business is to conform to it. All wheelings by sub-divisions, or sections, from line into column, or from column into line, are per- formed on the word given by the commander of a battalion, when the whole of a battalion is at the same instant so to wheel ; or on the word given by the commander of the company, when companies singly^ or successively, so wheel ; they aie not to be repeated by the leaders of its divisions. x Hulfjrhfel. S\ 51. In open Column of Sub-divisions Xi'heeling into an AUgnement. The platoon being in open column of sub-divisions, marching in ordinary lime; when its leading division arrives at the ground, where the wheel is to commence, it receives the word Halt^ right, or ie/t, wheel, from its com- mander ; on which the rear ranks, if at one pace distance, lock up ; the flank front rank man alone halts, and faces into the new direction, while the others quicken their pace to the wheel- ing time, and regulate their step by the outward hand (to which they have turned (heir eyes,) until the wheel is ^ completed. — He then gives the word //(///, Dress. Halt, Dress, for his division to dress to the hand it is to move by ; and when- ever the second division, which has continued to advance in ordinary time, ;iiiivrs close 00 the wheeling point, be gives .".' I' M 4f# March. ,) -kiiil HaltyWheel. Haiti Dress. March. ' P A R T II. gives his division the word Match, and moves on in ordinary time, so as its rear rank does not occasion even a mo- mentary stop to the division behind it, which at that instant receives the word fVheel, then Halt, Dress, and tinally March, whenever the leading division has gained its proper distance from it. The officer conducting the leading (and every other) division of the column in march, on any given point or object where it is to wheel into a new direc- tion, and to its proper pivot hand on a halted pivot j always stops at that point, or object, close on his own outward hand, and gives the word wheel, when the front rank of bis division has taken one pace beyond such object ; he thus allows space for his own person (when the wheel is finished) to move on close behind the new direction of march. But if the proper pivot flank is to be the wheeling one, each commander of a division gives his word Pf'^heel, as he successively arrives at such a distance from the point on which ne has moved, as that at the completion of the wheel, his division may halt per- pendicular tp the new line, but with the given point, of course, behind the proper pivot ; and that he also in his own person be on the new direction, prepared to give his word March, and to proceed. The sub-divisions must take care that they continue their march correctly upon, and wheel exactly at the point where the leading one wheeled, and that they do not shift to either flank, which, without much ai- ttntion, they arc apt to do. In this manner the sub-divisions succeed each other ; nnd if the words of command br justly given ; no stop made on arriving at the wheeling point ; the wheels pcrlorraed at an increased time and step; and the pro- per halt, dressing, and pause be made after the \^heel ; no l>ili mill PLATOON, or COMPANY. m rch, and so as its n a mo- ehind it> he word \ finally division rom it. d every ny given w direc- d pivot } his own vhen the ; beyond n person e behind wheeling lis word distance at at the halt per- n point, he also jrepared hat they tuch at- no extension of the column wili . .ke place, but the just distances between the divisions wili be preserved. The officer conducting the directing flank of a di- vision may, during the wheei be advanced one or two paces before it, and remain so^ facing to the flank, that he may the more critically be enabled to give his word Halt : at which instant, he will again place him- self on the flank ready to judge his distance, and to give the word March. \ S. 52. In Open Column of Suh-dwisions wheelinff into a new Direction on a moveable Pivot. The commander of the leading sub- division, when at a due distance from the intended new direction, will give Right the word Right (or left) Shoulders for- Shoulders ward (vide Sect. 82,) and he himself forward. carefully preserving the rate of march, without the least alteration of step or time, will begin to circle in his own person from the old into the new di- rection, so as not to make an abrupt V} ^ wheel, or that either flank shall be sta« tionary } the rest of his division on the principle of dressing will conform to the direction he is giving them : when this is effected he will give the word Torxcard. Forward. — The leader of the second sub-division, when he arrives at the ground on which the flrst began to wheel, will in this manner follow the exact tract of the flrst, always preserv- ing his proper distance from him. Thus, without the constraint of formal wheels, a column, when not conflned on its flanks, may be con- ducted in alb kinds of winding and changeable direc- tions : f1 "^ .ivmm 46 •J. '' *' PART II. ?iv •' I tions : for if the changes be made gradual and cir- cling, and that the pivot leaders of divisions pursue their proper path at the same uniform equal pace, the true distances of divisions will be preserved, which is the great regulating object on this occasion, and to which every other consideration must give way. To which ever hand the wheel is made on a move- able pivot, it is made within, and cuts off the angle formed by the intersection of the old and new direc- tions. In wheeling in column of march on a fixed pivot, the outward file, whether officer or man, is the one -wheeled on. N ' S, 53. Countermarch by Files, The platoon, when it is to countermarch, must al- ways be considered as a division of a battalion in co- lumn; the instructor of the drill will therefore, pre- vious to his giving the caution to countermarch, sig- nify whether the right or left is supposed to be in front, that the commander of the platoon, and his co- vering Serjeant, may be placed on the pivot flank be- fore such caution is given, as it is an invariable rule in the countermarch of the divisions of a colutfln by files, that the facings be made from the fiank, then the pivot one, to the one which is to become such. On the word, to the right, or FACB. left, FACE, the platoon faces, the com- mander of it immediately goes to the other fiank, and his covering serjeant advancing to the spot which he has quitted, faces to the right about. — At QUICK the word auiCK march, the whole, MARCH. except the serjeant coverer, step off to- gether, the platoon officer wheeling short round the rear rank (viz. to his right, if he has shifted to the right of the .1 PLATOON, or COMPANY. 47 Hah, Front, Dress. the platoon ; or to his left, if he be on the left of it ;) and proceeds, followed by the platoon in file, till he has con- ducted his pivot front rank man close to his Serjeant, who has remained im- moveable; he then gives the words Halt, Front, and Dress, squares, and closes his platoon on his serjeant, and then replaces him. All countermarches by files necessarily tend to an extension of the files j unity of step is therefore abso- lutely indispensable, and the greatest care must be taken that the wheel of each file be made close, quick, and at an increased length of step of the wheeling man, so as not to retard or lengthen out the march of the whole. \ Companies, or their divisions, when brought up in file to a new line, are not to stand in that position, till the men cover each other minutely : but the in- stant the leading man is at his point, they will receive the word Halt, Front, and in that situation close in and dress correctlv. S. 54. IVheeling on the Center of the Platoon. The platoon must be accustomed to wheel upon its center, half backward, half forward, and to be pliable into every shape, which circumstances can require of it^ but always in order, and by a decided command. The words of Command are. VLATOON, ON YOUR CENTER TO THE r RIGHT, 2 LEFT, \ RIGHT ABOUT, f LEFT ABOUT, WHEEL. f When the wheel to be made is to the I right, or right about, the right half pla- toon is the one to wheel backward, and the I 1 MV^yfcp* II i»«ijaHn)H'' - "-ii J ■■•- - -"-ftifciu i! ' j. ' :i.,Ag B I I ii I ■ I m •ni MARCH. I >y ■,' <■» PART II. [' Halt, Dress. the left forward. —The reverse will take place, when the wheel is to be made to the left, or to the left about. — On the -( word MARCH, the whole move off toge- ther in the quickest time, regulating by the two flank men, who during the wheel, preserve themselves in a line with the center of the platoon ; as soon as the required degree of wheel is per- formed, the commander of the platoon gives the word Halt, Dress, and in- stantly squares it from that flank, on ^which he himself is to take post. 1 1 - ( :< 5 S. 53: Oblique A/arc king. ' ^ The instructor of the drill will have the oblique march frequently practised, in platoon, in sub-divi- sions and in file 3 (vide Sect. 33. 36.) He will see when in divisions, that the rear ranks lock well up, and cover exactly; when in file, that the exact dis- tances are preserved between the flies : and in both cases, that the platoon, during its march, continues parallel to the position from which it commenced ob- liquing. OS ■ fi'\. , "* .y. 56. Increasing and diminishing the Front of an Open Column halted. Fig. 5. B. FORM PtATOON. Increasing. " ' * The platoon standing in open column of sub-divisions (suppose the right in front) receives from theinstructorof the drill a caution to Form Platoon.— The commander PLATOON, or COMPANY. 49 commander of the platoon turning Rear S. divi~ 1 round instantly orders, RearSitb-dm- 61011 left Oh" I sionJeftOhliijue. — Q.March. When lique. Q. March. Foruard. Fig.5. A. FORM SUB- DIVISIONS. Lrft Sub- division , ill' xvardsjace, Q. March. ^ it has obliqued so as to open its right flank, he gives the word Forward ; and on its arriving in a line with the first division he orders. Halt, Dress, and takes post on the left, the pivot flank of the platoon. Diminishing. On the cautionary command from the instructor of the drill to form SUB-DIVISIONS, the Serjeant coverer falls back to mark the point where the left flank of the sub-division is to be placed. — The commander of the pla- toon advancing one step, orders Left Sub'divisioNf inwards face, and in- stantly on facing, the three leading files disengage to the rear. < Halt, Front. Left, Dress. < C At the word Q. March, the file I passes round, and behind the serjeant, ! and at the proper instant receives the I words; Halt, Front — Left, Dress. — The commander of the platoon is now on the left flank of the first sub- division, and his serjeant on that of the second. It is to be observed as a general rule in diminishing thefront of a column, by the doubling of sub-divisions or sections (whether the column be halted or in mo- tion) that the sub-division or section, on the reverse flank, is the one behind which the other sub-divisions, or sections, double. Thus, when the right is in front, the doubling will be in the rear of the right division : and, vice versa, when the left is in front; by Mihich means, the column is at all times in a situation to form line to the fiank, with its divisions in their nattiral order^ by simply wheeling up on the pivot , .f..;r.> ' E flanks. r ^•- ;' .?'! ! i< )l I 'iij, •■•^^««»«.B>M m mtimtM^iMmammi0 ^ i mfn^fn ''M :■ t 'i n m PART II. flanks.— And in increasing the front of a colamn, the rear sub-divisions, or sections, oblique to the hand the pivot flank is on ; so that when the right is in front, the obliquing will be to the left; and the reverse when the left is front. / 1 f ' * ' S. 57. Increasing and diminishing the Front of an Open Column on the March, Fig. 6. B. FORM PLATOON. Left Oblique, Quick March. Foruard. •. -y^. Ordinary. Fig. 6. A. FORM SUB- DIVISIONS. Left Suh'di- vision, Mark time. Increasing, ■it The platoon marching at the ordi- nary time in open column of sub-divi* sions (suppose the right in front), re- ceives from the instructor of the drill the cautionary command, form pla- toon ; the commander of the platoon instantly turning round gives the words. Left Oblique -^Quick March j on which the rearsub-division obliques totheleft,and as soon as itsrightflank is open, receives the word. Forward, —When it gets up to the first sub-di- vision (which has continued to march, with the utmost steadiness, at the or- dinary pace), the commander of the platoon gives thewordOrirtMi|Mi• " { ,**! ' ','1 ilH 1 •■'■ J. ' JKii B iWii ' MiU^ ff KajJ i m — uunfur^ iiw Mt 1 111 )^ 54 rXONT FORM PLATOON. E^es left. FRONT FORM SUB-DIVI- SIONS. ■.•,\H^-..; Front form» < r P A R T II. in the following manner,ei ther by pla- toon, sub-divisions, or sections. — On the word, TO the front form pla- toon; the front rank man of the leading file alone halts, and is instant- ly covered by his center and rear rank men : every other file of the platoon makes a half face to the left, and successively moving up, dresses on the right file: when the com- mander of the platoon sees it is pro- perly dressed, he gives the word, Eyes left, and places himself on the pivot fiank. Should the order have been, to THE FRONT FORM SUB-DIVISIONS (form sections), the leading sub- division, or section, will proceed in the manner already detailed for the platoon ; the succeedi ng sub-div isions, or sections, will each continue mov- ing on, until its front file arrives at the proper forming distance from the division in its front, when it will re- ceive from its commander the word. To the Front form, 2ind will instantly form up by files in the manner al- ready described. . „ >. t S,6l, Forming from File to either Rank. The platoon marching in file (suppose from the right) has only to halt, and front, to be formed to the left fiank. To form to the right it will receive the word To the right form : the front rank man of the leading file instantly turns tohis right, and halts; hiscenter and rear rank men at the same time move round and cover him. All the '■' other Right form. v. v^ ^lB i MLiS ^-^wafc PLATOON, or COMPANY. 65 Other files of the platoon make a half turn to their left, and move round suc- cessively, in a line with '4e right hand file; the center and rear rank men of each file keeping closed well up to their file leaders. 6'. 62. To form to either Flank, from Open Column oj Sub-divisions. HALT, LEFT WHEEL r The platoon marching in the ordl- I nary time in open column of sub-divi- J sions, to form to its left, receives the »«•<:.•> I words, HALT, LEFT WHEEL INTO LINE, INTO LINE. I — MARCH, &c. and procecds as has al- [ ready been shewn in Section .so. '' To form the Platoon to its right flank, the instructor of the drill gives the cautionary word of command, to THE RIGHT FORM THE PLATOON J OH which the commanders of the several divisions shift to the right flank, and the commander of the leading sub-di- vision instantly gives the word to his division. Halt, right wheel ; and when it has wheeled square, he orders. Halt, right dress ; goes to the right flank of his division, and dresses it on the in- tended line of formation. — The com- mander of the other sub-division, on the leading one being ordered to wheel, gives the word. To the left oblique, and gradually inclines, so as to be able to march clear of the rear rank of the di- vision forming : this being well eftect- ed, the word. Forward, will be given I to the division, and it will move on in E 4 the MARCH. SIGHT FORM PLATOON. Half, right wheel. Halt, right dress. Left Oblique. Forward. ^^WMMfet /I \ 56 I'rd H Z'S ■ Haltr Right wheel, Halt, Diesi XI p. \ ■ \ .Y/ PART 11. the rear of the one formed. — "When the second sub-division is isrrived at the left flank of the first, its commander gives the word, Hight •wheel, then Halt, dress vp ; on which the division moves up into the line with the one formed : and its commander from the left of his Urst division, dre^^ses his own on the given flank point, as quickly, and as accurately as possible, and resumes his proper platoon place. \y •i.t ',,?' ^>, iS'. 63. The Platoon rnoviifg to the Fronts to gain ground to a Flank, by a March in Echellon, by Sections, Fig. 8. 1 ♦ » \i\ .I'l.. "Sections, RIGHT. Forward, In the drill of the platoon, when the soldier is completely formed, he may be taught to march inechellon, by sections. , This is a very useful movement for a -<( battalion, or large body moving in line, that is reiiuired to gain ground to a flank, and may be substituted instead of the oblique march. — It will be per- ^ formed in the following manner : The platoon marching to the front in the ordinary time, receives the word BY SECTIONS TO THE RIGHT J the right hand men of the front rank of each section turning in a small degree to their right, mark the time two or three paces, during which the sections are wheeling in ordinary time on their pivot men ; at the fourth pace and at the word. Forward, the whole move on direct to the front that each section has now acquired, and the I PLATOON, or COMPANY. 67 FORM PLA- Tooy. r FORWARD. :>;.Hi:j ihfc commander of each section, hav- ing taken the post on the right of hit division, the platoon continues its , march in echellon. On the word form platoon, the pivot men mark the time for three paces, turning back in a small degree to the left, tlie original front, and the sections instantly vheel backward into -l line ; at the fourth pace the whole move forward. When the platoon is in two ranks only, two paces instead of three will be sufficient to mark time, and to step off at the third, instead of the fourth pace. i::fU S. 64. Fro?n three Ranks Jormhig in tiro Ranks. .- - FORM TWO DEEP. tEFT FACE. QUICK MARCH. Fig. 9. Halt, front, Dress up. The platoon halted, is ordered, form TWO DEEP ; the rear rank men of the left sub-division instantly step back one pace} on the word left face, the rear rank of both sub-divihions face ) the word c.jiCK MARCH is then given, on which the men of the rear rank of the left sub-division step short, until those of the right get up to them j they then move on with them in file ; as their rear is clearing the left Hank of the platoon, the commander (who has shifted to this flank during the move- ment) gives the words IJalt, front, dress up, he instantly dresses them on the standing part of his platoon, and resumes his post on the right.— One third, or one more sub-division, is thus .added to the front of the company. If :i >H I t \ ^ ri - jiifiii iT>friti.'.T lifiiaai 58 PART II. If a battalion is standing in open column, it may thus increase the front of ihe companies, before it forms in line:— But if it is already in line, and is thus to increase its front, its companies must take suf- ficient intervals from each other, before their respec- tive rear ranks can come up. — If a battalion in line is posted, and without deranging its front is to lengthen out a fiank by the aid of its rear rank ; it would or- der that rank to wheel backwards by sub-divisions : The last sub-division of each company would close up to its first one : All the sub-divisions (on the head one) would move forward to open column : An offi- cer would be named to cotQjj^and those of each two companies : The open column would move on, and ivheel into line on the flank of the battalion.— In this manner also would a line of several battalions length- en itself out by the rear ranks of each. S. 65, From two Ranks forming into three Ranks, i I Fig. 9. FORM THREE SSEF. RIGHT FACE. , auicK MAHCH. i. ' Halt,/ront. The platoon being halted and told off into three sections, it receives the word FORM THREE DEEP ] OU which the third section instantly steps back one pace} the word right face is then given, and the man on the right of its front rank, on facing, disengages a lit- tle to his right : on the word quick -{ MARCH, the front rank men of the third section step off, (hose of the other rank mark the time till they have past, and then follow. — W'vn the leading man has got to the right of the platoon, the commander gives the word Halt, fronts on which each man halts, faces to his left, and instantly coven his proper tile leader. A rear W. t1 PLATOON, or COMPANY. 6^ » It may before it ?, and is take suf- r respec- in line is lengthen ?ould or- ivisions : close up the head An offi- each two on, and —In this s length' 1 yi A rear rank which has lengthened out, and formed on the flank of its battalion, would return to its place, by wheeling back into open column of sub-diviiiions j marching till each arrived at its flank point -, the lead- ing rank of each would wheel up and cover ; and the second rank would move behind it, and also wheel up. -y^ Exercise of Company. ■;»,.; vi / / ft S. 66.67. 68. 69. f In pursuance of the foregoing in- structions, and on the principles they contain, every company of a battalion must be frequently exercised by its own officers, each superintending a rank, or an allotted part of the whole. And on the space of 70 or 80 yards ! square, can every circumstance be ) practised that is necessary to qualify it for the operations of the battalion. That space being pointed out by under officers, or other marks, as directed at the latter end of the first part, the company will exercise, both at open, and close files, without arms, and with arms, as follows : Bi/ Ranks. jti't \f- .i; 1 . March in swingle file, by successive ranks, along ihe four sides ef the square. — The same by two's. 2. March and wheel, by ranks of fours :— File off singly and double up, preserving proper distances, and not quickening on the wheel. 3. March, and wheel, by sub-divi-^'^ns of ranks. 4. March, and wheel, by whole ranks. f ' . 5. March to front, and to rear; ranks at 10 paces asunder. 6. March ./*! 6' 6o ./>^'/;p A,R,T. JL,;i,..M Mi l\ I::l M i i I !ir I 1) '/. ' 6. March thc^ company \n a jingle rank, to. fronts ap^ to rear, by flank, and byi,tjie c^ntc^r. , - li ; ' 7. Oblique by ranks. ' '""'^^ " >' M.rJ jr.i.M , fir vc 8. Open, and close files, and intervals, by the side step. , i . , . ; ,. 9. March in file, to either flank. 1 0. Ranks successively advance 6 or 8 paces j halt, and dress. — Ranks successively fall back 6 or 8 paces 3 halt,, and dress. * 11. Advance or retire 2 or 3 flank men : the ranks dress to them. r ••'■•iflC , 12. Open and close ranks. ,' ' i .iit.dv/ ti'} )v nacj ['Ki ;!: r : :.'. .}[nr: \ ''' ' '' "' tl'M.\\ Mb to '/'j "-'(J -j., ^! ^ ;i A j i^lo( \^ 4i ^lose Ranks, and Files. h-'l"''. !."b 53 .fjttnnri tmi;, •. 13. March, and wheel in all directions, by sub-di- visions, and by company.— Shorten step and lengthen it, the march to be made both in ordinary and quick time.— The wheels to be made in wheeling time. 14. Advance, and retire, 2 or 3 flank files, and dress to them. 16. Open and close to the flank, by the side-step. 16. Change front by the counter-march by files, / 17. March to the flanks, close and withouf opening out. — Form to the front, or to either flank. ;r>f. 18. March oblique. f^ I 19. Sub-divisions double on the march, and again form up, by obliquing. ' 20. Wheel backwards by sub-divisions. — March !, . V ;^ along PLAT06i\\ or COMPANY. 61 to front. .n y the side tr< i 4. ■ - ces r8 i . ; halt, paces J the ranks A". by sub-di- lengthen and quick time. ,. files, and ide-step. by files. »u« opening and again 13. — March along f V Pi ^ i -.Ai along the line, to prolong it: Fotra to the flank; wheeling up 3 or to the front by obliquing. f^ • 21 . File from the flank of company to the rear, as in the passage of lines; Haltt frgnt; — Close in to pivot file : — Wheel up as in forming in line. ,, j, '22. From 3 deep, form 2 deep. :**'^' "-'^ 23. From 2 deep, forms deep., \ ..-,1, ..,.(,., , ., 24. Exercise of the firelock, m.inual, and platoon, by ranks, and company. 25. Firings by files, sub-divisions, and company. The necessary pauses and formations, betwixt these movements, in order to connect them, must of course be made. — They may be practised in whatever succes- sion shall at the time be found proper. I'he greatest precision must be required, and observed, in their exe- cution, according to the rules already laid down. { .^r cr ii\-.- ..it i -..frl Every officer must be instructed in each individual circumstance required of a recruit, or a soldier ; alsQ in the exercise of the sword and accustomed to give words of command, with that energy and precision, which are so essential. — Every officer, on first joining a regiment, is to be examined by the commanding officer ', and, if he is found imperfect in the know- ledge of the movements required from a soldier, he must be ordered to be exercised, that he m:iy learn their just execution. Till he is master of those points, and capable of instructing the men under his com- mand, he ia not to be permit'.ed to take the command of a platoon in the battalion. Squads of officers must be formed, and exercised by a field officer j they must be marched in all directions, to the front, oblique, and to the flank j they must be marched in line, at platoon distance, and preserve their dressing and line, from an advanced center j they must be placed in file at platoon distance, and marched as in open PART II. i I 5 open column ; they must change direction, as in file, and cover anew in column. In these and other simi- lar movements, the pace and the distances are the great objects to be maintained.— From the number of files in division, they must learn accurately to judge the ground necessary for each, and to extend that knowledge to the front of greater bodies. They must acquire the habit of readily ascertaining, by the eye, perpendiculars of march, and the squareness of the wheel. An officer must not only know the post, which he should occupy in all changes of situation, the com- mands which he should give, and the general inten- tion of the required movement ; but he should be master of the principles, on which each is made j and of the faults that may be committed, in order to avoid them himself and to instruct others. — These principles are in themselves so simple, that moderate reflection, habit, and attention, will soon shew them to the eye, and fix them in the mind ; and individuals, from time to time, when qualified, must be ordered to ex- ercise the battalion, or its parts. ^^ The complete instruction of an officer enlarges with his situation, and at last takes in the whole circle of military science : — From the variety of knowledge required of him, his exertion must be unremitting, to qualify himself for the progressive situations at which he arrives. / > Besides the instruction peculiar to the under-offi- cers, they should be exercised in the same manner as the officers are, as they are frequently called on to re- place them : — The necessity also of order, steadiness, and silence, and of executing every thing deliberately, and without hurry, should be strongly inculcated in the infantry soldier. i D. D. END OF PART SECOND. r I. f If C 63 ] . \ PART III. Or THE BATTALION. ■:■' } y 4 . !> ! A perfect Uniformity in the Formation and Arrange- ment of all Companies and Battalions, is indispen- sable for the execution of just an4 combined Movements. ' I m' ' FORMATION OF THE COMPANY. 'HE company is always to be sized from flanks to center. The company Is formed three deep. The files lightly touch when firelocks are shouldered and carried, but without crowding ; and each man will occupy a space of about 22 inches. Close order is the chief and primary order, in which the battalion and its parts at all times assemble an4 form. Open order is only regarded as an exception from it, and occasionally used in situations of parade and phow. — In close order j the officers are in the rankb, and the rear ranks are closed up within one pace.— In open order} the officers are advanced three paces, and (he ranks are two paces distant from each other. Kacb PART III. Each company is a platoon. — Each company forms two sub-divisions and also four sections. — But as sec- tions should never be less than five files, it will hap- pen, when the companies are weak, that they can only (for the purposes of march) form three sections, or even two sections. When the company is singly formed j the captain is on the right, and the ensign on the left, of the front rank, each covered by a serjeant in the rear rank. The lieutenant is in the rear, as also the drummer and pio- neer in a fourth rank, at three paces distance. The left of the front rank of each sub-division is marked by a corporal. — The right of the left sub-di- vision may be marked by the other corporal. "When necessary, the places of absent officers may be supplied by Serjeants, those of serjeants by corpo- rals, and those of corporals by intelligent men. When the company is to join others, and the bat- talion or part of it, to be formed j the ensign and his covering serjeant quit the flank, and fall into the fourth rank, until otherwise placed. *S. 70. J Then the Compmiy is to take Open : , ■ Order from Close Order. Rear Ranks , take Open Order. At this cominand, the flank men on the right and left of the rear ranks, step back to marl»the ground on which <( each rank respectively is to halt and dress, at open distance; they face to the right, and stand covered j every other , individual remains ready to move. At ?any forms But as sec- it will hap- jt they can ee sections. the captain of the front rank. The ler and pio- nce. 3-division is left sub-di- al. oflficers may ts by corpo- men. and the bat- Isign and his ■all into the March 0/ Me BATTALION. ' 65 At this command, the rear rank dressers front, and the rear ranks fall back one and two paces, each dressing by the right the instant it arrives on its ground: the officers move out in •^ ^ont three paces, and divide their ^ound : one seijeant is on each flank of the front rank:— the pioneer re- mains behind the center of the rear fank : — the drummer places himself on the right of the right serjeant. „ .foiftii^td 'Uh- b«fn, ,n S, 7 1 . When the Company is to take Close Order from Open Order, Rear Ranks , take Close Order, March. \i . f -'-I ■-' The officers, Serjeants^ drummer, face to the right. tn^tui^ ;<:' . • The ranks close within otie pace, marching one and two paces, and then halting. The officers move round the flanks of the cotppany in their respective posts : — the Serjeants and drummer^ fall back, and each individual resume^ his place as in the original clpse order. The above regards the company when single : but when united in the battalion, other posts are allotted to the drummer and pioneer. • '•■ a-'i '.'.iff' i^^i^ih I iiiiiI4n I '■wuaifc »- ;t. .' , . t : ■ Tiet|i:i?.' u31 ijdt ii.,a< •»"-"-'.»f,t^»«.i ' .^ *., ;' ' = IK.P, FORMATION Slrciiglh of the biillii- liuii. ronnati(jti of the bal- tuljoii. Position of the compa- nies in bat- tuhou< Divisions. 66 /PA R T IJL^^ -.0 FORMATION oe j^iie BATTALION. ...»!. The battalion is ten compani^s^ [ , , r'tfr '■) Each Company consists at present of-* ,1 Grenadier, i8 Battalion, 1 Light. 3 Officers, 2 Serjeants, 3 Corporals, 1 Drummer^ 30 Privates. When the companies join, and the battalion is formed, there is to be no interval between any of them, grenadier, light company or other ; but every part (ft the front of the battalion should be equally strung. Each company which makes a part of the same line, and is to act in it, must bc^formed and arranged in the same manner. , ; • The companies will draw up as follows from right to left :— grenadiers j— 1st captain and major ; — 4th and 5th captain j— 3d and 0th captain j — 2d captain and lieutenant-colonel; — light company. — The colo- nel's company takes place according to the rank of its captain : — the four eldest captains are on the right oi" the grand divisions :— officers commanding com- panies or platoons, are all on the right of the front rank of their respective ones. i The eight battalion companies wilf compose four grand divisions )— eight companies or platoons, — six- teen sub-divisions, — thirty-two sections, when suffi.- ciently strong to be so divided, otherwise twenty-four, for the purposes of March. — The battalion is also di- vided into right and left wings. — When the battalion is on a war establishment,- each company will be di- vided into two platoons. — When the ten companies ar& - ."It'" ' / » « .I' Of the BATTALION. 6^ are with the battalion, they may then, for the pur- poses o( firing or deploying, be divided into five grand divisions from right to left. The battalion companies will be nunibered frorii the right to the left, i. a. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.— The sub- divisions will be numbered l. 2. of each; — the sec- tions will be numbered 1. 2. 3. 4. of each j — the files of companies will also be numbered l. 2. 3. 4, &c.-!- The grenadier and light companies will be numbered separately in the same manner, and with the addition of those distinctions. These several appellations will be preserved, whether faced to front or rear. • ' . » The companies must be equalized in point of num- bers, at all times when the battalion is formed for field movement; and could the battalions of a line also be equalized, the greatest advantages would arise; but though from the different strengths of battalions this cannot take place, yet the first requisite always must, and is indispensable. ^.,,..., ,., ^ ,. .*,u^ ■ ■ -■■' ■"■':- ' P . lir:' Ranks are at the distance of orie pace, except tlie fourth or supernumerary rank, which has three paced. All the field officers and the adjutant are mounted. The commanding officer is the only officer ad- vanced in front, for the general purpose of exercise when the battalion is single; but in the march in line, and in the firings, he is in thfc rear of the colours. The lieutenant-colonel is behind the colours, six paces from the rear rank. ' The major and adjutant arc six paces in the rear of the third and sixth companies. One officef is on the right of the front rank of each company or platoon, and one on the left of the batta- lion; all these are covered in the rear rank by their F 2 respective H.;-ul' Coinpnnifs equalized. 4 1 h Formatiou of llie bat-^ talioa at close ordur. A^. w \r 1^ -> IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) // ^/^ <^:> ^^^ 1.0 ^^ Hi I.I Z us 12.0 lliillU^U4 Photographic ^Sciences Corporalion 6^ 33 WHT MAIN ITMIT WnUTIII.N.V. USM (7I1)I79-4S03 ^4^ ^ MM Use of the fuurtli or siipfrnu- iniTiiry rtiiik. m PART III. respective lerjeanti j and tbs remaining officers and Serjeants are in a fourth rank behind tbeir companies. — It is to be observed, that there are no coverers in ||}e center rank to the officers or colours. The colours are placed between the fourth and fifth battalion companies, both in the front rank, and each covered by a oon*oommissionod officer, or steady man in thit rear rank.— One serjeant is in the front rank betwixt the bdlonrs } he is covered by a second ser- jeant in the rear rank, and by a third in the soperna- inerary rank. — The sole baslncis of these three Ser- jeants is, when the battalion moves in line, to advance and direct the ntarch as hereafter roenCipned. The place of the first of those Serjeants, when they Jo move out, is preserved by a named officer or serjeant, who moves up from the supernumerary rank for that |>urpose. The fourth rank* is at three paces distance when halted, or marching in line. — When marching in co- lumn, it must close up to the distance of the other ranks. — The essential use of the fourth rank is, to keep the others closed up to the front during the attack, anu to prevent any break beginning in the rear; on this important service, too many officers and non- cpmmissioned officers cannot be employed. The pioneers are assembled behind the center, form- ed two deep, and nine paces from the third rank. The drummers of the eight buttalion companies are assembled in two divisions, six paces behind the third rank of their second and seventh companies.-~The grenadier and light company drummers and fifers are nh, paces behind their respective companies. The music are three paces behind the pioneers in a single rntik, and at all times, as well as the drum* iners and pioneers, aiC formed at loose €lct, only oc- cupying nu more space than is necessary. , The staff of chaplain, surgeon, quarter-master, and surgeon's mate, are three paces behind tbc music. In *^1 Of th BATTAUON. 6yt iveren in In general, officers remain posted vt'wh their proper companicfl } but commanding ofBeers will occasionally make such changes as they may find necessary. Whenever the officers move out of the front rank, in parade, marching in column, wheeling into line, or otherwise, their places ai-e taken by theii' serjeant coverers, and preserved until (he officers again resume them. When the line is halted, and especially during the firings when engaeed, the serjeant coverers fall back into the fourth rank, and observe their platoons. Rear Ranks take Open Order, OfilcerJ. Replacing svrjeaut!*. S. 72. ir/icn the Battalion takes Open Order, C At this comnnand— the flank men on the right of the rear ranks of each com* pany ske|> briskly back to mark the ground on whiich eiach rank respective- lyfetohalt. They /a onght to be executed by the . whole battalion at the saaae instant, are made by each in consequence of one word from the commander of each : but there are also many occasions in column, and in forming line, where the leaders of divisions repeat, or give the words of Marc/ip Wheel, Halt, Front, Dress, kc, to their several divisions, as is ne- , cessary. Jl. Evety officer must be Bccustomed to give las worda of command, even to the smallest bodies, in the full extent of his voi^, and in a sharp tone :— by such bodies he must not only be heard, bilt by the feaden of others who are dependent on his motions.— The justness of execution, and the confidence of the soU dier, can only be in proportion to the firm, decided, und i f§ PART III. I! ' V '!■« V^ V and proper manner in which every officer of rank gives his orders.— An officer who cannot thoroughly discipline and exetcise the body entrustecl tp his com- mand, is not fit in time of service to lead it to the ene- my 3 he cannot he cool and collected in the time of danger ; he cannot profit of circumstances from an inability to direct Qthers ; the fate of many depends on his ill or well acquitting himself of his duty.-^It is not sufficient to advance with bravery j it is requisite to have that degree of intelligence, which should dis- tinguish every officer according to his station : nor will soldiers ever act with spirit and animation, when they have no reliance on the capacity of those who do conduct them. In the midst of surrounding noises, the eye and the ear of the soldier should be attentive only to his own immediate officer; the loudness of whose commands, instead of creating confusion and unsteadiness, recon- cile to the hurry of action. On all occasions when words of command are not heard, if the directing body has made a change of situ- ation, the rest of the body will conform to it, as soon as the intelligence of the officer has pointed oni what is meani to be done } and the eye will often shew the propriety and moment of movement, wheu the ear has not received theexpianatory command. T The field officers and adjutant of the battalion are at all times mounted. — In order the mure readily to give ground in movements, speedily to correct mis- takes, to circulate ordeTs, to dress pivots, when they ought to cover in column in a straight line, and espe- cially to take care when the column halts, that they •re most speedily adjusted beford wheeling tip into line. These operations no diimounted officer can efifiactually perform, nor in that situation can he see the faults or ^ive the aids which bis duty requires. 0^* >.; ,fri-iil a.ii v! Of the BATTALION. 74 .K- S. 75, Distance of Files, 1 'iTii Except in the instrucfion of recruits and squads, on some occasions of regimen- tal parade or inspection, and in the pe-' culiar exercise of the light company, open files are not to be used, and at all times the battalion, or its most minute parts are to form, move, and act at cloeb files, so that each soldier when in his true posttiun- under arms, shouldered, and in rank, must just feel with his elbow the touch of his neighbour with whom he dresses ; nor in any situation of movenvent in front, must he ever relinquish such touch, which be- comes in action the principal direction for the preservation of his order, and each file, as connected with its two neighbouring ones, must consider itself a complete body, so arranged for the purpose of attack, or ef- fectual defence. It cannot be doubted, when a battalion arrives «t its object of attack at close files, that both its impulse and quantity of fire, in the same extent of front, is greater than when the files are more open ; and should crowding be apprehended, it is at all times more eli- gible to have a division obliged to fall out of the line and double, than to have openings in it, where the enemy must certainly penetrate. The perfect and correct march of a battalioo or line formed at open files seems hardly attainable, be- cause its principal guidance, the touch of the files, does not exist ; each man is necessarily employed to preserve a required distance from his neighbour, he is obliged for that purpose to turn his head, this distorts hii t < I ' t. 76 PART III. r his body, and gives him a direction contrary to the perpendicular line he Rhould march on, a constant opening and closing takes place, and the whole move loose and unconnected.-' It this must necessarily bap- pen In a single battalion, the influence on a line may be easily imagined, and also the condition in which it will arrive near an enemy j who if he is formed at CLOSB FiLBS, if his dressing and line are chiefly de- termined by the touch ; if the eyes alone are glanced towards the center of battalions ; if the figure of each individual is full to the front; if the whole move square along their just lines without crowding, at an uniform and cadenced pace, which habit alone, un- checked by false and adventitious aids, has given : — He at every instant of movement or attack will be firm, united^ and animated with that sense of his own superiority, which perfect order and due consistence will always give. Ill S, 76, Distances of Ranks, Tliere are two distances of ranks. Open and C7o«e— when open they are two paces asunder. — ^Vhen close they are one pace. — When the body is halted and to fire, they are still closer locked up. Close ranks or order is the constant and habi- tual order at which troops ere at all times formed and move.— Of)cfi ranks or order, is only an occasional exception^ made io the situatieo of ,., parade. The distatices of fil^s and ranks relate to the trained soldier } but m the cdnrse of his tuition he must be much ejcercised at open files and ranks* to acquire independeikce, and the commind of bis limbs and body. S. 77. tj-i-mt*^^ Of the BATTAUON. 77 S» 77' Depth of Formation. I'he fundamental order of the infantry, in which they should always foroa and act, and for which all their various operations and move- ments are calculated, is in three ranks; — The formation in tioo ranks is to be regarded as an occasional exception, that may jse made from it, where an extended and covered front is to be occupied, or where an irregular ^nemy, who deals only in fire, is to be opposed.— But from the present low establishment of our battalions, they are during the time of peace permitted, in order to give the more extent of front in their operations, to continue to form and use it, in many of their movements and firings, at the same time not omitting frequently to practise them in three ranks. The formation in two ranks, and at open files, is calculated only for light troops in the attack and pur- suit of a timid enemy, but not for making; an impres- sion on an opposite regular line, whien vigorously assails, or resists. — No ge'neral could manage a consi- derable army, if formed and extended In this manner. —-The great science land object of movement being to act with superiority on cho.ten points; it is neVer the intention of an able commander to have all his men at the same time in action ; he means by skill and ma- noeuvre to attack a partial part, and to bring the many to act against the few ; this cannot be accomplished by any body at open files, and two deep. — A line formed in this manner would never be brought to make or to stand an attack with bayonets, nor could it have any prcspcct of re isting the charge of a deter- mined caValry.— In no service is the fire and consist- ency of the third rank given up ; it spves to fill up the vacancies made in the others jn action, without it fhe battalion would soon be in a singlb rank. ^^J 5. 78. < {\ ■MMli** n PART lit. I*. ■ V l!f - --.I bv;' S. 78. Music and Drums* The use of music or drums to regulate tlicf march is absolutely forbid, as incompatible with the iust atld combihed movements of any considerable body, and giving a false aid to the very smallest. — ^They never persevere in the ordered time or in any other, are constantly changing measure, create noise, derange the equality of step, and counteract the very end they are Supposed to promote. The ordered .anc* cadenced march can be acquired and preserved from the eye and habit alone, and troops must by great practice be so steadied as to be able to maintain it, even though drums, music, or oth(^ circumstances, should be of- fering ^different marked time. — On occasions of parade and show, and when troops are halted, they are properly used, and, when cir- cumstances do not forbid it, may be some- times permitted as inspiriting in column of march, where unity of step is not so critically required. —But in all movements of manoeu- vre whatever, and as at any time directing the cadence of the step, or in the instruction of the recruit, officer, or battalion, they must not be heard *\:i'ii) (• • 4? ' •,, .,,..,,. S.79' The March. ** j^enerHl 1 . All military movements are intended to be made uit«iJt{«u. with the greatest quickness, that is consistent with or- der, regularity, and without hurry or fatigue to t^e troops.— The uniformity of position, cadence, and length I \> -, _-..- O) t/tc BiVTXALK)N. 79 mill ell. length oCttep, produpe that equa^^y and fteedorn of march, on which cyery thing. depends, and to which the soldier must be carefully trained, nor gufTcred to join the battalion until he is thoroughly perfected in this mo(t essential duty. . e. iThe different degrees of march have been al- ready detailed in the first and second parts, and to4hese must the soldier be trained and ficcustomed without drum or music, and by habit alone taught to acquire ,, the given times, and length.— To the equal and un- varied qadence and length of step thus qttained, can troops alone trust for the preservation of their line in advancing upon an enemy ,< when du^f;, the^^mkokeof artillery, rain, fog, i and mmiy- other , Ipcal. circqmo ^ stances, make >t impossibly.' to depepd< on distaitl ,t poiats,. theaocertain time given byitiipid musicianSi or any other adventitious belp.<>c(^'hand ; and each platoon officer separately and successively g\v^^ his worcj Halt at the p^rj^per.j^st^nl that ^ij pla- I J 'I if - . I ) tOOD io I PART HI. <, «< h 17 ii Halt. Oblique march. Fig. 1. touD has dosed to that hand ^ this he U letter enabled to do from being himself oat of the rank^ and facing liis platoon. ' 5. All halts are made to the point, to which (he troops while in march are looking; t>y bringing up the rear foot to the advanced ^one, so as td finish -the step which is taking, wheh the con^mand {s 'given j and after which no dressing or movem^ent whatever is to be made^ until a separate order dfreets it. '• "»>*'> 6. The oblique march enables a body to preserve its parallel direction, and at the same time to gain ground to the flank, as well as to the front, witfaout filing or opening out.-^it is ^rticqlatiy necessary for the battalion in line, when intervals are to be cor* rectedi and in tlie forming up, and dout^ing of its di« visions. — With a body of any extent, it is a very nice operation to execute. Each battalion in line obliques without turning eyes from its own center. — One de- gree of obliquing only (under the angle of about f A*) is to be required tipom an extended front of troops, and eveti in tHat it is exceeding difficult to preserve them : but the smaller divisions of the battalion wiU often be obliged in forming up, or in doubling, espe* cially when in movement, to oblique more or less sharply, according to circumstances.— a4e fjpti tgfg the column is supposed to hav« suAicient roqnt pp ita flanks to allow of .(be necesiary.op^raitions : fyf if b«^ flanks cannot be Itept in progressive tQOKen^^.^yr.ing the change of direction, the wheels cannot \ft versd ; the consequence and confusion thence arising is obvious. 6. To prevent therefore such inconveniences it General must be regarded as a rule almost general— That all rule. wheels by companies or smaller divisions from batta* , lion or line (when halted) into open column should be made backward : and all wheels from open co- lumn into line forward: The only necessary ex ceptions seem to be in some cases in narrow grounds, where there is not room for such wheels. — If the di> «, vision does not exceed 1 6 or 18 file, it may readily wheel back without facing about : but if the division is stronger and the ground uneven, it must Face about — /rAee/— and then Halt, front. ^ • 7. In wheeling backward from line into column, When when the right is to be in front, the wheel is made wheels of on the left; and when the left is to be in firont, the '"'''f*"^'^ wheel is made on the right.— In wheeling forward bw:k^«rd« the standing flank' man facet outward from his diri- or tor- sion : In wheeling BACKWARD^Jie faces inward to hii «M»d«. division. In wheeling forward, the proper pivot flank of the column is the wheeling one: In wheel* ^* ing BACKWARD, the pivot flank ii the standing one, ' G 8 and ( i i Lii i^ 34 PART III. (/' Cirrum- efances in whetiing. and remaining fixed, the divisions, however unequal, will always cover on that hand, which will not be the case if the wheel is made forward. In wheeling for- ward, the command is to the right, (or) to THE LEFT WHEEL : In wheeling backwarp, the command is on the right, (or) on the left BACKWARD WHEEL. 8. As the circumference of the quarter circle which a division describes in its wheel, is one half more, (nearly) than its front ; it is necessary that in open column, it should, in the time that it takes to march over a space equal to the extent of its front, not only complete the wheel of the quarter circle, but be en- abled to move on at its just distance from its preceding division, and not to stop that which succeeds it. The wheel must therefore be quickened, or the step length- ened (or part of both applied) in proportion to the general march. Number of files in a division, each occupy- ing 22 inchri>. 5. 10. 12. 14. 15. 16. 18. 20. 30. 40. 50. 100. Front of divi- iiions in ordi- nary paces oi 30 inches. F.In. S. 20 r.io 8.24 10.8 11. 11.22 13.6 14.20 22. 29.10 ! .36.20 ?3.1fi #- 9%r* Q. A division consisting of lO files, and each occu- pying 22 inches, will at paces of 30 inches take 7 paces 10 inches for its front. — Now 75 steps in a mi- nute being the ordinary time, and iso the wheeling time, 75: 120:: 7^: lif, nearly the number of wheeling paces at 30 inches each, which the wheeling man can take wliile the following division is making its 7^ ordinary paces in front, and 1 1 of which exact- ly complete the quarter circle; but if each of these J 1 paces is lengthened with 3 inches, then the wheel will.be completed in 10 steps, and a pause of oite pace and 2-3ds, of a pace, or 5<(i(hs or a secotid of time, will be reserved for the IJalt, Dress, and March of the divisipn, fifter it has at lo long paces of 33 inchet completed the wheel.— The pause will increase or di- minish ^^ Of the BATTALION. 85 lequal, be the g FOR- )r) TO P, the LEFT which more, I open march >t only be en- ceding t. The length- to the 40. 50. 100. 29.10 I 36.20 riw occu- ake 7 a mi- eeling )cr of eeling aking xact- ihese wheel pace time, ch of nchei ordi- tinish mlnish according to the greater or lesser extent'of the wheeling body," and in the above proportions 'of time and step, it is I -7th of the time employed by snch body' in wheeling the quarter circle. — This allowance, which is barely sutiicient in a division of 10 files, and which cannot well be increased, either by length of step, or quickness of time, shews how pointed and quick the commands must be, not to occasion a loss of ground to each successive division at the po'mts of wheeling. 1 0. It appears that the front of any division or body. Necessary is, in ordinary paces of 30 inches, nearly 3-4ths of •"^collec- tbe number of files of which it is composed.^ — That the circumference of the quarter circle, .which it de- scribes, is in wheeling paces of 33 inches, the same as the number of file, of which it is composed.— That the number of files being once ascertained in each di- vision, the officer commanding it must on all occasions recollect the number of paces that are equal to his front; also the number of wheeling paces which the flaok-man must take to complete the quarter-circle ; ^Iso the spare time, which he has to regulate the Halt, March of his division after wheeling. Uuus. Wheeling paces re- Suired to efcribe The 6th of the circle orananeleof TheSih - The i6th - - The 3 id 'V of the ^ : i number *• f of files of ?" which V the front '•'* J confifts. II. The field-officers and adjutants must always recollect the number of paces the front of the battalioa and its divisions occupy, in order to take up ground exactly in all formations. *S'. 81. Movements. > 1. Every movement must be divided into its dis- tinct parts, and each part executed by its explanatory and separate words of command. G 3 «. Alt«rationf m «.» •^'^-ar^ •»"''•• p — ■ M =**?' 86 PART III. •> i! ' 8. AlfeMtions of position in considerable bodiet should begin from a previous halt ; except giving a new direction to the heads of columns, or increasing or diminishing their front, which may be done while in motion. " 3. The exercise of small bodies, when within the- command of one voice, appears more showy from the keeping such bodies constantly in motion, and by chansiogfrom one manoeuvre to another while on the march. — But such movements, and the formations made from them, must be on accidental points, and however brilliant in battalion practice, and review appearance, where the lesson of the day has been pre-*- vionsly arranged, they can only be considered as oc- casional exceptions, not applicable to large bodies< where hurry must be avoided, and where concert and relative position are indispensable. 4. As the principle of moving, forming, anddress- ing upon given and determined points is jost, all quick alterations of position of a considerable body, attempted while on the move, and not proceeding from a previous halt (however short) are false and defective, the effects of which, though not so apparent in a sin- gle battalion, would be very obvious in a line or co- lumn of any extent—* A pause between each change of situation, so essentially necessary to the movemeota of great bodies, should seldom be omitted in those of small ones ; squareness of dressing, the exact perpen- diculars of march, and the correct relative position of the whole, are thereby a8certained.'-^Such alterations of situation made from the halt may, when necessary, succeed each other quickly; and in many cases no on- necessary time need be taken up by scrupulous dress- ins, but every one may be instanily apprized of the following movement, which circumstances require. f .^- \$ m w ■■■ t>le bodiei t giving a increasing one while RTitbin the ' from ths I, and by iile on the- brmations Hnts, and td review been pre«- red as oc- ge bodies. >ocert and anddress- jost, all ible body, ding from defective, in a sin- ne or co- 1 change oveoientft ! those of t perpen* raition of terationa ecessary, » no an- us dress- d of the quire. 0/tki B^TTA^LION. •7 q yiitt**i''jfWl.^ & 83. ' Points of March, ' 'tj E'ver^^ trader of a bddy which is to niove direct* ly fofWard id ffoAt, roust take care to conduct it in a line truly perpendicular to thiit front— T^o marcH straight on one object only with certainty arici without wav^iog; is not to be depended cm j two cfbjects tfaeilefdte ^aeed and* preserved dtiriog the march in die same straigbf }\m,' are oecessiry ror the purposes of correct fllaoveme»t» when the intent is truly to pro- long a glvto line. ' ;Si: Itwd objects' «^T1 th^tefore id general be pre- pAttd fbr* the; diredtbtf of any considerable body : but sfaodliT A^ lead^, either in ^\6' ot in ftont, hav« onW 006 ibaMc)!!d J:i61htof lU^fdh aStieYt^intfa tb him, be will hihisaliriniMniiyidbkdtlt for his small intermediate points; whiclr ar« alWays to bd found, which he will ttbth titrie to fitiiii tutityfr, arid which are to pr^erve add d^terkdine tbei acij^i-aij^ of his movement towards the,most distant point. (V. S, 48.) S. 8t5. The Alignement. il To ffla/fttb orform id the KLioirBMadT, is to maiketroops marcbi of form in any part of the straight Itne whic^ joins two gt^^ points. — On tb6j««tnes» and observance of xhH line, diepends the accuracy of the most esstfnrliifl movements afod formations, and therefore every relative help must be applied to en- sure it. * ' ■ ' • !^ s. In formations of defence th^ lines occt^pied may be curved, and following the advantagps of the ground, but in those of attack, the lines must be straight, otherwise the troops in advancing must inevitably fall into con^ioh* , 3^ Wha»trtdptttTe>toAirnf1n't straight line, two » G4 necessary -i >(7« t .1 'S . 3S3!ff» . •xr-^Ja^i «8 /PA RTilllL \« rj ,, f l« < . .'i ft ' '. ■ i Fig. 12. rig. 12. Necessity of forma- tions made on given points. necessary points in it must always be previously as« certained. Oofe» the poifiVuo^ kppui''(A'. a. a.) at which one flank of the body, whether small or jgreat, is to be placed, and the oth^r tbe^point of forxa- TioN or DRESSING (D.) on which the front of the body is dirjccted. f vjiiorj ,t tr^ irfr "rT!^. i 4; When battalions, or divisions of a battalionv come up fioccessively into line, the outward flank of the last formed and halted body is Mwaysi' considered- as the pointof ATPui (a., a.) or support o^ the succeed-' ing one, and in this manner is the general line pro- longed from each successive poin^ of Appui, towards the given distant point of formation (D). — ^.The lookr ing and lining of the soldier in forming is always to- wards dijB poin^t of Appui, and tlie correcUon of dress- ing is always from that point, towards jt^e opposite band..— This great principle i? to be pbiserved, from the smallest body to the most cpnsiderabte coirps, ^nd, regulates the iformation of the division^ the ba^^iion^ and the line. ! r *' .'.. S, S4!. Points of' Formation. 1. In the movements of a jingle battalion^ and in the taking up of a new position, it may not seem mate*: rial whether a flank is placed a few yards to the one. band or other, or whether the line formed on is ex-, actly directed, on any certain point.— But when a bat- talion makes a part, of a more considerable body,: then all its positions being relative to other battalions, and to given points, if its formations are not accurate and just, it will 6r6aiiegener2ilcoiifnsion^ and give false directions and distances to those whose situatjon mbst; be determined by it. — The necessity therefore of every single battalion being accustomed to make Its changes of position, and formations on detentiined pbihts, is apparent, and is . an object whieb. comtlilErnding •;,' );u ■• J officeri A ^^v^' u O/" M« BATTAUON. fp , efBcers- must always bold in view, and have their adjutants and otbeis prepared and instructed accord- ingly. S. The line on which troops in colomn noove, or Base line, are successively to form, is tak,en up to any extent by J'jJ'^'JJ' the prolongation of an original short and given base, prolonging established where they first begin to enter, or form it. on that line, the direction of which is determined by the views of the commander, and which can seldom fail to point on some distant and distinct object, that will serve to correct the position of the different persons who successively, as their separate bodies require it, prolong the line from the several points already esta- blished in it.— In general, therefore, the point (A.) where a formation or entry into an aligqement is to be made being marked by a fixed person, the Commander will place a second (o.) 30 or 40 paces, without the Fig. IS. first, exactly in the direction which he determines to give to his new line, and which will generally be on some distant object. These two persons will mark a base, which by adjutants (a. a. a.) or other succes- sively aligning themselves backwards on the two first placed men, and oq ^ch other, may be prolonged to any requiried length, at the same time that the distant point (D.) serves for the commander, who perhapi alone knows it, to correct them upon. 'i .*.-. u vf'^; ; r - I 3. Two original or base points (o. A.) which are to Methods of be prolonged or formed upon , should not be too close ascertain- together, otherwise the direction of the line must be in- '"3 po>nt» distinct, and the farther they are asunder the better can "^ .'""^qJ! a line be taken upon them,— Where two points (o.A.) formatiolj, are t6 be given in a certain direction towards a distant Fig. 13. one (D.) the innermost (A.) should be first determin- ed, and the otter one (o.) is immediately and easily taken over the innermost, and the distant one (D.) of . , "I correclion.— Should the outer one (o.) be first taken, *' ' time is lost in directing the shifting of the inner one (A.) before it is truly lined on the most distant point (p,) -f besides the point (A.) in many changes of po- sition ^^*iiir" ."^'z'sn^L^i^i PA R T m. ) [ k' »- > . i-l Position of prolongers •f lines. -' ^ '..' Fig. 14. •.ri * ( J ' ■!> Metkod of pruloiigiiig a line b\ officers tr Serjeants. •ititwi of i line or colamn it natanilly the first Motk* Uiined(beiog tbepivotflanl&of a compMyoo which tbt change is to be made, or the point of march towirrdt vrhich the column is moving) and from thence the distant point (D.) is then tdken, #h)ch giVeS'the new directioti, ond depends-on theey'eatjd intemioti of th« oomnander; theeasy eUcertaining'of (o.) fbllb^s of oour«e^— Or tbecoroniatider afteir asCertalhihg(A.) will fit (o.) ad lihitum, ato^ fiild oat (D.) if sacfa object pr8brh^ remarkable obj^ct^ they should as soon as possibki dtsebver it, or bn of tUc'nfardr. 5. When a number of officers or serjeants (s. s. s. s.) ■ are to be individually, succesritely, and 'separately ad- vanced, in order lo give a direction on which pivots of the divisions of a column ard to stand, or fkmks .of ^ diyiaions which sucoesjirvelycooile into lineage tb tic . haUisd, or on which the dressing of a battalion is to be corrected. — Two such persons will be truly, aiidpre* viously placed, anld'tbeofthers, the more exactly tdattain . a perfect line, instead of attempting at ofrce to dress by each other's breasts, will first cover ih file with pre* cisiOo M their required distances, and then carefully front as directed, before their several divisions move op to them.^*«xWere(Sucb persona to endeavour to take op "^I^^-- Of the BATTALION. 01 tbeir ground at first, by dreising in a line ; the least inclination backward or forward of the body, and the •ertainty of the shoulders turning, when the eyes are directed to a flank, would make it a difficult opera- tion : But in fil>, when each places himself sqiians on the line, covering the necks of those before him, the inclination of the body backward or forward doca not affect the direction, and the end proposed is at . once attained. 6. In successive forming of divisions into line, a» Fig. i?. from close column, from echellon, &c. the first divi- sion (A. a.) that arrives in, and is truly formed on it, may be considered as the basb, which is constantly prolonging for the others ; the men as they come up, endeavour to line well on the part already formed^ and the officer corrects that liningon the distant point, in the true prolongation which is prepared for him by his adjutant, or other persons, just beyond where the flank of his battalion is to extend, and thus battalion after battalion arrive in line. 7. The ascertaining of the points necessary for the movements and formations of the battalion, is the par- ticular business of the adjutant in tl)e fiefd ; and in thiw exercise be may b« assisted by two detiwhed persona placed bebiod each flank of the battalion, who are properly trained, qaickiy to take tip sifcb ))ne as he fball give them ; bat for this purpose they aft not to jam out before their aid i« wanted, tfor are they to make any unnecessary bustle, and when the operation forwhich ttiey were sent out is acconip4iahed, thsy wdU immediatefy retoro behind tbeir proper flank* 1 <»s #»' y.i'*^ >>» M ■•»• r ' T ■' -■r.b ' . • (»' f » 1 L Jiriit' / S. 85. Dressing. t. In ORSSsiMG whetv halted, a small turn of the head is necessary, and is allowed in order to facilitate it.— When tbe word Dress is alone given, it meaws to the hand to which the troops are then looking, and when ^■- -^ M I WM , I ■ 9« PART III. V- •) r 1 .•;i ■i wv M ' Tig. 15. when eyes are at the same time to be turned to a new point in order to dress, it should be expressed by the addition of right, center, or /e/if.— But whenever the word Hall, Dress, is given by an otHcer to his divi- sion« it always implies that the men are looking, or are to look to such officer, who is then on the flank of Appui. 2. All Dressing is to be made with as much ala- crity of officer and soldier as possible, and the dresser of each body as he accomplishes the operation, will give a caallon Front, that heads may then be replaced, and remain square to the front. If the body to be dressed is extensive, as that of a battalion or parade, the dresser must justly place one division before he proceeds on that which is beyond it. ' 3. On all occasions (without exception) of form- ing and dressing in line, it must be remembered that the soldiers come into line with their eyes direct- ed to the general point Jppui (A.) where the lead- ing flank is to rest, and of course towards whatever part of a line is nearer that point than themselves, which may be already formed before them, and is to General at- them a direction. — But the officer in dressing (with* tentious of out exception) is placed on that flank of his division or body towards which the men's eyes are turned, and from (hence he makes his corrections of the other flank on the distant point (D.) which is previously marked by the adjutant, or some other person placed in the true general line ; therefore, on all occasions, by th^ men's lining themselves to one hand, and the officers correcting to the other, the most perfect line may be obtained. — Should it be neglected to give or prepare^such points of correction, the dressing of the line would be irregular and slow, and depend entirely on the men taking it up from each other, and from the first formed flank, which is an imperfect method, and can never produce a just line, capable of march- ing forward in due order.— The having such points quickly and successively prepared the instant be^re i < ooi tiMiJ 3U yqjoiJ 5k: c:>in^r oi brxri^ they dressing in ail forma- tions. Fig. 15. -ei !» i ^. •jj^- ^m>«P»' Of the BATTALION. 93 Points ne* ucssur^ to be given in inuvenient or fornia« ^ tions. Fig. 13. Fig. 16. ^ey are wanted, and without any noise, or apparent bustle, so that no delay may be made in the operations of the battalion or line, is one of the great attentions of the commanding officer and adjutant, to which al- so the intelligence of the trained persons placed be- hind the Hanks will much contribute. 4. If the open column is to enter on an aligne- inent, there must be three prepiared points) one (A.) where it enters, and which serves «s a future point of correction in march, and in forming j and two more (a. D.) always advanced before it. b. If the close column is to form in line on a flank division, it must have a point (D.) of march and cor- rection beyond the oiher flank, and intermediate small points must also be taken by the leader of the front division, in ordi r to preserve its direction of move- ment, if it forms on a central division, it must then have a point of correction to each flank (D. D.) and march justly on intermediate ones. C. If a battalion takes a new position by the echel- lon march, there must be a point (A.) giveri where its leading flank enters the line and forms on it, and an- other (D.) just beyond its extreme flank on which the dressing of each division is corrected. 7. If the battalion changes position to a flank, by Fig. 14. IS the filing of divisions, the prolongation of two points (A. o.) given in front of the pivot flank of its leading division, will determine thu direction of the other pivots. — If the change is central, one central point (a.) and one (o. o.) on each side of it being prolong- ed, will determine in like manner the line of the other pivots. Fig u.i-j. S. The commander will himself generally have a distant point on which he will determine those batta- lion points, and which will serve him as his point to correct the whole.— Independent therefore of the par- tial helps which advanced Serjeants j^^y give to the formation 1 \i ii Uf ■'^A-fj^ ■ —%.„.. ''A ': i3ffl»8BiBffK?^r r M I ■''' «* Forii)a(ioa of columns. Colunint of murcli and nia- nauvre. PART III. formation and dressing of their several division*, It may be observed, with respect to one or more batta- lions, that in marching in front, or in trolumn, two advanced points and one rear point are necessary : and in successive formations into line, besides its point of j4ppui which each body moves np to, one distant point taken in the determined direction, and beyond where the battalion is to extend, is essential for the correc- tion of it« dressing, aud in this line is every division exactly brought up and dressed. • ».' OPEN COLUMN. 1 . ALL Columns are supposed formed from line for the convenience of movement, and for the pur- poae of again ex:teBding into line.— £very column of march or manoeuvre must be formed by a regular suc- cession of the divisions from right to Left of the line, or of such of Hs parts as compose the column } for whatever is the relative position of a body in line« such ought it to be in column : and where several connected columns are formed, the same flanks of each should be in front, but whether Rights or Lefts will depend on circumstances.— Columns formed from the center of battalions or lines, should seldom be noade, are partial, and not adapted, as the others are, to movements and formations in all situations. 2. The chief objects of the ofbn column are, faci- lity of movement, the quick formation of the line to the flank, and the change of situation in the shortest lines from one position to another.— It it named the column of march or boutb, when applied to common marches, where the attention of men and officers are noC so rouch kept on the stretch.— It ii named theco- >v : lumu f :^i 0/^ieBATTAUON. 9» % lumn of MANCBUVRB, when being within reach of the enemy the greatest exactness is required, in order to its speedy formation at any instant into line, during its transitioD from one position to another. 3. Columns of march or manoRuvre will generally Front and be composed of companies or sub-divisions.— For the extent of purposes of movement they need not exceed 1 6 or 18 cwliunn* ^ files, nor should they be under 6 files in front, when the fornMtlon is three deep, otherwise there will not be spaoe to loosen the ranks, and the battalion will of course be lengthened oufe — An open column occupies the same extent of ground as when in line, mtnps the front of its leading division ; but a body obliged tp,marc|i any distance in file, will at least occupy one half more groupd than it requires vo line; such siiv ation 4s therefore to be avoided. , 4. From line the column is formed, and marches to the front, jRanks, rear, or in any intermediate ob- lique direction, with either its right or left in front. — III each case the battalion or line wubbls the quarter circle by divisions to either flank and halts. The w^oie MARCH. — TheJea4ing division V)heeU into, or moves on, in the prescribed direction, and the rest follow in column. ^. The ppeQ column^ or the column ait half «r quarter distance, qnay also be formed oblique or per*' peodicular^o the Ijne, oa any given division ; by the other divisions (according to which fiwk is ordf red to lc^^**'l'^i "> .fi ■,»M"'l »< 1. IN column divisions cover and dress to the: proper pivot liank ; to the left when the right is in front ; and to the right when the left is in front.' The proper pivot flank in column is that which, when wheeled up to, preserves thft divisions of the line in their natural order, and to their proper front ; the other may be called the reverse flank. :3ni Distance of ranks. 2. In column rear ranks (if not ordered to be locked up) are one pace asunder.— When a consi- derable distance is to be marched, they may be open- ed half a pace more, but without increasing the dis- tances of divisions, which remain such as are pre- scribed according to the object of the movement, and Mrhich are always taken from front rank to front rank. 3. The post of commanding officers in column, is each near the flank of the leading division of his bat- talion. 4. Each division of which a column is composed, it conducted by a leader placed on its pivot flank of the front rank, which is his general post. — In a column of companies of platoons, such leader is the platoon offi- cer.— In a column of sub-divisions, the officer leads the head sub-division of his company j and his co- vering Serjeant in battalion the second.— In a column of sections, the platoop officer leads the head sec- tion of his company; his serjeaut the middle one t> and an officer or serjcant from t|ie rear the last one.— 'When divisions are filing from column into a new position, their several leaders conduct their heads. — When any considerable continuation of the march is the object, and that pivot officers are per- mitted to be in front of their divisions, their flank T*n post« t .«.*> Of tU BATTALION. il posts must be occupied by non-commissioned officers* who remain answerable under their diiectioD for the preservation of the proper distances. ■-,■ 5. In open column, the artillery, music, drummed. Music, &c. of battalions, wheel With and remain closed up to drmnmern the rear, of their respective divisions. — In column at half or quarter distance, they may occasionally, if there is space, move in file, on the flank which is . ,.,.'T not the pivot one. Instead of being kept collected, ' '^\ Ihey may in column of march be sent to their respec- tive companies to remain in the rear of each j but on no occasion whatever is the assembling of them to be allowed to lengthen out, or interfere with the move- ments nf the battalion or column, or to increass thb intervals betwixt battalions in column. 6. On all occasions of wheeling from litie Into cJpen column (except where the narrowness of ground pre- vents it) the divisions WHEEL backward^ on their Fig. 2i. SV. pivot flanks. — The advantage so great, and the ne.ce8- ' eity so evident, of having the pivots remain covering; each other truly, as well as having just distances pre- served, is thereby secured, which will never be the / case in w/iecling f'oruard, from the different strength of battalions in a line, and of companies or divisions , ", in the same battalion. — In wheeling backward, if di- visions do not exceed lO or 18 file, they may readily "WHEEL b;ick without facing about J but if divisions are stronger, and the ground uneven, they must face about— WHEEL— and then. Halt, front, 7. When an open column is to form in line to its WhcT proper front, the divisions will always wheel for- lorwiird i"- ^VAKD on thrir pivots: but should it be meant to ^^^ ''"*' reverse the front, the pivots themselves must then ' wheel forward, which will prevent any falf^e distances Fig. v'5. that un( qual divisions would occasion, although the - flanks they do wheel upon may not then he in regu- lar line. — Should the divisions of the column be of •qual strenijih, the front may then be reversed by H wheeling f « ^^^„ f ^ 98 PART III. m ,< » 'ft k h V •] Wheeling on the cen- ter., FUing5. Wliet'lings in column. Opening or closing of rear ranks. Peculiar attentions in tli«-* open colli mil of ninnucuvrc. M ». r:. wheeling back upon the pivots, which will preserve iht regularity of the alignement. 8. Platoons must.be accustomed to wheel occasion- ally upon their center, half backward, half forward, and to be pliable into every shape which circumstances may require, but always in order, and by the decided commands of their officers. g. All marches of battalions are made in column of companies, or other divisions, never by files where it can possibly be avoided. Filings are only applied to the internal movements and formations of the divi- sions of the battalion, and in some changes of posi- tion, not to any considerable manoeuvres of the entire battalion, orof greater bodies. 10. All wheelings and filings made from the halt, from line to form in column, or from column to form in line, are made at a quick step. 1 1 . When the rear ranks close or open on the march, in the one case they will step nimbly up, in the other they will slacken their pace until the due distance is attained. In both cases the front rank continues to proceed at its then rate of march. 13. In an open column of manoeuvre of one or more battalions, the divisions ought as much as pos- sible to be equalized. The whole must be put in march at the same instant, and the step preierved equal, as to the time and length, whether marching on level or inclined ground. £very division must trace out the exact tract which the leading one does; nor must any part make a partial alteration of pace. These circumstances observed, which will preserve the justness of wheeling distances, and the covering of pivot flanks; and no embarrassments being al- lowed in the intervals of battalions, an exact line to the flank is at any instant procured, by the wheel of the quarter circle} and all closing in, unsteady shift- ing, and after- dressing, is avoided. 13. The -./• \' p* ~f ..,^.. Of the BATTALION. # Fig. 22. 'li. Wheels iu coluiuB. 13. The countermarch by files of the divisions of Fig. 40. B. a column each on its own ground, changes a column ru-niiir. that is standing with its right in front, into a column march by with its left in front, and thereby enables it to return liies. along the ground it has gone over, and to take new positions without altering or inverting the proper front of the line. (S. 63. 100.) 14. The countermarch by divisions success. ely Fig. 11.42. from the rear to the front, changes the leading flank (jountcr- of the battalion column, but allows it to continue its „,.,ri;h by former direction of march, and is a previous raanceu- divisions. vre often necessary and required to enable a battalion to take up a relative position. (5. 101.) All countermarclies necessarily change tlie pivot flanks of columns. 15. Open column of companies will in general wheel on ajixeft pivot, except that in the continuation of a march, they have sufficient ground gradually to make their changes of direction on a moveable one, if so ordered. Columns of sub-divisions or sections will always wheel on a moveable pivot, when it can be done. Columns at half or quarter distance, must also make their necessary wheels on a moveable pivot, otherwise a stop must ensue. 16. No doubling up, increasing, or diminishing the front of the column, must be made, after entering on a straight alignement, in order to form in line. Such operation, when necessary, should be performed be-^ fore the line of formation is entered on. 17. In whatever manner the leading division of a battalion column arrives in a straight alignement on which it is to form, a mounted otticcr always gives the point where it enters. And when arrived at its ground, that it halts and is to form, the commanding otKcer from that division corrects, if necessary, tiie pivot files on the fixed distant points, before the divi- sions wheel up into line. H 2 18. Pivot The front ul' coliiiiiii not to ha altered •^ # when ■'•^^■^^ miircliing ' '\- inanaligne- '^.* nieiit. Fig. a4. 2>. 100 PART in. I' : f •». «■ rivot of- llccrs. Fig. 24. OlTiccrs and co- lours in the aliirne- mcat. ()ffiot!rs that ron- iliict tlie two lead- ing divi- sions iif a coluitin, iDtiiit: not be sliort- ki^iitt'd. 18. Pivot officers of columns when marching irvsrtF alignement, must be steady on the flanks of their di- visions, as they give the true wheeling distance, and covering of the pivots in their own persons: They must not look to or endeavour to correct the march of their divisions; that care must be left to Serjeants and other officers in the rear. The pivot files of men (that they also may be truly covered when halted), must be close to, but not touch or derange, their leaders in the march. — The pivot (ilcs of the open or close co- lumn in march are always directed and conducted on the given points of march, whether the column is moving in a line on which it is to form, or whether it is moving up to a point where it is to change iti direction ; and the leading officer in column always leaves the object on which he has marched, or at which he wheels, close on his outward hand. 19. When marching in a straight alignement there must never be more than one officer (or leader) on the pivot flank of each division, all others are either on the opposite Hank, or in rear of the divisions. — Nor are such leaders then covered in the rear ranks by their Serjeants, in order that they may the niore easily see, and distinctly cover, each other in the given line. The colours cover the third files of men from the pivot, and must be ready to move up when the line is to be formed. 20. In marching in an alignement on advanced points, such points must be known and visible to the leader of the second as well as of the first division ; because such second leader must preserve his first, and the given points in the true line, and on the accuracy of the position of those two leaders depends the eo- veiing of the rear ones. — Officers who have an indis- tinct sight can never lead the two first divisions of a column marching in a straight alignement, and must therefore on such occasions be replaced by other per- sons, whose accurate vision enables them to preserve and prolong the just line which the whole are to follovir. . . ^ «l. All 4. Of the BATTALION. 101 in un a- li^UCUItilit. «1. All marching in the alignement must be made* Manliiii* in ordinary time, and taken up before or from the point where it is entered \yith precision j the pivot of- ficers are then peculiarly answerable for distances, and exact covering of the flanks.— To march with accu- racy in an alignement in quick time, so as at any in- stant to be ready to wheel up into line, and (without a considerable pause) to move on, is an operation hardly to be expected, and seldom to be required. 22. When the column of companies halt to form: Wliedin^ pivot flanks are in an instant corrected from the lead- V" '"'^ ing division by commanding officers of battalions. — .^^"j"' ^|**^" Leadihg officers move into the front of their platoons. — ^I'heir covering Serjeants place themselves on the right of each if the wheel is to be to the leftj or otherwise behind the pivot file if the wheel is to be to the right. — Pivot men of the front rank face square into the new direction.— The whole wheel up, and halt.— Officers dress the interior of their platoons, and then replace their Serjeants who are now in the front rank. — If any farther dressing is necessary, it | must be ordered and made by a mounted field officer. 23. If the battalion af>er wheeling up from column Dressing on into line, is not critically well dressed, the fault must pivots. be in the internal parts of the division : This must be * immediately corrected (by each platoon officer) on the pivot men, who on no account must move, or * shift, but remain so many given or fixed points on whom the battalion rs exactly lined.— Each platoon officer thus only dresses within his own platoon ; if a more accurate dressing 'm required, it is afterwards given by a field officer. » H 24. In general the whole of a battalion will be halt- Fornung In ed on its ground, stand in column, and its pivots be iine. adjusted, before it wheels up and forms : but if neces- sary, and where parts of it arrive in the line by filittg, %• 25t they may form successively as they come up. — If part of a battalion should therefore be ordered to wheel into line while the other divisions are not yet in it, the / 11 3 pivot •Ml im PART III, Miii Uiscngng- ing heads of files. Fig. 56. March in coluron« pivot men of those divisions (and not the officers) must cover on the former part of the line before they wheel up. — And when several battalion columns changing position enter separately, and are to form in the same line, each may be successively wheeltd up, if so ordered or intended, when its adjoining one has three or four of its divisions standing in column on th^ line. sa. When a point of entry is marked in a new alignement, the pivot flank of the leading division of a column is always directed on stich point. — If the line is to be formed, and the head flank placed at such point of entry, the head division will rest its pivot on the line, and at a distance equal to its front from such point. — If the rear dank is to be at that point, the pi- vot of the rear division will halt at it. — If the point is an intermediate one, a central division will halt at it. —The line will b^ formed by the wheeling up of di- visions, when they are severally placed upon it. s6. On some occasions (as in passing lines, forming close columns, ^c.) the platoons or divisions of a bat- talion in line are ordered to fii.b to front, rear, or into colunm, without ^rst wheeling the quarter circle.— An explanatory caution being given, at the word for the battalion to fape, the platoons face to the point directed, and at the same instant the three leading files of each throw themselves to the flank according as they are to move, so as to be disengaged from the last ^leof the preceding platoon. — In this situation each leader js enabled at the word mauch, to move inde- pendent, without check, and on his proper point. ,{. 27. I'he rear divisions of a battalion, or more con- siderable column in march, constantly follow every turning and twist which the head makes 3 each suc- cessively changing its direction at whatever point the leading division may have so done. — When at any ac- cidental movement the column is ordered to halt, and FORM in line, the pivot men of platoons must remain steady where they are found at the word halt, and the A* ■' ,J, ' ■■f .#'w « Of the BATTALION. 103 the divisions will wheel up into what will probably be a curved but a just line. — If the m^rch in column is again to be resumed, the line breaks backward, and the rear divisions at their ordered distances will con- tinue to follow the exact path traced out by the head j nor are the following divisions of a column ever to deviate from this rule, or endeavour of themselves to get into a straight line, when the general direction is a winding one, until an express order is given for that purpose; which can hardly ever be the case until the head of the column is halted, with a determination to form the line in a straight direction. 28. The march in column through a thin wood, or March of in ground where impediments frequently change the ^J*^ cojumn direction of its head, or along the winding of heights *yood^ *• which are to be occupied, will be best made by sub- cmbarrass- divisions, or by sections of five or six files in front. — ed ground. The pivot files will preserve exact distances from each p. other, choose their own ground, and wind as the '^' trees or other impediments permit, along a general direction:— When the column ^a//« and forms, tlie line will be a continued curve, which can afterwards be easily made straight, if circumstances require it.— i In such situations, at no time (if it is possible) should any of the pivot flank leaders be obliged to double or quit the continued line of march ; but the other files ' may be (when impediments are to be passed) much opened or loosened from those pivots, who in the mean time moving free and preserving wheeling dis- tances, are in a situation at every instant to halt and forna in line, the others closing in to them. 29. Should the march in a straight aligncmcnt be Obstacles at any time interrupted by pools of water, or any in march in other obstacle which is impassable, the march will be »" ahgne- continued straight to that obstacle, the obstacle will be surrounded (and always if possible by deviating to the reverse flank so as to remain behind the line,) and the same straight line will again on the other side be taken . H 4 . „ up 1. nii'iit. Fig. 27. M I rc^^ ■■**' # ^1 104 PART III. up by the pivots, at the point in it which a detached person has prepared.— Allowance will be made, when the line is to form, for the breadth of such obstacle, by the doubling of as many divisions as will fill up the vacancy (when it can be done) which is iheicby occasioned in the line, nor must any small interrup- tions in the line that can possibly be surnjountcd, ever make the pivots deviate from the straight line, when the intention of forming on the line is evident ^nd known to all. II 1(1 tn Assen\\)ly nf the bat- ASSEMBLY OF THE BATTALION AND GEr NERAL CIRCUMSTANCES IN EXERCISE. THE companies having been inspected by their officers on their particular parades, should arrive and stand on the parade of the battalion in open column of frompanies, and with either right or left in front.— l^eeround is given by whichever division first arrives on it, and the others arrange themselves in front or rear accordingly. — In this situation are reports made to the commanding officer; companies equalized; music, drummers, pioneers, &c. assembled at their proper stations; all other individuals pf the battalion placed: pivot files and just wheeling distances cor- . y rected.~The battalion is then formed in line by wheels of the quarter circle, and byword from the commanding officer; the colours are sent for and posted ; and the whole are thu$ in readiness tq rooye by sub' division or company column. March to The n»arch to and from the field in column, should the ground Ijp considered as one of the most material parts of ex- ercise, and be made with attention, equality of step^ just distances, and perfect order. — The front of the march should be frequently increased and diminished,) 'n\ {ht manner prescribed (S. 87.) and the battalion ^1— >.. i: Of ill ^uvn rjON. 105 at differe; periods riDfd by wheels By halting the head divisions in the line; filing the i C J rear ones into it, and then wheeling } up the whole. — By the head division I halting on the line, and the rear ones I wheeling back into echellon position, after which they move up into line. \^S. 118, 124, 127. r* 6. A front, center, or rear division \ of the column may be placed in a new Fig. 47. 48. < given direction, and the rest by file i marching will take up their ground. \^S. 120, 121, 122. 7. The column at half or quarter distance will form. — By filing into line. Obliquing into line. — Divisions wheel- ing successively into line, and taking ,open distances. 8. The divisions may face to either flank, march the lock step/ halt, and again front into column. S. 1 23. 9. The »i n - •■' I II' J '■■ i!%. '<|^'^P ig. Passage in file through a second line, or wood, to front or rear, from a ilank of each company. S. 174. C 20. Passage of the obstacle in the < march of the battalion, by divisions ^ doubling as ordered. ^.170. C Cl . The oblique march of the batta- < lion, and change ofdirectionby gradual ^ alteration of the shoulders. S. 169. C 22. The battalion halted to be dres- Fig. 14. < sed, by advancing the platoon officers, (^ and moving up the men. S. lO?. t 23. The whole or a wing of the bat- talion to be thrown forward on the center or flank, by placing a few files, and the r^st turning their shoulders, -^ and gradually dressing up. — The same done backwards gradually at a short step without facing about. — Eyes being directed to the point of forming on all occasions. f: 24. The battalion will advance, and retire in echellons of companies. — -p. - i Form in line on any named one. — *'»' ' '' 'j Throw backward or forward any nura- I her of companies into echellon.-* [.Wheel them into oblique line. S5. The battalion retiring in (wo lines by alternate companies may make a degree of wheel during the move- ment, so as to give a new direction to the line. Ficr q, n ( 26. The battalio hg.3l. ^3- 3 ^r bridge, to front ion may pass a defilQ or to rear. S.qi, tt J?7. The Of the BATTALION. \0«p- ^ f^ Of the BATTALION. 113 were totally unconnected with the operation that the others are performing. When the column of companies is to be reduced to that of sub-divisions or sections,' it will always be done by the others doubling from their pivot flank, behind their reverse flank, sub-divihionor sectioi>, so that the battalion may remain ready to form in line by a sim- ple wheel up to the flank ; therefore the doubling will be behind the right when the right is in front, or be- hind the left when the left is in front. — When the front of the column is to be increased, the sub-divi- sions or sections that double will move up to tiieir leading one by a quick incline. — As in diminishing or increasing tlie front of the column in march, the pivot division is the one that quits its direction, the exactness of pivots after such operation will appear to be interrupted ; but this is of no consequence, and instantly regained in a column of march ; it can hard- ly ever take place in a column of manoeuvre, which has entered a line on which it is to form. ill i; -p ( i;r It ■>ia. S> 87. JVhen a Battalion Columti of Coin- panics in March diminishes its Front, either by Companies successively, or the ■■■> zvhole Battalion at once, v . - "i •c' U When the leading company arrix'es within I 2 or 16 paces of the point where it is necessary to diminish its front ; the commander will give a loud caution that the sub-divisions are to double either by companies successively, or the wholo battalion at once. * \ ■ ^ / ; W ^ii lU Fig. 6. A. ?»- rig. 6. PART III. If successkeli) The leader of the head company proceeds as directed (S. 37), and each other does the iame when it arrives on the spot where its preced* ing one doubled. Jfat once On the general cau- tion from the battalion commander, each company leader, without waiting for each otber,yproceeds as directed xs. 57.) si 4 j*:',^t S. 88. JVhen the Battalion Column oj Sub-divisions in March forms Column of Companies, : The battalion commander gives a loud CAUTION, tU.at column of compa- nies are to be formed either succes- ^. sively,or by the whole battalion at once. 1 ig. f). B. Fig, 30. If successively Each inclines up as directed (S. 57.) when its leading sub-division arrives on the ground where its preceding one forpncd up. If at once On the general cau- tion from the battalion commander, each company leader proceeds as di- rected (S. 67.) without waiting for each other. • "When divisions double back or form up to column, ranks must be closed, arms carried, and the transition from one situation to the other made as quck as possi- ble : and as soon as the column is in its new order, the pivot flank leaders place themselves on those pivots. When !/ Of the BATTALION. lis When the front of a column is lo be diminished, and the obstacle is before the part which is not to double, such part must incline after the doubling is made in order to pass it : but timely attention is to be given, »o bring up, if possible, by inclining, the part which is not trf double, square to the opeping through which it is to pass, before such doubling begins. — — And when a diminution of front is immediately to follow an alteration in the direction of the march, such alteratjion should be made with a gradual sweep, so as to give the head of the column its new perpen- dicular direction, when at least 12 or 15 paces from the point of breaking off. The successive breakings of each division of the column at the point of difiiculty, and its subsequent' .v- moving up again as soon as it has passed it, is ;;, the most general practice, but is the most likely to f lengthen it out, which is the great evil to be avoided. — The reduction of front by the whole battalion at once is therefore the most eligible ; and for the same reason, the increase of front (when the rear of it has cleared the difficulty) bv the whole battalion, is to ht preferred. As in a considerable column, the successive doubling or forming up of companies would be performed by ' each, when it arrived on the identical spot where the • leading one of the column doubled or formed up : — So when this operation is done successively by batta- lion, each will at once in the same manner perform it when its head is arived at the spot, (and of which it must be apprized) where the head of the preceding battiilion was, when it so doubled or moved up. -^.*. -^^ I 3 Fig. 116 PART III; »•' )i, s* t» m^ Fig. 5. B.— 28. S. 89. /Fi^e/^ ^/^e Battalion Column of Companies is halted^ and to diminish its Front. CAUTION. C The chief will give the caution to form column of sub-divisions or sec- tions ; on which the covering Serjeants will fall back, and mark the future pi- .vot flank of the doubling sub-divisions. ' The leaders of each company will Inwards instantly give the word Face inwards Face, (disengaging their heads) Q. March ; Q. March. \ Halt, front, to their sub-divisions or Halt, front. •{ sections, when behind thestanding sub- Dress, division or section, and dividing justly the distances that existed between com- panies ; the flank leaders will then . place themselves on the pivots. «ii#*. \v, ■•*. , V ',')♦ Fig. 30. 5 B. S. 90. fVhen the Battalion Column of Sub- divisions or Sections is halted^ and . to ina^ease its Front in Companies. \.^-r^rr.^. S Thechief will give the CAUTION to CAUTION. \ e • \ form companies. r The leader of each company imme- To the-^OO- I diately orders the bodies that move up, lique, I To the—Oblique—Q. March — Forward Q. March, -{ — // c//^^/'c«jf, when joined to the stand- Forward. I ingsub-division or section. — The leader Halt, Dress. \ then places himself on the proper pivot [^ flank of his company. Should '^■^ • . •■ ■ " -.mMmimmm r7>v Of the BATTALION. 117 Should a column be retiring with the rear rank leading, the divisions will dou-* ble as already prescribed, so as to pre- serve the sub-divisions or sections in their natural order for forming : and when the ground allows, will again increase the front of the column. AUTIO(T to When the column has to pass a bridge, or short de- Fig. 29. file, and that there is a certainty of immediately aftf^r resuming the front which it has diminished, then such part of the reverse flank of the leading division as the defile will receive will pass it in front, and such part of the pivot flank, as is necessarily stopt, will by command Face inwards and follow close in file: on quitting the defile, the filing part will form up at a lengthened step, but the general rate of the column will at no time be altered: In this manner division succeeds division, without any improper extension taking place. But if the column must continue any- time on a reduced front, then it should so be dimi- nished by the doubling back of divisions. When a close column/ or one at quarter distance Fig. 51 is to pass a defile, before it enters, it must stand on such a front as will require no farther reduction j and therefore on approaching the defile, a halt if ne- cessary must be made, and such operation performed, as will enable it to enter on such front as it can maintain in passing. When the defile is passed, a new arrangement will determine the advance of th& column. •s*^ I 3 PAS- * I 1i8 PART III. PASSAGE OF A BRIDGE, OH SHORT DE- FILE FKOM LINE. ii tf': S. 91' A Battalion formed in Line may have to pass a shorH Defile or Bridge in its Front. Fig. 9U If before ajiank — It will from that flank wheel in- to column, cross on such from as will fill the defile, and the column will be close or open according as, after passing, it may ije required either to deploy into line, or to prolong any given direction. Tf before the Center— The two center sub divisions may stand fast; the rest of the battalions will break inwards by sub-divisions-, the whole will march for- ward in doublecolumn. — When passed, the center sub-divisions stand fast; the others wheel to right and left, ri)arch to the flanks, 'and successively wheel up into line, (or) they proceed in march, and remain in double column 'till the Fig. 93*. -^ head arrives at such point, and is placed in such direction as the line is to be formed in.— Should the bridge or defile only allow six in front to pass, when the head of the double column arrives close at it, its two divisions having two paces distance betwixt them, will file from the inward flanks to the front, pass, and then move up into column as before, being in the same manner followed by every other division. But as many inconVeniencies attend all central co- lumns, when a positive position is not to be occupied immediately after passing a bridge or defile j therefore in most cases the march in battalion column from one flank. Of the BATTALION. 119 ORT DE- flank, and on such front as is necessary, is preferable; for from that order every possible after-situation is ac- curately and easily taken up; such as the windings of a height; the skirting of a wood; or the prolonging of any given straight direction. The battalion may also form close column of any given front, on the division which is opposite the bridge or defile, pass in that shape, and extend as or- dered after passing. S. 52. A Battalion formed in Line may have to pass a Dejile or Bridge in its ' Rear. - f If in the rear ofaflank — It will march off from the other flank behind the rear in co- p. - J lumn of companies or sub-divisions succes- °' ' * sively, the front rank leading; wheel behind the standing flank: pass; and again wheels ^and prolong any given direction. If in (he rear of the Center — It will march off^as before from each flank, by columns of sub-divisions behind the rear, the le^.ding ones when near meeting will wheel inwards; pass in double column; and then, if order- ed, the divisions will wheel outwards sue* cessively, and take up a line parallel to the one it quitted. — If the bridge or deflle will p.. J not allow above six men to pass in front, the °' ■» double column, wlien it arrives at the en- trance, will file to the front from its inward flanks as before directed; pass; m')veupinto column; and either extend into line to each flank, or mo^ on in any given direction. In this way will the battalion be less liable to lengthen, than if it at once files from both flanks behind the center; passes; and again stakes up its ground in file. 14 . If PART III. t : i i<'- fig.9 If after passing in files or columns, the march is to be continued forward; should thr wings be in file, they will form up to columns of sub-divisions; the pruprr leading wing, according as the front of the line should be, will march on, and the other will follow it by countermarching iis divisions successively from its rear, and in this manner thf whole will be in column of sub-divisions, which may be ordered, if proper, to form corppanies. The battalibn may also form close column of a front equal to the breadiiiof the defile, behind or on the di- vision nearest to it, and facing either way : it will then pass, and proceed according to circumstances. .-''^, mi u S. 93. Where a Column of Divisions is successively to march off by wheeling from a Flank of a Battalion formed in Line, and that its Direction is towards the other. Flank, If the movement is tnnrlc dose along the Front. — The leading flank division wheels u^ and marches along the line, and each other division successively wheels up be- hind it at the proper time, so as to follow Ficr 'iA A J ^^ column, and to have its proper dis- rig.34.iv.«^ tahce. Should the new direction make a small angle with the line, each division must move forward quick and successively to that direction, as its turn comes, be- fore it commences its wheel, and so as not to lose its distance. '' If the movement is made dose along the Rear. — The leading flank division wheels 3-4ths of the circle, and each other one successively half of the circle, so as to have th^ remaining quarter to wheel, when its preceding Of the BATTALION. \t \ preceding division arrives at its pivot. Fig.34.B. ^ Should the line of rojJrch make a small angle with the old position, then each di- vision, after wheeling its halt circle, will have to advance to that linr in due time, . iind successively, before it makes is re- maining part of ihe wheel which brings Jt into column. The open column may also in the before cases be advantageously formed by the successive filing of di- visions in the following manner : When the march is made from one flank of the battalion towards the other, and either along the front or rear. The leading division will Face; March out perpen- dicular to the line, its own length; Halt, iiont; , Match; and then proceed. — The division next it will Fuce^ disengage its head tovtaids the column; and when the leading division arrives, the other will then ' March quick in file; Halt, Front; March; and thus follow division after division, each being ready and timing its several operations, so that the true distances F>g- <'^6. A. are preserved. It is to be observed, that marches made in this manner along the front, the divisions face outwards or towards the movitig fiank of the battalion, and dis- engage their heads to the front: But in those made along the rfar they face inwards or towards the standing flank, and disengage their heads to the rear. Fig. 3d. P. This method is peculiarly useful when the column moves to the rear, as much wheeling is avoided, and each division can with quickness and accuracy take its place in column. fr S. 94. '-^'.' I2t PART III. S. 94. March of the Battalion in File, The march of the battalion in file, and without opening out, can hardly be required, except in smooth ground, and for the purposes of counter- marchiug, or of closing or opening an interval in line. At the word face, &c. the whole face<«o the hand ordered, and the offi- cers take one side step to the front out of the rank, and are replaced by their Serjeants. At the word march, the whole step off correctly.— At the word j HALT, the whole halt. — And at the word FRONT, they front, and officers and Serjeants resume their places. The officers being out of the ranks during the march (and which will take place whenever more than one company is to march in file) are of use in preserving ^ the line and step. FACS. MARCH. HALT. FRONT. < \ m m\% 1 la m ^ i^n K m 'II W ',11 V- W \|1 \\ ' /\ S. 95, General Formations of the Bat- talion J rom File, A battalion which has been obliged to move in file will form 1. To either Flank, by halting and ' facing to right or left as necessary. 8. To the front of the march by halt- ing, facing to the flank; wheeling up by companies into open column, and /' then applying the formations of the open or clo-e column to its required •ituation. — - Or without halting and facing ^ • ^. / ^' s\ - Of the BATTALION. 123 facing to the flank ; the column of companies at once m^y be formed, by the files makins; a halt face, and each marching up quick and diagonally to their respective leading men, who do not alter their pace; and as the pivot files are in the rear of companies, when they do come up, the column must be ordered to dress to them. 3. 7'/> Me ;rflr of the march, by first forming column of companies, and then applying the formations of the open or close column. There can be few situations wher« the battalion must be formed to the front, or rear of the march, by the leading file halting, and the whole moving up successively to it, and forming away in the rear of and beyond each other to one of (he fianks. The head of the battalion file must be so conducted as to leave sufiicient space to the proper hand for the other files to move up into open column of sub-divi- sions or companies when ordered, and the pivot files in column are always the following ones, when the battalion is in file. — If the battalion is lengthened out when it is ordered to form, it is evident that its facing into line, or its forming into column, must be suc- cessive as each file arrives at its place in line, or as each head tile of the ordered divisions arrives at a wheeling distance from the head file of the preceding one. \ •5. o<). 124 PART HI. n S. 96. A Battalion standing in narrow Ground may sometimes be obliged to march in File^ in order to form Open Column from its leading Flank ; either before or behind that Flank ; before or behind its other Flank; or^ before or behind any central Part of the Line, i r ». ^ M^r^ '^« R»^^*^ P/aw*— The right platoon will move on, the rest of p. _ A J the battalion will face to the right, and *■ I MARCH in file; the divisions will succes- j %\\t\y front y and follow ihe leading one^ * tand each other. ( 2. If behind the Right Flank—TUe i >vhole FACE to the right and march ; " right division instantly counter- Fig.37.B. T :he8 to the rear, fronts and moves lorward, followed in the same manner by every other division^ till the whole is in column. 3. If before any Central Pointy or the Left Flank — The battalion makes a suc- cessive COUNTERMARCH from the right flank towards the left, and when the right division is arrived at the point from whence It is to advance in co- lumn, it again countermarches to its Fig.38.A. ■^ right a space equal to its front, then faces, moves on, and is thus succes- sively followed by part of the battalion. — The other part of the battalion beyond the point of advancing, faces inwards, when necessary, tnakes a progressive march in file, and then/ro/if*, and follows by divi- ■ '" sions* ■^>»- 0/MeBATTAUON. 125 Fig. 38. B. 4 I sions, as it comes to the turn of each, Ltill the whole are in column. 4. If behind the Center or Left Flank —The right part of the battalion COUNTERMARCHES from the right by files successively by the rear, and the other part of the battalion, as is ne> cessary, makes a progressive march by files from its right to the central point, and there begins to countermarch : at that point the leading, and each other division, fronts into column, and moves on. When the left of the battalion is to be in front, the same operations in- versely take place. This METHOD of forming open column should only be used in narrow grounds, and in particular situations that require it, as in the passing of a bridge or defile, or where the battalion stands in so confined a space as not to allow room for the wheeling of di- visions. —The difficultiet at all times of moving a large body in file, and the constant and unavoidable checks given to the equality and justness of the march, by the divisions successively quitting the line, make it impossible in the above cases, with due accuracy, to take up the proper distances; and therefore whenever the open column is to be formed from battalion and Mne, it ought to be done, if possible, by the wheelings of companies, sub-divisious, or sections. - ^ m 'di COUNTERMARCH BY FILES. The countermarch by Files is of two kinds— Fiur. 39. cither successive (the body being halted,) by each A. B. file wheeling successively en its ground as it comes ^r ',< 1 ri it i i It • 1^ %. :i is6 PART 111. to its turn: Or^ prooressivb (the body being in motion,) by each tile wheeling, when it comes up to the point at which the leading file wheeled. — In the first case the body must shift its ground to a flank, a space at least equal to its front: In the second it will perform this operation of the countermarch on its original ground, exchanging flanks and fronts : in both cases the pivots are in a small degree moveable. The Countermarch by Files may be made either be- fore or behind the body. — If made before it, the front rank men will be the pivots on which each file will wheel: If made behind it, the rear rank men will then be the pivots on which each file will wheel. All countermarches by file necessarily tend to an ex- tension of that file; the greatest care must therefore be taken, that the wheel of each file is made close, quick, and at an increased length of step of the wheel- ing men, so as not to retard or lengthen out the mtirch of the whole, and unity of step is absolutely indispen- sable. The File marching or countermarching of a batta- lion or greater body, will be made in ordinary time. Of smaller divisions in general in quick time. S. 97. Countermarch of the Battalion, frojjt both Flanks on ils Center, hy Files, Fig. 39. C. THE BATTA- LION WILL COUNTER- MARCH. & A CAUTION is given that the batta- lion will countermarch.— The wings FACE from the colours which stand fast, and a Serjeant remains at the point of — J each wing in order to mark the ground. BY WINGS *^ — At the word march the right wing files successively close behind the reqr rank, and the left wing before the front rank of the battalion, till they arrive at ^the poiuts where each other stood. They outwards FACE. MARCH. .irf.r.*- HALT. COVER. TRONT. Of the BATTALION. 127 They then halt, and the front rank of wings is quickly covered on the co- lours which have kept their ground, and served as a pivot on which the bat- j talion turns.— The wings when cover- \ ed in the line, front, looking to the colours, and the colours take their .places. If a more accurate dressing is necessary, it rausl be given by the com- ^ manding officer. S, 98. Countermarch of the Battalion^ ^* from its Center, and on its Center, hy Files. >^,fii Q ' Fig. 39. D. CA"TI0N. KY WINGS INWARDS PACE. BY WINOS, 3 SIDB STEPS TO THE RIGHT, ifARCH. MARCH. %' Fronts A CAUTION is given that the battalion will counter- march. — The whole face to the colours, which stand fast, ^ nndaserjeantremainsto mark each flank. — The whole are ordered to lake 3 side stefs to the right, at the word MARCH, in order to disengage. At the second word march, the whole move on, and each file wheels successively into the center as it' arrives at, and beyond the colours. — As soon as each company is in the line ^' I from the colours to the fljnk Serjeant, itsofficer /row/« it.— When the whole is formed ihe colours countermarch, and the whole are looking to the co- tours till otherwise ordered. In ♦» i p, \ . i H 'Mis ,h, lf8 PART III. In the countermarch from both flanks no part of the battalion is fronted till the whole is on its ground. In the countermarch from the center, the battalion begins instantly .And sucfce«sively to front by compa- nies^ as each. ii^r^ady and on its ground. S. 99. Countermarch of the Battalion or Line on its Cefiter, by Companies or Sub- divisions. Fig. 40. A. When a whole battalion is to countermarch on a central point ; although it may be done by files, yet without great care it will be apt to open out; such, or a larger body will best and quickest make such coun- termarch by the march of columns of companies or sub-divisions in front. One or two central sub-di- visions wheel the half circle upon their center point; or countermarch into the new, line, so that' the front rank shall occupy the ground which the rear rank did, and the bat- talion is CAUTIONED to coun- termarcii from its center by sub-divisions. CAUTION. WINGS ABOUT FACE. SUB DIVISIONS INWARDS WHEEL, MARCH. Hattf Dress, MARCH. i Pned. Halt, Dress. One of the wings faces to the right about : both wings WHEEL inwards by subdivi- sioas: they march along the rear and front of the formed division, and successively wheel up into their respective places un each side of those already arranged in the line. The -^^a 0/* Me BATTALION. 129 ' Hah, Front,] to Dress. \ B The sub-divisions which wheel up to the rear, successively Halt, Front, Dress, when they come to their ground, -{ and the officers who command them must take care not to pass the rear, but I to be at their proper front rank when (^ they /fa//, irowf their sub-divisions. Should it be intended that the front rank of the directing company or sub-division should stand on the identical line it occupied before the countermarch, it will be so placed; and in that case after the sub- division had wheeled inwards, the wing which was to march in rear of it would shift a few paces to the flank, in order to get clear of the rear ranks, and would then be put in march. When at any time one flank of a battalion or line is to be placed at the spot where the other one stands, it cannot be done in a shorter manner than by pro- longing the new line. If the flanks are to exchange place with each other, the countermarch on the cen- ter, or on a flank, must efl^ect it : the single battalion may do it by files : but a line must do it by counter- march of divisions in open column. m COUNTERMARCH IN COLUMN. S. 100. When the Battalion Column {or ^ a more considerable one) countermarches each Division by Files, so as to change its Front, and J ace to its former Rear. Fig. 40. B. f If the Column stands with the Right COUNTER- in Front — A caution to counter- MARCH BY march is given. — At the word right PILES. FACij, the whole face to the right, each RiOHT, FAOB.<^ companyofficerwiU immediately quit K, (ht ,,sr:rf- ■ •■■ , !' !1 ¥' l\ > ■ ■1 130 'il PART Hi; ^^^ the pivot^and place himself on the right of his company^ and his covering Ser- jeant will advance to the spot which he .has quitted, and face to the right about. At the word march, the whole move, the officer wheels short round to the right, and proceeds, followed by his files of men, till he has placed his pivot fVont rank man close to his serjeant, who remains immoveable — Each offi- cer instantly gives the words. Half, \ Front, — Dress y to his company, so as to have it squared and closed into the right, which is now the pivot flank, and on which the officer now replaces his Serjeant, who falls back behind the rear rank. In this manner the colum^i will face to its former rear. «; If the Column staiids with the Left in Front — The caution to countermarch is given. — At the wordLEFT face, the whole face to the left, the officer moves to the left of his company, and the -{ Serjeant occupies his place, and faces about.— At the word march the offi- cer wheels short to the left and pro- ceeds as before, till he is fixed on the pivot flank, now the lef^, as the co- . lumn stands with its right in front. In the countermarch, the facing is always to that hand which is not the pivot, but which is to become such. This countermarch of each division separatefy on its own ground, is an evolution of great utility on many occasions. — It enables a column which has its right in front, and is marching in an alignement, to return along that same line, by becoming a column with its left in front, and to take such new posUioos in it as circumstances may require, without inverting or al- tering MARCH. (A- Halt, Front, Dress. ;:n' COUNTER- MARCH BY FILES. LEFT, FACE. MARCH. Halt, Front, Dress. !) \ Of the BATTALION. -lit the right ring ser- irhich he bt about. e whole round to ed by his his pivot Serjeant, ^ach offi- s. Halt, ny, so as into the Dt flank, ' replaces ;hind the e column \e Left in termarch ACE, the er moves and the nd faces the offi- |and pro- d on the the CO- ont. |s to that become [I'y on its |n many Irigbt in return Iwith its |in it as or al- tering tering the proper front of the line.— In many situa- tions of forming from column into line, it becomes a necessary previous operation. When a column countermarches by divisions, each on its own ground, unless the divisions are eijual, the distances after the countermarch will not be the true wheeling distances, but will be such as are equal to the front of the preceding division, and therefore the true distances must be regained before the divisions can truly wheel up into line. .9. 101. JFhen the leading Flank of the Co- liimn is changed by the successive March of Divisions Jrom the Rear to the Front, Fig. 4 1 . A. HALT. LEFT WING TO THE FRONT. Right, Face. Q. March. Halt, Front. March. Right, Face. Q. March. Halt, Front, March. ' If the right is in front, the \Jt to be brought up, and the column to continue to advance. —The whole is ordered to HALT. — At the caution left wing to the front, the officer of the left (the rear) company immediately orders it, Right, Face, Q. March, till his left flank can • freely pass near the right flank of the others. — He then com- mands Halt, Front — March (in ordi- nary time) close by the right flank of the company then preceding him. The officer commanding that com- pany, ers soon as the other approaches him, orders. Right, Face, — Quick, il/arc//,~behind the now leading one.— Halt, Front, when he covers — and then March when at the due wheeling distance. — All the other companies successively perform the same opera- tion; and when the right company has taken its place in the rear, the whole column is in perfect order. K2 If - -•■f'»^ * ». — - .^t^^-^ li'J'ii It r i r' i A i^r !li> f' 'H : mi.u B ■ 132 PART III. r If before this operation tbe column I should be closed to half or quarter dis- 1 tance, then all the companies may be Fig. 41. B. -^ FACED at the same time, proceed as I above directed, and each takes its dis* I tance from its preceding one, before it l^ moves on. This operation is often required 'in taking up origi> nal positions from column of march. — It changes the leading flank of a battalion, or a more considerable column, and enables it to enter on a line which un* foreseen circumstances require it should prolong. — It permits battalion columns assembled at a rendezvous, to march off from whatever flank is most advan- tageous for each to enter on its line of formation. — It prepares a column which has expected to form by wheels to its left, to be ready to form by wheels to its right, without inverting its order. — In a column com- posed of several battalions, where an inversion of the battalions within themselves, but not of the wings, is meant to be prevented, then each battalion separately will perform this operation ; but if the inversion of the wings also is to be avoided, then the whole co- lumn will proceed as if it was a sin||e battalion. It must be observed as a general principle, that tbe divisions which advance come out always on the side to which front is to be made^ and on which the ene- my is placed, because then with the divisions which sire free he can be opposed', while the others are mov- ing behind the line. S. 109. IF/ien the Coluynn changes its IVbigs on the Ground on which it then stands. Fig. 42. C. C The left or rear company Halt. | proceeds as has been already di- XKFT WING TO THE | rected : All the others go to the FRONT. -{ RFOHT about, and MARCH on at >•* / - - .. ,^ ;,., ^ IM Of the BATTALION. 133 BIGHT ABOUT | the Ordinary step towards the place FACE,MAECH. (^froiTi whcncc the left moved. , When the company next it arrives at that place, it receives the order, Lfft Face,— Quick March, behind the left company, then Halt, Front, and March, when at its due distance. ^ In this manner all the rest proceed, 'till the right company when it fronts finds itself where the left ori- ginally stood, only that the whole column is removed to the right, a space equal to its front. Left Face. Quick March. Halt, Front. March. S. 103. fFhen a Column changes itsJVings . by the Divisions marching thi^ough each other, from Rear to Front. Fig. 42. D. COMPANIES TO RIGHT AND LEFT OPEN, MARCH. HALT. < March. Close inwards. March. Halt. March. The column standing marched from the right should naturally form to the left, but it is here intended to form to the right. — At the word COMPANIES to the right and left OPEN — MARCH, all the companies (except the last) do open by the side step, half to each flank, a space sufficient to allow a company to ^ march through in front. The left company does not open, but Marches on through the others, and as soon as its rear rank arrives at the front rank of the one ne-:t it, that company closes by the side step, Marches and follows at its due dis- tance: In this manner they succeed each other, 'till the column is formed as marched off from the left. K 3 But * V ■■ m: J 134 PART III. •' RiOHT f But if the ground of the column ABOUT FACB. IS not to be changed after opening MARCH. out, the last company moves on, after the others having taced about, and Inwards marched, have arrived at its Turn ground } each there successively/flcrs front, Murcli.j inwards and joins, then fronts and HALT. 1 marches on till the word halt is given, when the flanks are changed, and that the left company is exactly on the ground where the right stood. The leading company must take short paces, to allow for the various Loperations of the following one. The above method of countermarch is more calcu- lated for a parade than for the general movements (A the battalion. r? f 1» 1 T5y the move- ments in open co- lumn. GENERAL CHANGES OF POSITION OF THE BATTALION. Changes of Position of the battalion or line from one distant situation to another, are made either in Line, or by the Echellon march of divisions ; or bj the movements of the column^ especially of the Open Column. Changes of position in Open Column are move- ments of previous disposition, made from one distant situation to another, and not liable to the interrup* tionof an enemy.— Where circumstances allow, ori~ ginal or new positions are in this manner easie^'t ri Fig. 4S. Fg. 44. Changes of posi- tion of the Bat- talion or Line made by the Ethel/on march hand to which they are to change posit ion^ and so as that each thereby stands perpendicular to its future line of march. 2d. Each platoon marches on di- of Platoons, •{ rectly in front, to its proper point in consist 0/3 I the new line. parts, I 3d. Each platoon successively, on its leading flank arriving at the pla- toon preceding it (which is already halted in the line), dresses up, and forms truly in that line. Each change of position of the battalion or line, may be considered as a general wheel of the whole made on a point, either in, befoke, or behind, the old line.— The battalion or line therefore breaks to whichever hand, and to whichever division it is to manoeuvre to or be led by: When to a flank, gene- rally to that which is nearest to, and is first to enter any part of the new position : When a central divi- sion determines its movement, it breaks to right or left inwards, and faces such division, which makes its change of situation on its own ground. — When this POINT is IN the old line, it must necessarily be within the battalion when single, or within a certain named battalion of a line: Such battalion therefore will have to perform the change on a fixed point within itself, viz. on such division, fiank or central, as is already rested on that point, by making its other divisions, either hyjiling or diagonal marching, enter into the line: But all the other bat(nlions will have the double operation of moving up to the new line, and then forming upon it.— When this point is before or behind the old line, every battalion, whether single or connected, will have this double operation to perform. S. 104. Of the BATTALION. 137 u ' ^ S. 104. Changes of Position of a Battalion. The battalion formed in line changes to a new posi- tion either on a fixed point within itself, or on a dis- tant point, which marks one of its future flanks, or where one of its central divisions is to be placed. When on a fixed point, either Flank or Central. march of divi- or rear, which Fig. 46. A. ^ move on and line with the placed or on its ground. 2d. By breaking into open column so as to face the fixed point. — Filing F' Afi R W ^'^'*'0"' *° i'tor\i or rear, into the new f 'S' * • • i direction, and wheeling up into line I when the column is prepared. (S. 120, \^\2\.) When on a disiant Point, and that tfie whole are moveable : Fig. 67. A. Fig. 67. B. Fig. 67. C. No. 1. By the echellon line of divi- sions, and the subsequent march of the whole till the one tiearest to the new line arrives in it, nnd that the others .move on, and form to it. (.S. iCs.) No. 2. By the breaking info open column to the one or oth'r fiank, and the immediate filing of all (he divi- sions from the old line into the nevir one. (i". 123.) No. 3. By the march of the battalion column to the point where its head is to rest, and then facing, tind filing its divisions ifito the new line. (6'. rj4.) No. 4. I, 138 PART III. ']♦ Fig. 57. F. Fig. 57. H. No. 4. By the march of the battalion column, and its wheeling into the new line, at the point where its rear .: to rest. (S. 125.) C No. 5. By the march of the battalion J column, and its wheeling intr the new \ line at a point where one ol its central (^ divisions is to rest. (S. 126.) Besides the above, which are the most general modes by which changes of position should be ef- fected by (he battalion, the open column on entering its ground may also occasionally be required to form in line in the following manner. No. G. When the column having ar- rived perpendicularly or obliquely be- hind the line at the point where its HEAD is to rest, is there halted. — The leading division may be placed on the line, and each other division be ordered Fig. 52. 78. ^ to make such a degree of wheel back- wards, &i, will enable it to march on in front, perpendicular to its proper point in the new line, where each succes- sively arrives and forms. — This is a movement in column, and formation in cchcllon. (.S. 127.) No. 7. The column arriving in the direction of the line, or in any direc- tion oblique or perpendicular behind the new line, and at the point where its HEAD is to rest, but which its rear is to pass — May form by the wheel of the leading division into the new line, and the successive march of the other divi- sions behind it, and behind each other, till they arrive at their several points of wheeling up. (S. 128.) f No. 8. The column marching per- I pendicularly up to the line, and to the point Fig. 57. D. Fig. 56, y Of the BATTALION. 139 If point where its head is to rest, and being at least a distance equal to the length of the column from such point. The leading division proceeds at a half Fig. f>7. F. { pace only j the others oblique from the column, successively move np to the leading division, and itie front bnng thus gradually increased, the whole battalion arrives at the saUiP time on the line of formation. (S, 29.) The column arriving behind any part of its ground, may also move up to close column, and form by its deployments on the front, the rear, or on a central division. S. 105. A battalion broken into, and marching m open column, must arrive at, and enter on the ground in which it is to form in line, either — In the direc- tion of that line; pebpendicular to that line ; or in a direction more or less oblique, and betwixt the other two. If the column is marching [ If where its head is to m the direction of the Line, it will cither enter where its head in to rest, or where its rear is to rest. Fig. 58. A. i rest. — The leading divi- sion will wheel uo into line, and the others inarch on behind it, aiid succes- sively wheel up as in No. 7. If where its hkar is to rest. — It marches with its pivot flank, and c^t just distances along the line, till the rear platoon is at its point, the whole then halt, and wheel up into line as No. 4. If A'. i 140 PART III. IP 1^' If the Column enters per- pendicular or oblique to the new line, it will en- ter either where its head is to rest, where its rear is to rest f or at some in- termediate poin f, where a central division is to rest. Fig. 58. B. C. Relative si tuatiun of old and new posi- tions. ^ If where its head is to rest. — The formation may be made as in No. 3. If where its rear is to rest. — The formation may be made as in No. 4. If at an intermediate point, where a central dir vision is to rest. — The for- I mation may be made as in LNo^5. All new positions that a battalion or line can take with respect to the old one, are — parallel, or nearly so to the old line— iNTEirsECTiNG by themselves or their prolongation, some part of the old line, or its prolongation. New parallel positions being necessarily to the front or rear of the old one> the battalion will, accord- ing to circnmstances, take them up by the Echellon Fig. 44. 63. march, ihejili/ig of divisions, or the Movement in open column, and its subsequent formation in line. New INTERSECTING positious, which themselves cut the battalions, will be taken up by the Echellon march, or by the filing of divisions. All other new positions, which themselves or their prolongation, in- tersect the old line, or its prolongation, will in general be taken up by the March in open column, and its Fig. 43. 63. subsequent formation when it arrives at the line; some such positions will however allow of, and require being made by the Echellon march, or by xhc filing of divisions. — In general, the battalion will break to the hand which is nearest to the new position, be con- ducted to its nearest point in the new line, and formed on it as directed. Parallel. Intersect ing. When the battHlion breaks into open co- liiiiui, to In changes of position by theopen column, the whole battalion (as a general rule) is directed to wheel the whole quarter circle into open column, although it may often A. Of the BATTALION. 141 often seem an unnecessary operation, and that disen- gaging the heads of divisions would answer the same purpose where the change is to be performed by filing — Yet is the above general mode to be observed, be- cause it is a positive and defined situation, from which every change can proceed, whereas all other modes arc liable to uncertainty and mistake, and the apparent going over a little unnecessary ground, is a matter of no moment in point of time, and begets perfect pre- cision and correctness of execution. This rule, which is universal for all the following divisions of a column, may in some situations be dis- pensed with as to a leading division, which often has to wheel up again over the same ground, when the co- lumn is put in motion towards its new position : a previous and separate caution from the chief of the battalion may therefore, when it is seen necessary, prevent this extra movement to the leading division, and give it a more favourable situation in the direction in which it is to proceed. — As in the case of a batta- lion marching off by column of divisions from a flank to the front. If the xihccl is made bachvards— The flank division may stand fast, till the wheel is made, and when the rest of the column has marched up to it, it then receiver the word March from its own leader, and proceeds. If the wheel is made forward — At the first word March, the flank division moves on a space equal to its own front and halts, it is then ready to proceed when the whole is put in motion. Should the battalion march off by column of divi- sions from a flank to the rear — whether the divisions wheel backward or forwards, the flank division wheels with the others, and from that situation that division will again wheel to the rear, when the column is put in motion. In all central changes of position on a point within a battalion or line, and which are made by the movements of the open column -the battalion or line breaks back- wards make a change of position. In central chanj;es of posiliun the buttiiliui) ur hue brcuks 1 i' ■ 1 / 142 PART III. E\ 1 < I ht 11 '/! into open coluniii, fuciim to tlic iiained division. Fig. 45. « ; '•'- 1 wards into two open columns facing each other, and the given point, so that the one has its right in front, and the other its left. From this situation by the filing, or by the march of divisions, its component parts move to their new position, and the division which fa- ces the given one having there taken a double wheel- ing distance, the divisions wheel up into line. The advantages of making central changes, by breaking inwards, so as the whole stand faced to the named division, in two columns, are, — That the uni- versal rule of all bodies breaking, dressing, forming to whatever point they are led by and manauvre to, is observed.-— That the taking of distances in the new column, are all from the front and none from the rear, which last is a matter of difficulty and delay. — That the battalions of the wing which is thrown forward, advance from their inward flank, and in the shortest line to where that flank is again to be placed; at this point they begin to form, and the formation is made by quick filing of divisions into the new column, where the exact covering of pivots and taking of distances is instantly and easily ascertained. That the parts of the line on each side of the central division work exactly in the same manner, and form in line by one and the same method. — That the breaking inwards of the line, or the countermarch of such part of the column as is before the central division, gives these advantages, nor is the countermarch the affair of a moment. In central changes, was the whole of the line to break to one hand, or part of a column not to countermarch — Although such part as was behind the central divi- sion, and thrown backwards, would take its distances from the front, and might proceed exactly as above ; yet such part of each as was before the central division, would be obliged to take its distances and covering of pivots in the new column from the rear, as the whole line would be broken the same way as the named divi- sion.— This, though it may not seem difficult when such 1 ;'' . (y^^e BATTALION. 14. such part consists only of the few divisions of a single battalion, will, when it is composed of several batta- lions in addition, be found no easy matter to accom- plish with precision. — In such case, whatever divisions of the central battalion were arranged before the named division would file from their advanced flanks, and place themselves in the above manner in the new line. The entire battalions which were before the named division would march in separate columns of divisions, each from its tiead or outward flank, and enter (by wheeling) the new line, at the point where its rear or inward flank was to be placed, it must then prolong the line, and be halted the instant the rear ar- rived at the point where the head entered. This operation would not be found easy, be slower, and at- tended with more uncertainty than the other method, by which the distances are so readily and exactly taken from the front, and where the same mode of execution is followed by both flanks of the line. — Although battalions and lines should be prepared to change their position in this manner, if so required, yet the other methoil is to be considered as the gene- ral one, and practised accordingly. n f WHEEL 144 PART III. ^j i ->•-; v li" i*'^ . V WHEEL OF THE BATTALION FROM LINE INTO OPEN COLUMN.— CHANGE OF DIRECTION OF THE MARCH.---WHEEL : AND ENTRY ON AN ALKINEMENT.— MARCH. -— HALT. AND WHEEL UP INTO LINE. S. 106. IFhe7i the Battalion halted in Line, wheels forward by Companies into Open Column, the Right in Front. un COMPANIES, RIGHT WHEEL. Fig, 69. A. '' At the CAUTION companies right WHEEL— The officers step out nimbly, and place themselves one pace before the center of the companies facing to the front; at the same time the right hand man of the front rank of each company faces carefully on his left heel to the right, and becomes the pivot, on which each company is to wheel. The covering Serjeant of the right company •^ also runs out and places himself at the point (a.) where the wheeling flank of that company is to Halt at the finishing of the wheel. — The covering serjeants of the whole fall back two paces. — The supernumerary rank closes up within two paces of the rear rank, and the di- visions of drummers, Src. enter into it, behind the respective companies which they cover, or are divided behind their , several companies. At ■r,.-%i fc. QUICK MAUCH, Of the BATTALION. 146 Halt, Dms.< At the word mauch each company steps oft' quick, turning eyes (and not before) to the wheeling man, and care- fully observing the general wheeling directions.— The left or wheeling man takes his firm lengthy step of 33 inches, neither opening from, nor pressing on, his own pivot, and turning his eyes to- wards that pivot. — The officer during the wheel turns towards his men, and inclines to his new pivot, — or left flank ; and standing faced to it with ^glance of the eye he sees when the quarter circle is completed, and each gives his word HaU,, Dress, at the instant that the flank man is taking the last step which finishes his wheel perfectly square. — The officer immediately corrects any dressing that the company requires with- in itself, instantly places himself on the pivot flank, and his Serjeant covers the second file from that flank. Both co- lours wheel up into column, aiid atall times remain behind the third file from the pivot flank of the leading center company, whether the company is halted or in motion. "1 ^, S. 107. If^heti the Battalion halted in Line wheels foi^ard hy Companies into Open Column, the Left in Front. The same operation takes place as in wheeling to the right, with these variations; that the left-hand men of companies face before the wheel begins, and th6 left covering serjeant marks the ground for the flank of the leading company. L ' After COMPANIES LEFT WHEEL. QUICK MARCH-! //«//, Dress. i .rf«" 140' PART III. ■■...■>• M i ,1 f ■:h^ % After the battalion has in this manner wheeled for- ward into column, it m\\ often happen that from the inequality of divisions, diflfercnt sizes of men, &c. &c. the pivots do not exactly cover; yet in this situation are they to remain, and to understand it as an inva- riable rule, that they are never to shift in order to co- ver, but by the express direction of the commanding otlicer, who will correct the pivots, if his intention is to pursue a straight line in order to form : but if the continuation uf a march is the object, he wilt allow tbeni gradually to get into its direction after they are put in movement. But the certain remedy for the above inconvenience is, that on all occasions of wheel- ing into open column from line, the wheels should be made backward instead of forward. A S. lOS. fVhen the Battalion halted in Line, wheels backward into Open Co- lumn, the Right in Front. COMPANIES, ON THE LEFT BACKWARDS >VH££L. Fig. 5$. B. At the CAUTioy, companies on the left backwards wheel, the officers step out nimbly, and place themselves be- fore the center of their companies, facing to the front, at the same time the left hand man of the front-rank of each company faces carefully on his left heel to th<; right, and ^(^omes the pivot, on which each company is < to wheel.— The covering serjeant of the right company a,lso runs back, and, places himself ttt the point (S) where, the wheeling fifanic of that cpnipany is to halt q,t the hnishlng of t^e wheel.— The coverin£ Serjeants of the whole fll back, two paces — i'he supernume.c— -• rank closes up within two paces of the rear rank, and ,r jm QUICK MARCH. Haltf Dress, Of the BATTALION. U7 I and the divisions of drummers, &c. enter into it, behind the respective companies which they cover, or are divided behind their several compa- nies. !At the word march, each com- pany steps back quick, and follows exactly the same directions that have been given in the case of wheeling forward. I ' ill S, J 09. IVhen the Battalion halted in Line, wheels backward by Companies into Open Column, the Left in Front, " The same operation takes place as when the right is in front, except that the right hand men of compa" j nies are the facers, and the left ser- QuiCK MARCH. Meant marks the ground for the Halt\ Dress, L flank of the leading company. COMPANIES, ON THE RIGHT BACKWARDS WHEEL. S, 110. If the Battalion is at once to break into Column of Sub-divisions or Sections. CAUTION. Q. MARCH. Httit, Dress, The pivot men of each facCf and their divisions wheel into colunn at the gen^^l WQrd march; the com- pany officers, (oply) give the word HaU, DresSf which suffices for the paiis of each company. — When the wheel is completed, and not before, the leaders who are to conduct the pivot flank of the second sub-division, •^ or of the second or other sections, place themselves there.— -The officer 148 PAR T III. :„. ,'>y is on the pivot flank of the leadini; sub-division or section ; his coverini; Serjeant on the flank of the second sub-division or second section; and an officer or non-commissioned oHicoi from the rear on the flank of the last section, after wheeling into column .(5.47.48.) } ft '< \- -- . *S'. 111. fFhen the Open Column is put in March in the Prolongation of the Line. ■^mx\'\. \ MARCH. in u -ITT '1 * The battalion standing in open co- lumn with the pivot flanks of its di- visions on the line, and advanced points' being ascertained, moves for- wards at the word march from its Lcommanding ofiicer. (5. 115.) Whenever the battalion wheels into open column, in order to prolong the line on which it was formed, and that no distant point in that prolongation is previously given, the serjeant ol the leading company will advance 15 or 2Q paces,, and place himself in the line of the pivot flanks, and the leading offiter will thereby (tak- ing a line brer his head) be enabled to ascertain the direction in which • he is to move. J J^^ia ... u k>»u' ! i ty jiu ' 'ill I'sj.'ftu t4iT— .■arjsd.i ^•i.'.'^i:m'ji\i jjiiq*'/ \\ S. 112. ■h k> Wi Of the BATTALION. 149 ' I S. 1 13. JVhen the Open Column with the Right in Front changes Direction to the Left, on a moveable Pivot. Right Shoulder^ forxvard. ( ^^s explained in 5. 22. 52. 'Forward, j S. 113. JVhen the Open Column with the Right in Front changes Direction to the Right on a moveable Pivot, Left Shoulder 1 ^ * > As explained in 5. 22. 52. Forward, j !l:>HtV^<. S. 1 14. JVhen the Open Column, advancing with the Right in Fronts wheels on ^ Jived Point into a new AUgnement. The alignement is entered by the leading division wheeling either to the right or left. — In either case the left or pivot flank officers of the companies must be placed on it: in the first instance behind it, and in the second before it. — In both cases the line is after- wards formed by wheels of companies to the left: in the first instance the line will front the same way as the column; in the second, it will front to the rear of the column. ■^ • i #^^ L3 S. 115. «f - -^ -v ^-.^ 150 PART III. \*.^ il Haltf Dress. March, ■'A { S. 1 15. When the Open Column ^ adcanc- ing with the Right in Front, wheels to the Right, on a halted Pivot, into a new Alignement, and marches in it. * Fig. 60. C. r Th<^ alignement being detennined by given objects,and the point; (c.) of Fig. 52. entry marked, the leading officer who has marched his left flank on that point, when he arrives at a distance equal to the front of his company from Right, Wheel. J it, ordefs Right, Whe^l, and tbic quick wheel is made, so that on the conclu- sion of it at the word Halt, Dress, ho himself shall be standing on the new alignement on the flank of his compa- ny ready to give the word March, as soon as the succeeding company has ^arrived at the wheeling point. After this he moves on without look- ing behind, regarding his division) or al- lowing any thing to take ofl" his atten- tion, and at the established ordinary pace towards the distant points (a. a.) so that his shoulder shall just graze tbe head of any mounted officer's h'^;se posted at an intermediate point (or tbe breast of any man on foot placed for the same pur- pose), and which he, invarijably .pre- serves in a straight line with the given object.—- 'll.i'i rule all the foUoving of- ficers must observe, at the san^e .time, that they maintain their exact distance from the company preceding. A|)d should any of the companies deviate to either hand, those that succeed them must rectify the fault, and exactly touch the point where the adjutant is placed. The 4.. Of the BATTALION'. 151 The principal attention of the leading oBicer must be, never to change tht time or length of step, other- wise a stop must happen in a considerable column, and the soldiers wilt afterwards be obliged to run. He must move in one constant position with his front rank perpendicular to the line on which he marches. The same directions regard the other officers who conduct companies, and who in addition must correctly observe, that at the word March given to the preceding com- pany, the following one is ordered. Rights IVhcel. In this they will exactly agree, if the otlicers preserve their due distances, and make their wheels at a re- doubled pHce, and also, that all the companies wheel at the identical point where the leading one wheeled ; therefore all the companies must march straight up to the'point where the first rank of the preceding one commenced its wheel. — The attentions of pivot offi- cers marching in the alignement have been already described in the open column. To insure the more correct march and halt of the pivot flanks in the alignement — The commander of the battalion or column may occasionally go forward to an advanced adjutant, and being himself trui) placed, may look back to the point of wheeling, or entry into the alignement, or to any other fixed object that is in it.— He can then see if the rear flanks of the column keep the true line, or deviate from it, and may correct them by signal, or by sending back an adju- tant to take his position in the true line, and to whose direction they are immediately to conform. In this manner also can the leader, if necessary, cor- rect the piv t flanks after a halt, when there is a rear point of view suflSciently marked. — If that is not the case, ^c ma^ go towards the rear of the column, line the flank ol the 5th oi' 6th company, on that of his leading company; and a front point of march, he will then return to the first company, and on the Hunks of that and the 5th correct the rest of the pivots. H l( L4 5. we. 152 PART III. hn S,}l6, TVhen the Open Calumny advancing with the Right in Fronts wheels to the ' ' Left on a fixed Point, into a new Aligne- ment, and marches in it. Fig. 60. B Left, Wheel, Halt, Dress. MARCH. ^ The leading company begins its wheel to the left on the alignement it- self, when its pivot flank officer arrives at the point of wheeling, instead of (as in the preceding section) beginning at the distance of a company short of that point. (S. d1.) Whatever has beensaid respecting a battalion broken from the right, takes place in one broken from the left ; the only difference is, that the flanks arc now changed; that the left company does what was before done by the right; and that the right flank officers ure placed on the alignement instead of the left. S. 117. JFhen the Open Column, advanc- \ingwith the Right in Front, and com- ' posed of Divisions of unequal Strength, i wheels to the Right, on a halted Pointy ' into a nezv Alisrnement. Fig. 62. Kight Wheel, Halt, Dress, March. The pivot or left flank continues to direct till the leading division arrives in its full f.ont, behind its proper wheeling ground, and at a due distance from it. — The word Right, Wheel, being then g'ven, the reverse or right flank (c) of that division stops, and the general pivot one completes the wheel, so that nX the next words Halt, Dress, I\Iarch, the conductingofficermaybeexactly, "rcc« on the new line of direction; they thus -^l succeed each other, observing that a stronger Of the BATTALION. 153 r%i ;iw< stronger division (a.) wheels short of the groiyid of its preceding weaker one (b.), by the space of as many files as it ex- ceeds the preceding one; and a weaker division overpasses the ground of its preceding one, by the extent of as ma- ny files as it is deficient; in both cases, after the wheel the divisions will have retained the same relative situation as before its commencement, and the left ^ pivot flanks will still cover. S. 1 18. IVhen the Open Column — Halts — JFheels up in Line, and Dresses, If in the manner already directed, the several com- panies of one or more battalions have entered the alignement, and mn rched with their pivot flanks along it, covering each other at their due distances, for which company officers are answerable, there can be jiolhing easier than to form well in line. Tk,60.Gl JIALT. Whenever therefore the head or ifce real division arrives at the given point wliceit istorest in line, thecommandcr of the battaliongives the word halt. — No one moves after the delivery of this word, not even half a pace, but the foot which is then off" the ground finishes its proper step, and the other is brought up to it. If that was not done, and thatone company should stop while another was permitted to make one or two paces, those behind would he obliged to shift anew, and much confusion would arise from \ 154 V A RT III. ■m 'M WHEEL UP INTO LINE. Fig. 49. ^ Q. Mi^RClI. mn, DVess. frdtnoflficeni being deficienit in one great principle of their business, the prcserv. ing of proper distances.-^The instant the iiALT.iH ordered, the commanding officer from the head division of each bat- talion (he taking care that he is himself placed in the true line) makes any small correction on a rear point' in that line that the pivots may require, although _nosuch correction ought to be necessary. The Caution is then given, compa- nies wheel up into line; on which the pivot men of the front ranks face per- fectlysffiuare into the new line; thecom- pany officers move briskly out and place thenistjlves'one pace before the centre of each, tHeircovaring Serjeants move to the right of the front rank of the cbmplanies if the wheel is to be to the left, or other- wise behind the pivot file if the wheel is to be to the right, and an under-of- ficer ofthe leading company o\' the bat- talion runs up, places himself S':|uare in the new line., and marks the pcint (s.), at which the wheeling flank of that company is to aiTive and be halted. At the word mauch, eves are turned (and not before) to the whi'eling hand, the whole step off in quick time, the wheeling man lengthening his step to 33 inches, and everyother man diminishing his, as he is nearer to the stflnding flank. — The oflfic<»rs during the wheel turn round to face their men, incline towards the pivot of the preceding company, and as each perceives his wheeling man make the step which brings him up to tbat pivot, he gives the word Haltt Dress^ strong "» Vf t\9 BATT^UW. U5 ^ strong and firm to hit' company, which halts with eyes still turned to the wheel- ing fltknk, and each oQicer being then placed before the preceding pivot to which his men are then looking, from tiMsnce corrects the interior of his com- pany, upon that pivot, his own pivot, and the general line of the other pivots. — ^Thjs being^ quickly and instanta- neously done, tjie officer immediately takes bis post on the right of his com- pany, which has been preserved for ^him by his serjeant. In this manner dressing is made, and eyes are turned alwkvs to the point where the head of the column halted, tQitbe right when the wheels are made to the left, and to the left when the wheels are made to the, right; and if any future correction of the line is made by a held o^icer, it will be from the. fixed point where, the head of the cplumn restede As theie are so many determined . points giVen, it' becomes easy to dress cprrectly a platoon or battalion after wheeling up, if due care is taken that the pivot man do on no account move up, ,or fall back, what- ever direction may be then given by the company of- ficers for completing the dressing. — If a defect exists, it must proceed from the, other men not having lined with those fixed points ; the internal correction of companies must tnerefore be made, but the original pivot men remain immoveaUe, until a general correc- tion of the dressing the battalion is made by a field of)i« cer if necessary. — ^The officer of the third company, frir example, if the wheel has been made to the left, has only to consider the left file leader of the second company, close to whom he standi as to the point of appui, and his own left flank man as the point to dress upon, there will then be nothing easier than to dress the other men of his company upon these; but he 'I A i ' 1^ Ji*'^ ' *^*^%».-A 156 PART in. '\^ r ■f f he will still more exactly do it, if he places himself 2-or 3 files on the other side, of the pivot man of the second company^ and from thence corrects his own. . If all officers are in this alert and skilful, and that soldiers are accustomed to dress themselves, a batta- lion will be instantly formed, nor will the commander have any thing to recti f}'. When the column has broken to. the left; all that has been before said takes place : aiid is in the same manner executed. — Only the right flank man does what has been directed for the left: he fronts when the platoon begins to wheel up ; and the point d'appui being now on the left, the dressing must from thence be regulated ; consequently tlie soldiers loojv to the left. It is to be observed, that when at'any time after ^ forming in line, there shall be a false distance be- ^ tween either of the flank divisions and the battalion, the ofllicerof such division, without waiting for di- rections, may immediately, by the closing step, join^ his division to the battalion ; but no other division of a battalion is in such case ever to niove, without orders frofti the commanding officer. ' When the battalion has formed in line, and that j there are several false, openings betwixt divisions, , they may be remedied by the closing step, on the * order of the commanding officer to close to apy . named division, the others hatting successively by word from their several leaders. (5. 43. 790 And iii, ., the same manner may the crowding of files in a. bat- talion pf parade te remedied, by closing from tjie | point of crowding, and halting when sufficiently . j loosened. , i ■..•-./.■: 1 1"» .Hi' J " w. !*' ^-'f « ■ ■ ^4 S. Hi). •%^ f-'- Of the BATTALION. 157 S\ 1 19. fVhen the Open Column which is to Wheel into Line is composed of Sub- divi- sions or Sections y and not of Companies. WHEEL IN- TO LINE. Q. MARCH. Halt, Dress. At the word wheel, the company officer alone moves into the front, and the pivot leaders of the other sub-divi- sions or sections go to the point they would be at, if the column was a co- lumn of companies: . The pivot mau of each body in the column faces.— At the word march, the whole wheel. — And the company oflicer gives the word Haiti Dress, to the whole com- Lpany. (S. 50.) The line of the march of the open column will al- ways be about a pace before the line on which the troops form; because the one is the direction preserv- ed by the officers in marching, and the other being that on which tlie (lank men halt and the companies wheel up into line, is distant of course from the first the breadth of a file, which, leaving the advanced points distinct, aft'ords a great advantage in the forma- tion and correction of the line. — Alhough the offi- cers halt in the alignement itself, yet it is impossible to allow them to remain immoveable as points of form- ing for their divisions, because the dressing of those divisions depend on them, and that they must occupy their proper places when in line. — The flank files of men are therefore the pivois of divisions in wheeling up into line, although the officers are the j)i\ots during the march, and an attempt to form the line on the points of march themselves would derange the pivot files of men, and cause disorder. A commander must be careful that he himsrlf is ia the alignement whenever he dresse? his battalion, or corrects the Hanks of his divisions.— In order to direct well. 15B PART in. ^11 >ii;i well, he must place himself on the line, and on the adjutants who are in it, and give hi^ h6rs6 sifch b di- rection, as the divisions should touch in niarchiA^. CHANGES OF POSITION OF THE BATTA- LION FROM LINE, BY MOVEMENTS OF THE OPEN COLUMN. Changes of position are made either on a fixed point within the battalion, or on a distant point without it. i ON A FIXED POINT. S, 120. If the Battalion is to chancre Po- sition to tfie Front, on the right halted Platoon, by throwing forward the whole Left, and by the filing of Platoons, Fig. 47. B. The right flank (c.) is the fixed point on which the change is made, and is in the intersection of both lines, the com- mander immediately ad libitum places another point (b.) 20 or 30 paces be- yond that flank, these two determine the direction of the new line and face to it. The right platoon is wheeled for- ward to the right and placed in that direction, and is then immediately wheeled backward on the left, till it stands with its pivot (a.) perpendicular i. ta that direction, and on which its ,o(fi««r posts himself* The i. V Of the BATTALION. 159 BY C0M?4 KIESONTHE LEFT BACK WABDS, WAEEL. LEFT FACE. Q. MASCH. I S \Hr . Halt, Front, Dress. WHEEL UP AXD FORM. 5 , ' 1 The rest of the battalion is then I wheeled backwards on the left by pla- •{ toons, and stands in open column.— I At the word left face, the whole (ex- cept the fixed platoon) face. At the word Q. march the several officers lead their files towards the points in the new line, where the pivot flanks of their platoons ought to be placed; and the better to ascertain these points, the c<:vering serjeant of each platoon will successively (as it approaches with- in 20 or 30 paces of the new line) run up and place himself upon it at the pro- per distance of his platoon, facing to the head of the column^ and covering exactly those that hive taken their places therein : The piyot flank oflficer (a.) of the front platoon, and the ad-^ vanced officer or serjeant (b.) before mentioned are the, original points on which tht; first Serjeants that come up arrange themselves, and thereby be- come additional points for the others. The serjeant thus placed (being on the spot which the officer isafterwardsto oc- cupy,) each officer comes up in his own •person immediately before the serjeant, HaftSj Fronts his platoon. Dresses it quickly by closing his flank front rank man to his serjeant, and placing it per- pendicular to the new line.-^Th' "'.cer takes the place of his serjeaiU, .id the whole being steady, and pivots corrected by the commanding officer as they ar- rive upon the line, every one is in a si- tuation to wheel up and form. Should no serjeant be previously advanced to give the pivot point, the officer must at, ^once conduct the head of his file to it. " S. 121. ' I' I i6o PART III. i V' » I ON THE LEFT BACK- WARDS M'HEEL. RIGHT Ol- FACE. Q. MARCH. - i "♦..^■^ ?.»»«■ -JjEKSSfc, Of the BATTALION. l6i. .'. -'T S rowing it then back' , and filing, take ht for I # S. J 22. Tfthe Battalion is to change Post* tion on a centrai halted Platoon, by the filing of Platoons, and that the Right is thrown jonvard and the Left backzvard. Fig. 48. f One flank of the centrial platoon is considered as the point (a.) of intersec-^ tion, another point (o.) taken at/ ///;/- turn, determines the direction of the new line. The given platoon is first oM THE wheeled into it, and then wheeled RIGHT back till it stands perpendicular to it; AND LEFT J and the covering serjeant from each BACK- WARDS WHEEL. RIGHT FACE. f. 122. J — — ■ g — J of the adjoining platoons runs out and marks where their future pivots (c. b.) are to be placed. — The other platoons wheel backward, so as that f c4 they all stand faced to the given one.— The whole (except the given platoon) FACE to the right> viz. Jio*^^, a hat are to move towards the rear, to the rear. a. MARCH, f They then march, and the Ser- jeants giving ground in the tine of the pivots, which is determined by the three already placed therein, they ar- range themselves in two columns, be- fore ar.d behind the placed platoon> Haiti Front, towards which the whole still face. — Dress. ^ The platoon (b.), which immediately faces to and is next to the placed one, must take care to form with a distance V equal to its own front, and that of the placed one } all the others are at their f^ WHEEL just wheeling distances in column. — UP, AND From this situation the line is formed form. t^y a wheel to the proper front. ; ? .1 . i 1- .■(?*•■■ i- •►- ^-rf-n IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) {/ iyi^£?^ 4^ 1.0 £fi^ ta itt lU 12.2 •? lit ■" £ U& 12.0 I.I II 1^ UA HiotDgFaiJiic Sdeices Corporation ^ .s^-* sj c\ \ ^^^^ 4lfS V *'. o^ 33 WIST MAIN STRUT wnSTIR.N.V. 14SM (7U)S7r4S09 ^^" ^ l69 PART III. If the right is to be thrown back and the left for- \vard, the only alteration from the above is, that the platoons would face to their left, and file from their left instead of their right. «^^ Fig. 57. B. BY PL»- vTooKs, on :THt — — BACK- WARDS WHEEL. a. M.^RCH. Haltt Dicss» TO Tilt -i— FACB. ON A DISTANT POINT. *V. 123. frhen the Battalion is to chafige to a distant Position either to its Front \ or Reary by thejiling of' all its Platoons^ and that this Position is either Parallel '- or Oblique to the one it quits, THE battalion breaks into open co- lumn of platoons, to whichever hand the new position outflanks the old one, for to that hand will the whole have to incline during the march ; ! and if it does not sensibly outflank, ^ then the battalion will break to the hand next to the point of intersection of the two linei, for that band is nearest to, and will in general be the first to enter any part of the new posi- tion. The battalion standing in open co> lumn is ordered to pace. —The leader of the second platoon has then a di- rection given him which crosses the new line «r the point (o.) as near as can be judged where the flank of that platoon is to be placed.— The whole are then put in motion.— The Irader of the if cond platoon marches in hit given diicction at a itcady pace; Fig. 40. Q. MARCH f Of the BATTALION. 163 5 left for- , that the from their .^^ change ts Front ^latoons. Parallel oopen CO- levrr hand [9 the old the whole « march} outflank, ;ak to the itersection t hand is ral be the new poai* open CO- The leader Ithen a di- IroMet the ]i near as flank of |fd.— The ton.— The marches a steady pace j pacfj ; the commander of the battalion remains with the head platoon (c.) and by making it insensibly advance, or keep back, regulates the heads of all the others during the march, as they endeavour to place themselves nearly •^ in the prolonged line of the heads of the two leading platoons, but at any rate they are not to be before them ; Halt, Front, and when those two platoons Halt their Dress. pivots in the line, the others without hurrying arrive surcessively in the new direction, and stand in open column at their just wheeling distances. — When the head of the column is within 30 or 40 paces of the new line, (its direction being already prepared,) the Serjeants run out and mark the pivot flanks of , their several platoons. In this manner the commander, who is himself with, and conducts the two leading platoons, moves them in the direction that best answers his views, and at once takes up any position and to any front that is necessary. — As circumstances change bis intentions, he may at every instant vary, and direct them upon new points of march } the rear of the column always conforming (without the necessity of sending parti* cular orders) to whatever alterations of direction the head may take; and the commander conducting that head so as to enable the rear to comply with its movements without hurry. As the lines of march in filing will seldom be per- prndicular to the new line, the leaders of platoons will take care that their last IS or 16 paces in ap- proaching their Serjeants shall be made in a direction perpendicular to the new line, so that their platoons rosy Halt, Front, justly, without any necessity of shifting their rear files. During the transition from one position to ano- tl)cr, the wheeling distances should be nearly pre- M « served) K.' ¥ ■y^. l64 PART III. % h Tig. 50. served ; but at nny rate great care must be taken that they are correct, just before entering the new line. When the platoons in this manner gain a new po- sition by filing, they nlways File from the flank which is nearest to that position, and place their pivot flanks upon it. — If the pivot happens to be the leading flank, the conducting officer Halts, Fronts his platoon when he touches the new position, which is marked by his Serjeant — But if the pivot is the following flank, the otiicer who leads stops in his own person when he arrives at the new position, marked also by his Ser- jeant, and makes his platoon go beyond it and be- hind the Serjeant, till his pivot mad arrives in it. He then Ualt,s, Fronts the whole platoon — Conducting officers must therefore recollect that it is always the pivot flanks which are halted in the new position, and that on them the platoons wheel up into line.— In general when the platoons tile to the front, the pivot flanks lead and arrive first in the new line: When they file to the rear, the pivots follow and ar- rive last in the hne. Changes of position are thus made in an acjurate and expeditiouii manner by one or two battalions j but an extensive line would be too much broken if thrown into so many small files, nor could it in open ground, without the greatest attention to distances, risk such an operation, if there was any possibility of an enemy interrupting its completion.— This mode applies in many situations among trees, and where the ground is much impeded with bushes or obstacles which pre- vent marching on a platoon or a larger front. When the new line (c.) outflanks towards the point of intersection, then the battalion breaking to that hand, will have its head (a.) nearer to the new line than its rear.— When the new line (B.) outflanks from the point of intersection, then the battalion breaking from that point will have its head (b.) far- ther from the new line than its rear ; but in this cnse the platoons must be so directed during the march, by ■* > making V be taken that Of the BATTALION. 166 making a kind of gradual wheel forward upon the rear, that the head (b.) shall enter the new line before '.he rear arrives upon it. .V. 124. IFhen the Battalion changes Po- sition by breaking into Open Column^ marching tip in Column to the Point where its Head is to remain, and enter- ing the Line by filing its Platoons. Fig.57.C.A. Fig. 5 1 . HALT. FACE. OUICK MARCH. II alt. Front, Dress. The pivot flank of the column being directed on the adjutant (c.) who marks the flank point in the new line, will HALT when arrived within a few paces of him: a point of direction (d.) beyond the adjutant is also immediately ascertained. — The word face (to the right or left, as is necessary to conduct into the new line) is then given and executed by all the platoons, and the Serjeants begin to run out to mark their pivot points. — At the word march ^ the whole move in Hie ; the head pla- toon places its pivot flank at a wheeling distance from the adjutant, and every other one in the manner before directed arrange themselves behind the head one, and behind each other ; their flanks being corrected by the commanding officer, they are then ready to wheel up into line. — The facing and filing of the platoons will depend on which side of the adjutant they are to be arranged, ^and which way the line is to face. When a battalion in open column, entered and marching on a straight line, ii to form at a point where its front M 3 tlank ;i^ M . I6(i HALT. • PART III. I flank is to be placed, it will receive the ^ word HALT when its leading division I is at a wheeling distance short of that . point. S. 1 25. PFhen the Battalion changes Po- sition by breaking itito Open Column'^ Marching up to the Point where its Rear is to rest — And entering the Line by the IVheeimg of its Platoons, Fig. 57. F. Fig. 53. Wheel. Halt, Dress. March. HALT. ^ Besides the adjutant who marks the point of entry, two advanced points of march must be given.— The battalion then enters by wheels, and moves (as in 5. 115.) and when its last division -Js at its point, it receives the word HALT, and pivots being corrected, the ^ whole are ready to wheel up into line. A battalion open column entering a new position where its rear flank is to be placed— If the wheels are made to the pivot hand, it receives the word halt when its rear division has just completed its wheel into the new direction. — If the wheels are made to the re- verse hand, it receives the word halt when the laiit division but one has completed its wheel into the new direction, and the last division itself flies and places its pivot flank at the given point. — When a battalion open column, entered and marching on a straight line, is to form at a point where its rear flank is to be placed, it will receive the word halt when the pivot of its rear division arrives At that point. By these operations of entering a new line at the rear, or at (he front point, will the distant changes of a considerable line generally be made ; each battalion breaking from the md line, and entering the new one in separate column } the whole of which movement may 0/ the BATTALION. 107 may be made in quick time; the battalions within themselves are at all times collected, there can hardly be any impediments from ground (where it is possible for troops to move at all). that can present the transit of the battalion column from the one front to the other; the line is taken up just, by placing the pivot flanks upon it, and the distances are most correct, being taken up in all cases from the front of the co* lumn. — Should the presence and nearness of an ene- my make it too precarious, thus to change position in detached columns, the ecuellon march must then take place. .S'. 126, JP'hen the Battalion changes Po- sition by breaking into Open Co- lumn— Alarch in g up in Column and entering the new Position at the Point where a Central Fig. 57. H. Division is to restj and form in Line. . It will often happen that the head of the battalion column must by wheeling enter the alignement at a point not so far distant from where that head is to be placed in line : On its arrival there, the rear platoons cannot then have entered, but are stopped in the old direction by the cessation of movement in the front, it therefore becomes necessary immediately to bring those platoons into the alignement, that the battalion may justly form, and this is done by filing. Wheel. ( The leading platoon of the battalion llaltfDressl \ having n7/pr/f^ into the alignement fol* March, | lowed by the others, when it arrives at I the point where it is to form in line, the word HALT is given, and the column M 4 Slops. K i / !i 168 PART III. f^ACB. •rfS."!^ iZR Fig. 5i3. I stops. — ^The leadixig {platoon, and snch ^ others as may have already wheeled into .the alignement, being now at their pro- per points, remain so, and the word FACE is (hen immediately given, 'wheu all the platoons, who are still in the old direction, face to the flank which con- ^ducts to their place in the new line. r At the word a. march, (he ser- • o. MAKCH. ijeants mark their points in (he line, Halt,I''ront,^ Forward. HdfStep. HALT. \' Of the BATTALION. 171 I'his movement is performed on the march, and must be begun at a distance behind the line, propor- tioned to the body which is to oblique and form. It may be applied to one battalion, but hardly to a more considerable body, which would find great difficulty in the execution. It gives a gradual increase of front during a progressive movement. — With justness it can be made on a front division only, not on a central or rear one : In proportion as the leading platoon short- ens its step, will the one behind it, and successively each other, come up into line with it.-— As soon as the colours of the battalion come up they become the leading point. Although it is an operation of more difficulty, yet if the leading division continues the ordinary, and the obliquing ones take the quick step, till they succes* sively are up with it, a battalion column which i$ pla- ced behind the flank of a line, may in this manner, during the march, and when near to an enemy, gra- dually lengthen out that line. CHANGES OF POSITION OF THE OPEN COLUMN, MADE ON A FIXED POINT BY THE FILING OF COMPANIES. Fig. 63 •{ The changes of position of aeolumn are the same as those of a line, after that line has broken into column. 5. 130. t . ^yW ^Tt .,..i 172 PART IFI. S. ISO. irhen a Battalion in Open Co- lumn changes Position on a Front fixed ,'1 Company, by throiciiigJoi^:ard or back- xvard the Pivot Flanks of the rest of the Column, f That company is placed with its pi\'Ot flank in, and perpendicular to, the new P" A * direction, and points before it and behind '•g' ♦7. S J, g^g given, as directed for the battalion ; the others face, mahch, and cover it i^n the new line. S. 131. irhen a Bat to I ion in Open Co- ', lumn changes Position on its Rear fixed Company^ by throwing J orward or back- ward the Pivot Flanks of the rest of the Column. Each company countermarches j the piven company is placed.— The change then becomes the same as on the front company. Each company again coun- I termarches and the column is in situa< [ tion to move on as before. 'f^^l. < » ra. (I S, 132. IVhen a Battalion in Open Co- lumn changes its Position on any cen- tral fxed Company. .o«i ,t; Thecompany (a.) is placed with its pivot flank in, and perpendicular to, the new di- rectioD^and points (c.b.) before and behind . it i' Of the BATTALION. 173 it are given, where the pivots of its nd- joining companies are to be placed: all such as were in front of it countermarch Fig. 43. -^ and face it. — The whole then face to, and FILE from whichever (but the same norninai) flank is required, in order to cover before and behind the placed com- pany, and to arrive in the new direction. — The companies that face the placed one again countermakch, and the L column is in a situation to move on. Should it be intended to form the line immediately after making the change of posi^on, in that case the company which faces to, and is next the placed one, would take care to Halt in the new position, with a double distance from the placed one, and the line would be immediately formed by the wheel up of compa- nies, without making the second countermarch, it is always to be remembered, that whenever two platoons face each other in the same column, with intention to form in line, they must have double distance as they both n'hcel inxcnrdx, and meet on the line of formation. — But when the column, after changing position, is to be countermarched in part, and proceed in the new direction, in that case no double distance is taken, and the necessary caution is given accordingly. S. 133. ff^hen a Battalion in Open Column changes to a distant Position in its Front. f The column will march forward to isome given point in that line, and Fig. 51.52. 53. < then enter it, according to one of the i prescribed modes at which its head, ^central, or rear division is to stand. " i. S. 134. '•«.<««ias;i^' 174 PART III. S. 1 34. When a Battalion in Open Column changes to a distant Position in its Rear. r Each division of the column will V Ki eo i;i 3 countermarch, and it will then pro- rig.5i.6g.6J.^^g^j as having the position in its (^ front. S» 135. IFhen a Battalion in Open Co- lumn changes to a distant Position to either Flank, * r The companies will file firom the \ old into the new direction ; or if the I^ig- *9- ^ position is distant, the bead of the co- J lumn will march towards it, and enter V, it as a position in front. S. 136. IVhen the Battalion Column with the Right in Front is to form to the Right Flank. If the battalion is required suddenly to be formed on the ground on which it then stands, the right pivots will quickly be covered, and the division will wheel to the right into the line : in this situation the divisions of the battalion will be inverted. If no inversion is to take place, the formation will be a successive onr, by the bead division wheeling to the right, and the others marching oo past it, and suc- cessively wheeling up. (6\ 188.) r ,,^ When the head of a column advantes and enters a new direction, by wheeling to its pivot hand, or by filing Of the BATTALION. 175 filing its divisions from its reverse hand, the formation made on that line, by wheeling up the divisions, will front towards the rear of the column.— When the Fig. CO. 61. head of the column advances and enters a new direc- tion, by wheeling to its reverse hand, or by filing its divisions from its pivot hand, the formation made on that line by wheeling up will front the same way as the head of the column did when advancing to the line. The open column forms in line on its front, rear or Fig. 78. central division, by the echellon march, as in S. 168. The open column closes to the close column on any named division, and forms in line by the deploymenta «>f the close column. ciuso CO* luiuJi. CLOSE COLUMN. I. THE battalion close column is formed from the Applica- colnnin of march, or from line. From the column of »«<>""* '^ march it is generally formed for the purpose of assem- bly, or deploying into luie.— From line it is formed in order quickly, and in force, to pass a defili* or bridge ; to make an attack in certain confined situa- tions, where circumstances make it eligible ; to op- pose, in ground where its flanks are not protected, a threatened charge of cavalry : to facilitate movements to the front, flanks, or rear, from which afterwards any other distances may be taken, or the line may be formed in the most expeditious manner. S. The close column will generally be composed of companies for the purposes of movement: But when it is baited, and is to deploy into line, it will then stand two conapauies in iruot, and five in depth. 3. Tha ...^ -.«»***l!' M 1 1 'I *«. Formation to front or tear. »s 176 PART in. > 3. The same general circumstances apply to the close column as to the open column. When the close column is formed, rear ranks are one foot asunder, di-> visions are one pace asunder : Officers and Serjeants are on the pivot flanks of their companies : Colours and supernumerary officers and Serjeants are on the flanks, not the pivot ones : Music, drummers, pio- neers, are ordered into the rear of the column : Ar- tillery is either in the front, or on the reverse flank of the column when in march. »■ ' "^ 4. The commanding officer alone gives orders to the close column for its march, halt> and com- naencement of formation. 5. The battalion close column amy be formed from line} in front or rear of either of the flank companies; or in the front and rear of any central company. fi. // tf/c Column is to stand faced as the line is, the battalion will face imwauds, or to the directing com- pany, each other company will disengage its head, march, and place itself as ordered before or behind that company. 7. If the Column is to stand faced as the rear of the /i//«, then the directing company will countermarch on its own ground, the battalion will face outwards, or frcm the directing company, each other company will disengage its head, and move in file towards its place in the closr column, by this means accomplishing a countermarch of the whole, and the column standing fronted to its former rear. 5. \37 Of the BATTALION. 177 rORMATION OF CLOSE COLUMN FROM LINE. 5. tsy. Before or behind either of the flmik Companieit. • • Fig. 64. CAUTION. TO THB FACB. — .MStt?, A CAUTION will be given mention- ing the company, and whether the for« mation is in front or rear of it. — ^The battalion will then be faced to that company and the beads of the other companies will disengage to which ever hand naturally conducts them towards their pladB in the close column : The officeAi and their covering Serjeants post ^ theniselTes at the head of their filen ready to lead ; the officer of the named company ^fts> if necessary, to that flank wthich is to become the pivot one of the'coluffbn, and his serjeant also places himself 6 or 8 paces t>efore or behind him (according to circum- stances) to mark the perpendicular of .the, front of the column. AUICK MARCH. Halt, Front, • L':!' ^l The whole will march ouick to the front or rear of the company order- ed to be formed on, and each leader will proceed in the same manner as in form- ing an open column from line (except that tbe Serjeants do not run out,) stop- ping in his own person at his pivot point t and giving his words If alt. Front, -^Drest, to his company, when it has arrived upon the proper ground on t which it is to stand in cloie column. N During *l »\ .r-T. 'I I ; 178 PART III. i During the formation of all close columns, as soon as the battalion is put in motion, the commanding of- ficer will immediately place himself in front of the column, before the officer of the named company, and from thence judging the perpendicular of the column, will attend to the officers covering each other in that direction as they come up, whether such covering it taken frbm the front or from the iear, which will de- pend on the formation of the column. ■^ .MO IT 'J A ,» Hill ■'-r.n\in ■3 '» ' "J ; , S, 138. Oh a Central Compatiy. Fig. 64. f A, caution of formation is given.— CAUTION. INWABDS, FACK. a. MAKCH. Halt, Front f Dress, The named company will stand fast : and the battalion will face inwards ; the heads of companies will disengage, according aa they are to be in front or rear, theoffieerof the named company wjlliplacG himself on his future pivot flank, and at the word March, the rest of the formation will proceed as before directed, part of the battalion arranging itself before, and part behind the given company, and the officers covering on ^ the proper pivot flank. ■ (i 1 '4> in> SiOtr mQ 1. In the same manner in which close columns are here formed from line on any given division, by facing and disengaging, may columns at half or quarter distance also generally be formed : observing, that in such cases the covering serjcants run out to mark their respective flank points^ as in the formation in open column. y • t. In ,1 Of the BATTALION. 17^ Fig. 65. 66. OUTWARDS S. In formingclose column facing to the rear, the same operations take place, as to the front, with this difference — That the caution expresses what is to be done ; that the named division countermarches; that the other divisions of the battalion face outwards from it, and lead from their farthest flanks, in order to establish the countermarch ^of the whole. I 3. The close column is formed from column of march, by halting the head di- vision, and ORDERING the others to close up, and Halt successively.— Or, by the head division continuing its march, and ^M the rear ones being ordered to march auicK into close column, and successively to resume the ordinary march. The dose column marches to its flank to deploy; to correct intervals ; to gain an enemy's flank ; or for some other particular purpose: But a considerable movement to front or rear cannot be made without looseoi » • • I ij ' KiZ9'' fVhen the Column marches to a Flank. • . t , . ,: COLUMN WILL MARCH TO THB — " A CAVTioH will express to which flank it is to march ; if to that which is not the pivot, the leading officers and Serjeants of each will move quickly by the rear of their divisions to that flank : and the supernumerary officers and Ser- jeants and colours, who were on that flank, will exchange to the other. N« The .^M If > i » M •I ' V I 180 RIGHT (or kBFT)PACB. O. MARCH. HALT. FRONT. I . PART III. > The whole xi'ill then vacb, and be put in MARCH, the officer that leads the front division taking care to marcli in the exact alignenient, and all the others in preserving their proper situa- tions, dress and move by him. — When the column halts, fronts, the pivot officers and Serjeants, &c. &c. are or- dered to shift to their proper places (if not already there) by the rear of their respective divisions.. .1.^ ,$, 140. When the Column marches to the X'CWiwi-'Uv-t ji\%,yii Front, march. tOOSBN llANKS. Step out. HALT. Halt, J) ri viH 1- if • .III .h \ti. :j;di n-j uis'a ».1T The whole step off at the word MARCH, or OUIOK MARCH. If it is meant to loosen the ranks of the co- lumn, a CAUTION so to do will be given, on which all the divisions except the leading one will step short, and each successively from its leader will receive a vfordttep out, when his ranks are one pace asunder. If a general word halt, is given, the whole column halts as it is then placed ; but if a oartial and low ^ord Halt ii given to the leading divi- sion only,^ tb^fikhers still move on, and Halt successively in close column by word fh>m thor leaders. • .1 I t ni it, )\ -s.-i' . < * .'... I ir>qai oif) bur, <»,.w ,*;u)i03 I»'rt5 ¥U\rM i.At Hty .'• 1 1 '.V « .'! T 'T 5. 141. V Of the BATTALION. 181 kCB, and be :r (hat leadi ire to inarch and all the )roper situa- im. — When rs, the pivot &c. are or- er places (if rear of their S 141. When the Column halted is to take a new Direction, CAUTION. hes to the ■ —PACE. «. MARCH. 1 ^o//, Fron^ t the word H Um*. H. If it ii H of the CO- H ^ rill be given, H , except the H .' r, and each H will receive H inks are one H IVOrd HALT, ■ iS*. 14S. i halts as it is H al and low H iading divi-> H ... 9ve on, and H column b/ H ■ iHT ■ t 5. 141. A CAUTION will be given that it is to change direction either to the right or left ; on which the cO[:cer8 and Ser- jeants, if not already there, shift (o the flanks that are to lead. — The front di- vision of the column is placed in the new direction, and an advanced point is given to determine the future line of pivots. The other divisions will face as or- dered, and MARCH quick. — Each divi- sion separately when it arrives at its point which the Serjeants i^iay give, will Halt, Front, and cover in column. Officers and Serjeants will again shift to their pivot flanks, if necessary, and .the covering of pivots be perfected.- When the Column marchings changes Direction, a If gradual and inconsiderable changes of direction are to be made during the march of the column, the head will step short, and will on a moveable pivot gra- dually effect such change, while all the other divisions, by advancing a shoul* x>iR, and inclining up to the flank, which is the wheeling one, will succes- sivdy conform to each other, and to the N 3 leading "•safc^rr. ...J 183 :» PART III. leading division, so (hat the whole at the word forward may move on as before. S. 143. fVhen the Column is to make Fro?it to its Rear by Countermarching. Fig. 71. THB COLUMN WILL COUN- TERMARCH. — — FACE. BVBN DIVI- SIONS, 41. MARCH. HALT. THB WHOLB COUNTER- MARCH. Q. MARCH. Haltt Front, Dress. < If the divisions are at a sufficient distance, they will each separately countermarch as directed for iheopen column.— If the column is quiteclose, the whole face from the pivot flank; the even or every other division (rec- koning from the head) will march on till its rear has quitted the column 3 or 4 paces, they then are ordered to COUNTERMARCH towards the column and at the same word the odd divi« sions which have hitherto stood still, countermarch also, each on its own ground : the even divisions march on till they are again in column in their ^proper places^ and Halt, Front. f mr DEPLOYMENT OF THE CLOSE COLUMN 4vsus»J' y. INTO LINE. ^r»t 1. The battalion close column forms in line^ on its front, on its rear, or on any central division, by the DEPLOYMENT, or flank march, and by which it sue* cessively uncovers and extends its several divisions. S. Before the close column deploys, its head divi- ^ion^ whether it is baited or in movement^ must be on jrV^;l-»f ,■ " . the Of the BATTALION. 183 the line into which it is to extend. — ^That line is therefore the prolongation of the head division, and such points in it, to one or both flanks as are neces- sary for the formation of the battalion, are immedi- ately taken. 3. The Hank march must be made, firm, marked, Attentions «t the deploy step, parallel to the general line, and "[ the de- without opening out, the most particular precision is P'"y™*"*' therefore required. Each division, when opposite to its ground, will be most advantageously fronted, or at least corrected by a mounted officer of its own bat- talion, in case that its leader should not be critical in his commands, or that he should not be heard, or that his files are too open ; and thus may the defects of a preceding division be remedied, by the judicious stop of the one following it : The division is then brought up into line by its respective leader.— The justness of formation depends altogether on officers judging their distances, and timing their commands. — ^The officer who leads his division up into line, must take great care that it does not overshoot its ground ; his dressing is always from the last come up division, towards the other flank, 9pd[the eyes of all are turned to that diyision. , r .}. d'<4. As the head of tho close column is always brought up to the line on which it is to extend : there- fore when the formation is made on the rear or on a ! central division, such division when uncovered must move up to the identical ground which the front has quitted.— The njethod formerly practised of throw- ing back such divisions as are before that of forma- tion is improper, and will not apply where several battalions or columns are to form in the same line. 5. In the pauage of the obstacle parts of the bat- talion are required to form in close column : and again deploy into line, although the division formed upon continues to be moveable. 6. Before any column deploys, the divisions are ini«.p> N4t well 184 PART III.\P well closed up and square, and music, drunnmers, kc. •rein its rear or on the flank not the leading one; that the movement may not be embarrassed. '^ •h fHfii )v 1 '^ WHfiN THE UAttALION CLOSE CO- lumn of companies (the right in front) deploys into line. 5 S. 144. On th^ Front Division, •A Fi^. 67. f The column being halted with its 'V' front division in'the aTijgnementj and all the others in their true situations pa^ rallel, and well closed up to it, a point of forming lipon and dressing is taken, roRM LiMB<{ in the prolongation of that division (an4 corrected from it) lust bey<>nd where the left of the battalion is toexteiid D. •o-^A CAtJTKON it giveii that the line ^will form on the front division. '' At the wbrd to the lbpt, Itacb, the front division stands fast, its officer OK THE FRONT 01- VISIQK. I.BPT4FACB. «, MARCH. %%'ti shifting to the right, and all the others face. — At the word maach, they step off with the heads dressed, movins parallel (not oblique) to the line of , formation ; the files also are closie and (^compact, without opening out. The officer of the second or leadini^l division having stepped out to the right at the above word march, allows his di-^ vifiQD led by his serjeaot to go 00 a space '*- ^ ' equal J ^} Of the BATTALION. 105 Haft, Front. Dress. March, e>t:..i i t' Halt, Dress. equal to its front, t^nd then gives bis word Halt, front— Dress, his Serjeant stijl remaining on the left of the divi- sion.— -He then, being on the right of his division, immediately gives his word March, and the division proceeds at the ordinary step towards its place in the alignement. The officer having in the mean time stepped nimbly forward, places himself before the left flank of the preceding division, and is- thus ready to give the word Ha/t, Dress, at the instant bis inward flank man joins that division: He then expeditiously corrects his men (who have dressed upon the formed part of the line) on the distant given point, and resumes , his< proper post in line. In this manner every other division proceeds, each being successively (by its officer who himself stops on the left flank of the division, which precedes hxcti} Fronted, Marching up. Halted, and Dressed, in \mc: The officers of these _^ divisions, as each approaches within Halt, Dress. \ 6 or 6 paces of its ground, then step- . " ping up to the flank of his preceding fornied division, that be may the more accurately Halt, Dress, his own ; and the flank serjeant of each remaining at bis point in the line, 'till the suc- ceeding officer having so dressed >is division comes to replace blm ; he.then Covers His own officer. Halt, Front. .'Dress, March. ♦no ji S. lis. *.^,^»V^ _J ■ U 1 m ' H s 1 1 ? 1 1 li t- 1&6 PART 111. ■ ** 5*. 145. On the Rear Division, Fig. 68. The column being placed as before directed, and a point of forming (D.) taken to the right in the prolongation of the head division^ and just beyond where the right of the battalion is to ^coroe. FORM LINE f A CAUTioK IS given that the line ON THE REAR DIVI< STON. will form on the reac division; on which the officers commanding divi- sions, and their Serjeants, immediately pass behind their several divisions, and post themselves on the right of each ; J an under officer is sent from the rear ' division to place himself correctly close to and before the left flank iile of the front division ; and the leader of the front division is shewn the distant point (D.) in the alignement on which he is to march, taking his intermediate ^points, if necessary. > Tlie word to the right face is then given, on which all the divisions, ex- cept the rear one, face to the right. -^ At the word MARCH, the faced divi- sions step off quick, the heads of files are dressed to the left« the front one moves in the alignement^ and the others parallel and close on his right. As soon as the rear division is unco- vered, it receives the "word March; on this the division process, and when within a few paces of its ground, its officer steps nimbly up to the detached -{ under officer, who marks its left in I the new position, he there in due time gives his words /ia/^jD/e^^^ and quickly ,i^i .e corrects \4J RIGHT FACE a. MARCH. •< A March. Of M^ BATTALION. 187 Half, Front. Dress, March. Halt, Dress f Halt, Fronts Dreti, corrects bis division on the distant point of forroaiion, this done, he re- places his Serjeant on the right of his ^division. In the mean time the commander of the division which imonediately pre> ceded the rear one, having at the first word MARCH, stepped nimbly rouod to the rear of his division, without im- peding its movement, and having al- lowed it to move on led by his Serjeant, gives his words Halt, Front-— Dress, when his division has marched a dis- tance equal to its front, and thereby uncovered the one behind it, which immediately moves forward ; he then places himself on its left, and his Ser- jeant remains on its right. — As soon as his own front is clear, he gives his word March, on which his division proceeds, he himself, when proper, advances to the right of the preceding division then on the line, and from thence gives his wor4» Halt, Dress, when his own left file joins such right ; he corrects. his division on the right, and then replaces .his own Serjeant. f AH the other diyisionis successively I [proceed in the same manner, until the light one < which has^ been marching •^ critically in the alignerjientv ami on no account getting before it) receives, when it arrives on its just ground, the ^wordji Halt, Froht-r-Dress. -. ,^? i .5.«i^ .-ifelt S. 146. -. •».*^^j t -^^^ I 188 PART III. ink —'1 S, 146. On a Central Division, Fig. 69. THE LINE WILL FORM ON ■■ DIVISION. < •^ OUTWARDS, FACE. O. MARCH. n-'v* "'- Forming point (o.d.) must be given to both flanks in the prolongation of the head division. — At the caution of forming on a central division, the lead- ing officers will shift accordingly. — The divisions in front of the named one foce to one flank j those in rear of it to the other, according to the hand which leads to their ground. — ^The named di- vision, when uncovered, moves up into line to its marked flank; those that were in front of it proceed as in form- ing on a rear division : those that were in rear of it proceed as io forming on a front division. :,!'•' J- .1 '*>'.' I '» t i' i 1 1^ ; ( P » I ML S. 147. fVken the Close Column of Com- ,,, panics forms Column of Two Companies, !-> or Grand Divisions. ALTBRNATB COMPANIES WILL FORM COLUMN OF GRAND DIVISIONS. «— FACE. Fig. 70. 78. MARCH. On the CAUTION that the alternate companies from the front will form grand divisions, all supernumeraries, &c. but not the colours, go to the rear of the column if not already there.— At the word face, the alternate com- panies face (always to the pivot flank) and their officers then take one step sideways, so as to be clear of their rank. — At the word march, the officers stand fast, the serjeant of each conducts the division, and the officer of each, when it has cleared the standing di- vision. Of the BAITALION. iia Halty front, -, } Dress. ' March. Halt, Dress. '-Mtf ^> rial •Ri.m urnm -.'{io'i Mi w CLOSB DIS- TANCE TO TUB FRONT. MAKCH. /io//. Dress. vision, give* tht words Aalf, Front— ' Dress'— March ; and Halt, Dress, when he arrives at the one he is to join, his Serjeant being on the flank of his divi- sion in the same maftner as in deploy- ing into line. The colours remain with their proper division in the co- lumn, and that division nnjust of course Loutflank on the hand not Hit pivbt one. The officers and serjejants now shift their places, and take post (whether the column has its right or left in front) so that the right company of each divi- sion has its officer and its serjeant on its right, or in the eenter of the divi- sion.— A GAVTiON is given to close distance ta the front. — The divisions move at the word MARch. by the pivot flanks, and each pivot officer gives his words Halt, Dress, when his division has closed.— The close column is then ready to deploy or to march. ,^ ..... .ui/;^ . '(■LIk" It iioai (•>•.■ • ■ Utt biic, Ji • .,, -iriib IR:!'' '■ " WHEN THE CLOSE COLUMN OF TWO COM- PANIES IN FRONT IS TO Di;PLOTr. { S. 148. On the Front Ditision. THE L^NB WILL FORM ON THE MONX DI- (^ VISION. V.VJl ^ The CAUTION of deployment !s given, the line is prolonged, and atten* dant circumstances prepared. — The di- visions that are to move, receive the word FACR (always in thjs case to the pivot r^. ,1-' h:i n J ■>i' \ 19^ FACE. a. MARCH. HALT, FRONT. Dress. March, Haiti Dress, Fig. 67. -♦7«Ij Mill "^'i ;^'; ., PA R.T III. '^S) pivot flank.) ~They movt in file at th« word MAACH.— A mounted officer gives, successively and in due time to each division, the word halt, feont. •^ — The inward officer of each division, when it is halted and fronted, gives his words Dress — Mai-ch Halt, .Dress, and the outward officer assists him : by remaining on the flank of the division in the line, in the same man- ner that the Serjeant does for the com- pany.— The left officer then replaces his Serjeant on the right of his proper company. In* this majnner division after division comes up into iin«, and the supernume- raries, Hq. also gradually take their places iip,tbe rear., , ;. ..■■> » , .;, ,%w\^\ .*.U^ 6'. 149. On the Rear Division, caution. Q. MARCH. if if MALT, FRONT. Dress, The CAUTION of deployment is given, the line is prolonged, and an under officer sent from the rear divi- sion to the pivot Hank of the front one. FACE. ^ —The divisions that are to move receive the word face (which in this case is always from the pivot flank.) — They move in file^ at the word MARCH. .,'Lf .V. The division that is immediately be- fore the rear one, as soon as it hb un- covered the rear one, receives from the mounted officer the word UALt, front, and Dress from its inward ift pivot officer, and it that initant the rear Of the BATTALION. igi March, -^ rear one is ordered to March forward Halt, Dress. March, by its pivot flank, and to Halt, and Dress in the line.— The division which preceded the rear one,, and is now baited and fronted, when it is itself uncovered, in consequence of the movement of those before it, is also ordered to March forward, and to Halt, Halt, Dress, (^and Dress in the line. HALT, FRONT, Dress. March, Halt, Dress. In this manner each division, as it uncovers the one behind it, successive!/ HALTS, FRONTS by Command from the mounted officer, and when it is unco- ^ vered, is brought up into line by its own inward officer, aided by the out- ward officer. — This done the left offi* cer replaces his serjeant, who has pre- ^served his pbst in the front rank. S. 150. On a Central Division. CAUTION. OUTWARDS FACE. a. MARCH. HALT, FRONT. The double operation of forming on a front and rear, d^visibn is required.— The CAUTION of deployment is given. — iThe divisions face outwards — MARCH— and there must be an o/Ecer to HALT, FRONT, those of each wing. — The individual divisions proceed as already directed. ^^ ^,^ The column must always be well closed up, before it deploys.— When it deploys on a front division, it faces to the pivot flank, which then becomes the lead- ing one.--i>When it deploys on the rear division, it faces from the pivot flank, which then becomes the following one. The close column, when it forms on a front or rear division, may either be halted or in motion to its flank. — From 1^9 ^ A JIT i lit. ^i T— From this situation of the flank march It is, that every battalion is required to begin the deploy when forming in line with others; and must therefore be much practised by the battalfop when single.— Viz. After the colump has been pladed in the alignemenr, it is FACED according as, it is inteodedto form on the front or rear division, and is then put ii^ march, its liead division following the alignement,: at any in- stant the division to be i formed upon is ordered to HALT, FRONT, and the others, without stopping, proceed and deploy up6n' itj if It is the front one, it is already in the line!; if it is the rear one, the point which it'come^ tip to,' teihdink mat-ked for it. When the formation is oti a central division, it must always begin from the halt of the dose column. The single battaVioiq should alsp jo exercise deploy on the front division when in march, as it is the me- thod by whijcb tbe and the rear of the divisions gradually get into the square direction of their heads. Fig. 73. B. -^ which proceed and form as usual. In this movement, the heads of the divi- sions will be a litttle retired behind each other : the rear leaders will take great care not to close on each other, nor to the hand which conducts them : much precision is also required in justly timing the halt fiiont of each divi- sion, which by that time ought to be moving perfectly parallel to the Hue of formation. .t^JtUDfttlP .il • S S. 152. If' the Deployment is to be made on an Oblique Line retired. The front division is wheeled upon its PIVOT flank into ihe new direction j and the line is prolonged to D. — The same operation, though more difficult, takes place, as when the line is advan- O ccdj ..dhlJuL>'.. .A ,'t<< I t 194 PART 111. 1 ced, and the rear divisions mnst take Fig. 73. A. << particular care to ease from, and yield to, the naarch of the front.— The head division being advanced a few paces before it makes the oblique direction, will give a facility to the heads of the rear Ales, in gradually gaining it. Such deployment can hardly be required on any other than the front division of the close column ; par- ticular attention is necessary to give every aid as to the points of forming, and to the heads of divisions mov- ing as soon as possible in the true direction parallel to and behind the line. Should a column be ordered to form on the rear, or on a central division, although the principles would be the same as on the front, and as in the other rear or central deployments ; yet the execution would be very difficult, and demand great circumspection in the commanders of battalions. fc>a •,•'■ o U-- ■f" U Jdl *< 153. fflien the Close Column halted in to form in Line in the Prolongation of its Flanky and on either the Fronts Rear, or a Central Division, The caution of formation is given, the named division stands fast, tl>e others march forward in close column in the given line : Their pivot officers successively take wheeling distance from \: each other, beginning at the named one, and successively give their word Halt as each has acquired it : When the whole is in open column, the line is formed by a wheel up to the flank. — In this manner distances are begun to be taken from the rear ; but when the named division is a front, or central one, the others that are behind it must FACE Fig.74.A.C.- ■a:.)hk i': Of the BATTALION. li)5 Fig. 74. B. - I ^ACB ABOUT, MARCH forward, take [^ their distances, and front successively. The column may also be opened from any named division, by the leading one only marching off, and each other suc- cessively following,aswheelingdistance is acquired from the one preceding : When the whole have opened, the ge- neral word HALT is given, or the co- lumn is allowed to proceed. , , ■ ■Jij ECHELLON. CHANGES OF POSITION OF THE BATTA- LION, BY THE MOVEMENTS OF THE ECHELLON COLUMN OF COMPANIES. 1. THE Echellon position ar\d movements are not only necessary and applicable to the immediate attacks and retreats of great bodies, but also to the previous oblique or direct changes of situation, which a batta- lion, or a more considerable corps already formed in line, may be obliged to make to the front or rear, or on a particular fixed division of tha line. 2. The oblique changes are produced by the wheel less than the quarter circle of divisions from line, which places them in the Echellon situation.— The direct changes are produced by the perpendicular and successive march of divisions from line, to front or rear. Utility of the Echel- lon uf inarch in cliunges of puitiliuo. How form* ,4! 02 ed. 3. The il ii.i 11 Hi 'I I ' i:^n A 196 PART III. ■ ) ! Fig. 75. How ap- plied. F.cliellon lornied by whfclvS of cotnpaiiies. Kcliellen culumii. Differences and agree- ment of (he open C(i- luinii and Echellon. Fig. 75. 3. The march in line, or in the direct Echellon B. produces new parallel positions to front or rear. — The march in Echellon C. when formed by the wheels of the divisions from line, produces new oblique positions to front or rear, according to the degree of wheel giv/^"- Of the BATTALION. 197 equal to its own front. In Echellon each preserves a distance from flank to flank equal to the front of its preceding division. An Echellon may at any time be converted into the open column, by wheeling up its divisions till they stand perpendicular to the line which passes through all its directing flanks. An open co- lumn may in the same manner be converted into the Echellon column, by wheeling back its divisions, each a named number of paces, and on either flank, ac- cording to circumstances. 7. The wheel from line into open column is easily as- certained, by the perpendicular halt of each division on that line; but the parallelism of the wheels into Echel- lon, which is a circumstance that is essential, and de- cides the justness of the movement, is more diflicult to be determined ; for, being confined to no certain por- tion of the circle, such cannot well be announced or executed as a direction, and therefore a given number of paces to be wheeled by bodies of equal strength, and which serve as so many parallel bases of formation, may be the best general order that can be given. 8. If the companies of a battalion, or more consi- derable body, were all of equal strength, and should the outward man of each take the same number of paces on the circumference of the circle which he describes, they will, after the wheel, stand parallel among them- selves: but if those companies are unequal, they will then not be parallel to each other, and consequently not in a proper relative situation. Though such equality may exist in a single battalion, it will seldom or never exist in a line of battalions, and a different calcula- tion and direction for each battalion, corresponding to their strengths, appears necessary to be required, whenever they are in concert to change position.— This difliculty may be obviated by adopting a practi' cal rule as well for the battalion as for the line, on all occasions of wheeling by companies into Echellon, in order to change position, and of whatever strength the companies may be, viz. That each covering O 3 sctjcant. Mciliodot furming Echellon by whet'Is iVuin line. i 198 PART III. kit ,)' » V General Kit nation of the direct- in c dies of Echellun. Fig. 76. Passing ob- sluclvs. Chances in the roHf to EcheJlon. serjeanf, as the case requires, hating previovsl^ placed himself he/ore or behind a given ^file (the %th) from the standing Jiank, shall take the named number of' wheeling paces and thereby become a direction for the company to wheel up tOy and halt: as in S. 164. I. '58.— As eight paces of the eighth file complete the quarter circle or WHEEL, so four paces give the half wheel, and two paces the ouarter wheel, all which are wheels often made from open column, or from line, to change to a position perpendicular, or more or less oblique to the one quitted : and these degrees, with the helps given by advancing or keeping back a shoulder as is necessary, duringthe movement, will perhaps suffice to arrive und form in any new direction with precision. 9. Tk3 flank directing files of Echellons, whether they arc formed by the perpendicular march of divi- sions successively from line to the front, or by the wheels of divisions from line to the flank, will tit first, and should always afterwards be found in a diagonal, line with respect to the front of divisions: In the first case A. the distance from flank to flank depends on the interval which the divisions are ordered to march off at : In the second case B. such dtstahce is always the same, and equal to the front of the division which has wheeled forward, and which, by wheeling back, would exactly fill it up. T^henever therefore the di- recting flanks of an Echellon are all in the same line, and each distant from its preceding one, a space equal to the front of the preceding division, such Echellon is in a situation by wheeling back, to form in line to the flank, as in 6'. 156, or to take a position forward as in &'. \62, 10. In the Echellon march, such division or divi- sions as may meet with obstacles, will file round them without deranging the adjoining divisions, who pre- serve the necessary vacant spaces and distances till the broken divisions can again take their places. 1 1 . When a change of position or march to the rear is to be made in Echellon, the battalion or line Of the BATT. JON. 199 will in general facb about, wheel into Echellon, and then proceed. Or it may be ordered first to WHEEL back into Echellon, then face about, and proceed as above. , , .^ .,^ k CHANGES OF POSITION OF THE BAT- TALION FROM LIXE, BY THE ECHEL- LON MARCH OF COMPANIES. 1 . When the outward flank man of the company formed three deep is ordered to wheel up three paces, or, if formed two deep, to wheel up two paces, such wheel is sufficient to disengage its rear flank from the front rank of the following one. — In such a situation a certain small degree of inclination may be gained to a flank, in proportion to the front of the company which has so wheeled, and the adherence of the several companies close behind each other's fliink, should fa- cilitate the operation : but when a greater degree of inclination to the flank is required, then a more con- siderable wheel up by Companies is made, that each may thereby be placed in the perpendicular direction whifch it is to pursue. 2. It has been observed, that the degree of wheel into Echellon is always less than the quarter circle ; and that the Sth flie from the standing flank is always the one to which the named number of wheeling paces (33 inches each) is applied, in order to ensure the pa- rallelism of the companies, however unequal they may be, and whether they wheel backward or forward.— Also, that the degree of wheel made from line into Echellon, is always such as is required to conduct the divisions in a particular direction to their future points ; and this required degree must be determined 04 b? '*■ I'OO PART III. by trial> or by the eye of the commander, before he announces his order to half wheel— quarter WHEEL — or WHEEL any named number c. paces, as 2. 3. 4. .5. 6. 7. ; ' ■ '- vard so many paces to the right or left, so as to place them perpendicular to their future lines of march, the officer, if not already there, moves to the named fiank of his company, and the covering serjeant of each at the same time runs out, places himself before the 8th file from the named flank, immediately takes the said number of wheeling paces, on the cir- cumference of the circle of which his flank man is the center, and then stands fast with his body turned to the line of that flank man, who also faces into the line of his serjeant. — The whole Ser- jeants ought thus to be in a line; but if any small correction is necessary, it will immediately, by the commanding ofH- ^cer, be made from the leading flank. At the word marcHj each company wheels up till its 8th file arrives close be- hind the serjeant, at which time the offi- cer who is 00 the standing flank gives his word Of the BATTALION. 201 Halt, Drest. word Halt, Dress, eyes are turned to- wards him, and the dressing being completed, the serjeant places himself ,on the outward wheeling Hank. In this situation the flanks wheeled tu, remain in an exact line, and also the wheeling flanks, if the di- visions are of equal strength; but in proportion to the degree of wheel which has been made, will the per- pendicular raised from the standing flank of each di- vision cut within the division preceding it, till by the complete wheel of the quarter circle all such perpen- diculars coincide, and beyond that, new Echellon situations begin to the rear. ^^ 2. When the movement is to be to the rear instead of the front, in that case the battalion will in general face to the right about, and wheel forward into Echellon in the before- mentioned manner, pro- ceeding as jf the line was to its proper front. 3. Or the battalion may occasionally be first ordered to wheel back into Echellon (as in 6'. 158.) and then to FACE ABOUT, and MARCH to the rear : they thus do not stand for any time un- necessarily faced to the rear, previous to the operation of marching, which is a circumstance to be avoided as much as possible. ')! S. 155. fPlien a Battalion, having from Line wheeled into Echellon, Marches forward and Halts; ready to form in such Direction as shall be required. f The companies standing thus parallel to each other, and their leaders being on the pivot or flanks wheeled to, at the V • word W.^ SOS PART III. \\ ,I,M I'. r- 11 MARCH. word MARCH, the whole move on at the ordinary step, each flank on its own perpendicular : each officer is now at- tentive to preserve the distance he Fig. 7y. marched otf at from his preceding pi- vot« and also his oblique covering in the line of pivots, which remain always l*'ig. 86. A. I parallel to the original line : this re- I quires the greatest care, being an ope- •^ration more difficult than moving in I open column, where all the pivots cover each other in the same line. — These circumstances observed, the E- chellon may at any instant be ordered HALT, to HALT, and wilt then be in a situation ready to form up, parallel or oblique to the line it quitted. If parallel, by each division wheeling back to the flank of • ' t^ - .r the one immediately behind it. Ifob- ■..'HT'i.r- / lique, by the divisions moving up into the direction, which the leading one then has, or is to be placed in, as is ' ' (^ hereafter directed. "iThe Echellon can at no time march in any other di- rection than in the one to which it stands perpendicu. lar, except that an oblique march of the whole divi- sions should be required from it. — During the march, the same g*-eat regulating circumstances that direct the open column direct the Echellon, viz. the preser- vation of distance from the preceding leading flank, and the diagonal lining or covering of all those flanks, nt the same time that the perpendiculars of march are preserved by each division. — Could the march in Echellon be always executed with the greatest accu- racy, each flank leader covering a certain file of his preceding division, at a certain distance, would en* sure exactnesR: but this alone is not to be trusted to, and is rather to be considered as an aid than as an in- variable rule; for, the unsteady or open march of one or more divisions, if productive of a waving or shift- •# Of the BATTALION. £03 ing of the following ones, would in a sensible manner influence the whole. — If the leaders of the two head divisions do preserve an equal and steady pace under the direction of the commanding officer, who keeps close on the flank of the first one, and gives such di- rections to the second as are necessary for preserving the parallelism of the march ; those two will serve as a base line on which all the others should cover.— -In this, as in every other case, the perfect perpendicular march of the first leader, in consequence of his body being truly placed, and his attention solely given to this object, is what will much determine the precision and justness of the whole. -, .^ . ^ ■ / WHEEL BACK INTO LINE. QUICK MARCH. halt, Dress. S. 156'. J t lien the Battalion, having fr heeled from Line into Echellon, has Marched, and Halted, and is to form back, parallel to the Line it quitted. A CAUTION is given that the com- panies wheel back into line : on which the pivot men face into the line, and the officers take one step forward.— At the word MARCH, each company wheels back to the new pivot, and on receiving from its officer the word Halt, DrcsSf eyes are turned towards him. The line being completely formed, officers and Serjeants (if not already there) move to their respective places in line, except in the occasional case of wheeling into line, in the middle of a change of posi- tion.— For officers do not then shift from their leading flanks (unless order- ed,) but remain there ready to fire, and In wheel again irtoEchellon, to resume the march, when the supposed ittdden I. attack of cavalry ii repulsed. «. MARCH, and then Halt, front, successively in the line of the rear company. \ '. .. « 3. If the line ivas to be formed on the rear company, but facing to the rear— the whole column wopld first countermarch each company by files, and then proceed as in forming on a front company. 4. Jf the line was to be formed on a central company of the column, that com- pany would stand fiast, or be wheeled on its owa center into a new required direction. Those in front of it would be ordered to pace about. — The whole, except the central company, would wheel back the named num- ber ""•'Vr-y^pwr^ Of the BATTAHON. «07 ber of paces : those in its front on the proper pivot flanks of the column, and Fig. 78. B. "{ those in its rear on the reverse flanks, such being the flanks that flrst arriv^ in Une.— The whole would then march into line with the central company, as in S. l6l.— If the column was a re- tiring one, and the lino^ was to front to the rear, the divisions must each countermarch before the formation be- gan, and I he head would be thrown back and the rear forward. wt'^. \)i .5'. 159. IVhen the Battalion changes Po- sition to the Front f on a fived Flank Company^ by throwing forward the rest of the Battalion. - . When the commander has deter- mined the iio.w line to be taken, by Fig. 77. A. placing a person a. in it, 20 or 30 paces beyond the* flxed flank: he orders the Serjeant from before the Sth file of the Fig. 86. C. i flank company to wheel up into that I line, thereby to ascertain the number of paces required.— He then directs that company to be wheeled and baited in the new position, and the adjutant to prolong the line as far as the moving flank of the battalion will extend. COMPANIES WHBEL FORWARD — PACES TO THB O. MARCH. Halt, Dress. The caution is then given to the other companies, to wheel towards it, half the number of paces that the flank one has done, for theieby will each stand perpendicular to the line, which it drawn from its flank in the old line to its relative flank point in the new one, and -# 208 y^' P A R T III. k' ill Ji > i> > il •I MARCH. ^-;i — Shoulder forward. D/*f«« up, .1! «f — Shoxddcr fontiard. and it 16 along such line that each will move. — The battalion wheels into ^echellon, as in S. 154. !The officer being on the inner, and the serjednt on the outer flank of each company, the whole, except the fixed company, will move on at the word MARCH, as directed in S. 155. When the officer conducting the se- cond company approaches within 7 or 8 paces (and not sooner) of where his leading flank is to join the first compa- ny already placed, he gives a word — Shoulder (the outward one) forward, on which the man next to himself pre- serving the same step graduflly tiirns his shoulder, so as to arrive on the new line square in his own person; and the rest of flie division (who till this instant have marched in their original perpen- dicular direction) conforming to him ^ proportionally lengthening their step, arrive in full parallel front on the line, so as to have a very small movement to make it the'word Halt, dress up, which is given by the officer vhen his leading flank touches the flank of his preced- ing company: he himself having nim- bly slept forward when at 3 or 4 paces distance, and being then before that flank, instantly halts his men, and cor- rects them on the distant given point, their eyes being turned towards him, and the former division. • In this manner company will' come up after company, (or division of whatever kind after division,) each following one observing to give the word — Shoulder forward, when the preceding one gets the word Halt, •# .Jtm^-i Of the BATTALION. «09 Haltt Dress up, and each officer step- ping up to before the flank of his preceding formed company when he in within 3 or 4 paces of it, that he may tbe more quickly and accurately give Jlalt, Dress ^ his word Halt, Dress up, to his own up. men, which they are to do, preserving the cadenced step of the division, and not suddenly springing backward or forward. — The serjeanis will remain in the line till they are relieved by the ^ officers whose places they occupy. The exact formation to this oblique line depends. totaHy on tbe companies having wheeled (only) one half of the angle which the new position makes with the old one, for should they at first wheel the whole of that angle, they would be then marching parallel to that line, and arrive in it doubled behind each other; whereas by having theotber half of'the wheel to com- plete, when they come near to the new position, each moves in a perpendicular direction, and disengages the ground required by the succeeding one to firm upon. S. 160. fVhen the Battalion changes Po sition to the Rear on ajixedfiank Com- pany ^ by throwing backward the rest of the Battalion, Fig. 77. B 5 RIOHT ABOUT PACB. COMPANIES FORWARD WHEBL • PACES TO THE ■ ' ■ ' — The new position is given, and tlie fiank company wheeled into it in tbe \ manner already directed, but back* 'wards instead of foi^ards. r Tbe rest of the battalion FACES to the right about, the companies then wheel forward the given number P of \i -h «10 P A II T 111. r i if, i I '^ i , ! H: f^ f l1, » • G. MARCH. Halt, Diess. T. MARCH. ii\ — Shoulder forv:ard. V I of paces towards the stand- \ ing flank — or — as is already mentioned, they may if so ordered, wheel backward into Echellon, and then face , about. ( The companies march with their rear ranks in front> and form in line in the same manner as when changing po- sition forward ; except that the officer oi each having timeously given his word Shoulder , forward, when his pre- ceding one Halts, fronts, and then -{ having disengaged himself from his di- vision, will, as soon as his leading flank man of his front rank touches the pre- ceding formed flank, give his word Hg/t front. Dress baek, on which his company fronts, and without hurry dresses back on him and the formed part oV the line; he correcting them ^ upon the more distant given point. Very great activity is required from the officer in dressing up, or dressing back, otherwise the point of appui will not be ready for the next officer who ar* rives and is to perform the same operation, and this will particularly happen where the change of direction IS inconsiderable.— in the successive dressing of divi- sions in this manner officers are always to line them, so as not to obscure the aistant point, but to leave it open and distinct, so that the direction of the line may run at the distance of one flle from the given object of dressing. Halt, front, Dress back. S. 161, ^ ». Of the BAIT ALIGN. 211 S. 161. When the Battalion changes Po- sition on a Central Company^ by advan- cing one fringe and retiring the other. Fig. 80. r ' • "^^^ central company is wheeled into the new position as already di- rected, and backwards or forwards ac- cording to the wing it belongs to.— Two points D. D. are quickly taken in the line, about where the flanks of the battalion aie to extend, and in the line ^ of the central conapany. — WING, RiOHT ABOUT f The retiring wing FACE. I FACES about — both wings COMPANIES WHEEL — J ^/v^HEEL their Companies PACES INWABDS. J tnwards and forwards, O.MARCH. — Halt,Dresi\ half as many paces as the (. central company wheeled. MARCH, r The whole march forward into line 1 with the central company, the advanc- < ing wing dressing up, and the retiring i wing fronting and dressing back, as V. already directed. 2. During the march of divisions to the front, into a ;»«« direction, if they should b^ obliged to form in line in order to repulse a sudden attack of ca- valry j the whole will halt j the in- ward or directing flank of each will stand fast, and the outward one in« stantly wheels back to its succeeding one ; when the enemy is repulsed, the march is resumed by each company WHEELING up its outward flank to its former position, and then proceeding in the movement — during this opera- tion, the ofHcers remain on their Echellon flanks, from thence halt«^ P s dress HALT. WHEELBACK INTO LINE, a. MARCH. Halt, Dress, WHKBLINTO ECHELLON. a. MARCH. .# yj« PART III. (^ \ ■'»?^i a HALT, FRONT. WHEELUP INTO LINE. a. MARCH. Halt, Dress. RIGHT ABOUT WHEEL INTO ECHKLLON. O. MARCH. Halt, Dresi. MARCH. PACE.<( II alt, Dies-',, dress them when they «rheel back into MARCH. line; fire them if necessary, and from thence also wheel them again into ( £cheIlon. 3. During a march to the rear, if this operation is ne- cessary — The whole halt, FRONT : each c^pipany in- stantly WHEELS up its out- ward flank to the pivot pre- ceding, and the line is thus formed, officers remaining on their Echellon flanks.— When the movement is to be resumed, the whole face to the rear, each company again wheels forward its outward flank the required number of paces as at firsf« Land the march is continued. 4. If the change of position is a central one: Then both the above operations may take place at the same time. The general situation, if the whole is at any period of the movement halted and formed, will be : ^uch central part as has arrived at the new line will be formed in it ; but the flank parts which have not en- tered, and which join each of its CRtremities^ will be formed in lines parallel to each other, and to the posi- tion which they quitted.— When one flank only is re- quired to form and halt, the other will continue to pursue its proper formation in the new line. 5, The squareness of each Echellon and individual, and the perfect equality of step during the movement, are what alone can produce the decided exactness re- quired in tbeie operations. ■n ' Of the BATTALION. 213 S. 162. When the whole Battalion being movealfl€t changes Position to front or rear, on a distant pointy which is in the Intersection of the old and new line. Fig. 77. 79. r Jf the change is made to the front ; •every company is wheeled up to tb{; leading hand, half the number of paces and no more, that would be required to place it parallel to the new position ; the whole mov^ on in their perpendi- cular direction, till the flank of the •^ leading company arrives in the new line; it then immediately wheels up as many paces as it before wheeled, and halts, dressed in the new direction. — ■m The other companies march on, and as they successively arrive near the new line, they advance their outward ^shoulders, and halt, dress in it. 2. If the change is made to the rear: the whole face about, and break into Echellon.— Each again fronts and dresses back when it has arrived in the new line. This is the movement performed by each of the battalions of a considerable line, except one flank or one central one, in most changes of position made on a point within the line. — For there can be but one battalion of a line which forms on a fixed division j all the others are evidently moveable forward or back- ward; each in proportion to its distance from the ge- neral center, and from the point where id leading flank is to rest in the new line. '' !« i\ ?3 S. 163. f 1 ^ J "\ i: d'\ii y m It 214 PART III. S. 163. JVhenfrom Line, the Companies of a Battalion march off in Echellon, successively and directly to the front, and again form in Line, either to the front f or to the flank. Fig. 81. f Fig. 8 1. B.C. 1 . As long as the intention is to form to that front ; they may be retired at J any named distance whatever behind J each other, and when the leading divi- I sion HattSt the others may move on, (^ and dress in line with it. 2. But when the intention is to form in line to the flank : the whole will be ordered to halt, or the divisions sue* cessively to take any named distance and f/a/f— The directing flank of the lead- ing company will be considered as the first point in the intended oblique line, and the particular direction meant to •{ be given it, will be established by the placing of another point (a.) beyond and before it. A serjeant from each company will run out, and post himself as a pivot, lining on the first given points, and on each other, each also taking a distance from the one before him equal to the front of the division which precedes him. Therevr companies are then, by the oblique march to their directing hands, or by facing and filing should situation require it, marched to their respective Ser- jeants, and then Halt, Front, square to their former front. The line is formed by the wheel back of each company on those established flanks — Or— When the companies are thus placed, the whole may be put in MARCH i^jti •• ••*^->- , Of the BATTALIOX. 215 MARCH to the front, and preserving the relative situ- ations, HALT and WHEEL back into line, at some more advanced point. • I" ECHELLOX CHANGES BY SUB-DI V ISIOXS OR SECTION'S. In the Echellon movements by companies, in order to gain ground to a fl.ink, and afterwards to make a parallel, or an advanced oblique formation. — If the wheel up of each is considerable, it becomes the more ditHcult to preserve the true distances during the march, and thereby to resume the parallel line when so ordered, by the wheel back of companies. In many cases therefore such changes, if not limited to fixed points, may be made by the sub-divisions or sec- tions wheeling up three paces only, sd that each can afterwards move forward independent and justly, by remaining close behind each other; and this may be done either when the battalion is halted, or when it is in motion, without the intervention of advanced Ser- jeants, or displacing of otficers, but merely by the regular wheel up of the division with ils outward man, who takes t||e three ordered paces. ;i -.1 S. 1 54. Ift h c Batta lion is . halted CAUTION. I. The CAUTION is given that the sub- divisions or sections will wheel 3 paces to right or left. — At ihe word MARCH, the outward man of each sub-division or i^ection, whatever its strength may be, wheels up 3 paces, and Halt, Dress. ■{ each company officer gives the word P4 r- Halt, a. MARCH. n m ; ; ' I .iif' H ) it S\6 Fig. 8. A. Fig. 88. A. MARCH. Fig. 88. ^ lt\ PART III. Halt, Dress, to the standing band : in this situation the divisions will stand parallel^ or nearly so, and the front rank of each will be ioimediately be- hind the line of the rear rank of its pre- ceding one : the 3 file of coloars and center Serjeants will wheel up as a se- parate division parallel to the others. 2. After the wheel of sub-divisions the company officer will be on the pi- vot flank of his first one, and his Ser- jeant on that of his second.— After the wheel of sections to the rights the com- pany officer and his Serjeant will be on the right of the two leading ones, and an officer or Serjeant from the rear on the right of the others. — After the wheel of sections to the left, the leading ones will have an officer or serjeant from the rear on their left, and the company offi- cer and his serjeant will be on the left of the two last ones. 3. A sub-division of g files that wheels up in this manner 3 paces, will stand at an angle of about 30 degrees with its former front, and if it is only formed 2 deep, and wheels up 8 paces, it will stand at an angle of SO de- grees. — A section of 5 files that wheel;) up 3 paces, will stand at an angle of about 36 degrees. — According to the strength therefore of the division that thus wheels will be the degree of obliquity taken from the former po- sition. At the general word march, the whole move on in their then 'perpendi- cular (Tirectiou, as specified in theEchel- Ion movements, taking care that the step is equal, and that each keeps up to . ill Of the BATTALION. S17 I its preceding division, but by no means ^ throws forward its advanced flank, which would necessarily derange the others; and should one division commit this fault, the succeeding one ought not to be influenced by it, but still main- tain its equal step, and thereby avoid a ^ shake or hurry in the rear, by which , distances and direction would be lost. HALT. The whole halt. WHEEL f 4. If the battalion is to resvme its BACK INTO former front B. C. it instantly receives LINE. the CAUTION to wheel back into line. auiCK —At the word march, each division MARCH. wheels back 3 paces, thereby joining the next standing pivot, and immedi- Half, Dress. < ately receives the word Halt, Dress, from the leader of each company wherc- ever he may be (always on the right. Fig. 88. to which, if necessary, he will have shifted), to whom the whole of his com- pany then turn their eyes, and are by « ^ him corrected on the standing pivot. HALT. r 5. After the halt: If the battalion is to form forward, in the direction B. D. of its leading division, or that that division is previously wheeled up into a more advanced one — ^The company leaders will shift, if necessary, each to the flank of his leading division, if in FORM sections. A caution is given to form ' battalion battalion, and at the word march, the FORWARD, whole, cxcept the head division, move MARCH. on, and each pivot leader of the front rank, by a small and gradual turn for- ward ot his inward shoulder, if neces- ^ sary, conducts his division, at an equal puce towards the point of each in the new line, and when within 6 or 6 pncet of '/) tjKK^gm^ .',- *v "^*^^i(i^^»~*slWS^'^Tw~''"' ■" fr"' hi I 2)8 PART III. i\ i I) rr iS * I llalty Dress. of it, by the bringing forward the out- M'ard shoulders the division arrives in it on a parallel front, where each receives from the company leader (who is then oti the moving flank of his company) a word Ih>/f, Diessy and to which each successively conforms as he repeats it for them; in this manner the sub-di- visions or sections will successively ar- rive in line, observing the circumstan- ces of movement already prescribed. — When the line is formed, company leaders, if necessary, shift to the right of their companies. The whole of these movements depends on the ac- curacy of step, and the gradual and insensible turn of the shoulders of the pivot lead^'rs, to which the divi- sions conform, and by wh'ch ii v are conducted on the marcb^ and into the new '' i.^. S. 165. If the Battalion is in March in Line, Fig. 88. SUB-DIVI- SIONS, 3 FACES, RIGHT WHEEL. VO It WARD. 1. The intention being to gain ground to the flank by the echellon march of sub-divisions or sections, and without making a previous halt. — On the word sub-divisions or sections three paces to the right or left wheel ; the pi- vot men of the front rank of each divi- sion, turning in a small degree to the pivot hand, mark the time for 3 paces, •{ during which the named divisions wheel in ordinary time on those men, and the 3 files of the colours and center Serjeants also wheel up as a division, parallel to the others. — At the fourth pace, and at the word forward, the whole move on direct to the front which each divi- sion Of the BATTALION. 2>9 ii»i. WHEEL BACK INTO LINE. FORWARD. HALT. I sion has acquired, the position of lead- l^ers being as already described. 2. Wlien sufficient ground has been taken to the flank, on the word wheel BACK INTO LINE, the pivot men mark the time for 3 paces, turning back in a small degree to their original front, and the sub-divisions or sections instantly wheel backward into line, without al- tering the time, and at the 4th pace the whole step on, having received the word FORWARD, till the battalion is ordered to halt. U\LT. FORM LINE. FORWARD. HALT. -* V»i V 3. When sufficient ground has been taken to a flank, and that a forward /o;-- mation of the line is to be made, the head division halts in its then position, or is wheeled up S or 3 paces more and 4^ halted. The rest of the battalion re- ceives a CAUTION to form on the head division, they continue their march, and, conforming to the directions given in S. i64. by the gradual alteration of their , shoulders, arrive successively in lin«. "When the battalion is in two ranks only, two paces will be substituted instead of three in all those move- ments, and no' unnecessary time need be lost, or pauses made, betwixt the execution of these several words of command. 4. In these cases the original wheel up of divisions being limited to the 2 or 3 paces which disengages them from each other, the inclination of their flank movement, or of their change of front nr position, alters with the strength of such division. If therefore a small degree is to be taken, they may so wheel by companies, if a greater by sub-divisions, and if a greater still by sections, the close adherence of each to each eniuring (if well executed) the regularity of the 4 battalion ] 'I ^.M fSO PART III. V i' battalion during the operation, which i$ made on the principles, though without ail (he formality, of the exact echellon,and may be required and used in many situations of naoveroent, and changes of position. ■rr ; ! JV '\'\ ^ m tw General itttentions. Directing iwrjpanti. MARCH OF THE BATTALION IN LINE. THE MARCH of the battalion in line, either to front or rear, being the most important and most diffi- cult of all movements, evtry exertion of the ccm- roanding officer, nnd every attention of officers and men, become peculiarly necessary to attain this end. The great and indispensable requisites of (his opera- tion arej the direction of the march being perpendi- cular to the front of the battalion as then standing ; the perfect squareness of the shoulders and body of each individual ; the light touch of the files } the accurate equality of cadence, and length of step, given by the advanced Serjeants, whom the battalion in every re~ spect, covers, follows, and complies with. If these are not observed, its direction will be lost; opening, closing, floating, will take place, and disorder will arise, ID whatever line it makes a part of, at a time when the remedy is so difficult, and perfect order so essential. It is evident therefore that every individual should be well prepared for this operation. But more parti- cularly to ensure its correctness, two or more direct- ing SBRJBANTS must be trained to this peculiar object, on whose exactness of cadence, step, squareness of body, and precision of movement, dependence can be bad. The habitual post of the two directing Serjeants in the battalion is to be io the center of the battalion, and Of the BATTALION. «2I and betwixt the colours, one of them in the front rank, and one in the rear, that they thereby may be ready to move out, when the battalion is to march, one other •Iso covers them in the supernumerary rank. At all times when the battalion is formed in line, and baited, the instant attention of the front directing serjrant is (after being assured that he himself is per- fectly and squarely placed in the rank) by casting his eyes down the center of his body, from the junction of his two heels, and by repeated trials to take up and prolong a line perpendicular to himself and to the bat- talion} for this purpose he is by no means to begin with looking out for a distant object, but if such by chance does present itself in the prolongation of the line extending from his own person, he may remark it : he is therefore rather to observe and take up any accidental small point on the ground, within 100 or 160 paces; intermediate ones cannot be wanting, nor the renewal of such as he afterwards successively ap- proaches to in his march.->In this manner he is pre- pared under the future correction of the commanding officer to conduct the march. Fig. 11. S. 166. When the Battalion halted, and correctly dressed, is to advance in Line. Fig. 8t. The commanding officer having pre- viously placed himself 10 or IS paces be- hind the exact line of the directing Ser- jeant, will, if such file could be depended on, as standing truly perpendicular to the battalion, and great care must be taken to place.it BO, remark the line of its prolon* gation, and thereby ascertain the direction in which it should march ; but as such precision cannot be relied on^ he will from .i ! i ( t\'. I : life ( I t' i\\ .\ \ . ■ t l'U8 BAT- TALION, WILL AD- VANCE. •dft't /PART III.f^ from his own eye, readiness, and having the sqrare of the battalion before him, make such correction, and observe such object a little to the right or left, as may •{ appear to him the true one; and in doing this he will not at once look out for a distant object, but will hit on it, by pro- longing the line from the person of the directing serjeant to the- front: or he will order the covering serjeant to run out 20 paces, and will place him in the line in which he thinks the battalion ought to advance. — The directing serjeant then takes his direction along the line which passes from himself betwixt the heels of the advanced serjeant, and remarking his object, preserves such line in advanc- ing. The commanding officer will give the CAUTION, the battalion will advance, on which the front directing serjeant moves out 6 accurate and exact paces in ordi- nary time, and halts; the two other Ser- jeants who were behind him move up on each side of him, and an officer from the rear replaces in the front rank the lead- ing serjeant. The center serjeant in moving out marches and halls on his own observed points, and the two other Ser- jeants dress and square themselves exact- ly by him. — If the commanding officer is satisfied that the center serjeant has moved out in the true direction he will acquaint him so, if he thinks he has swerved to the right or left he will direct him to bring up the shoulder on that side the smallest degree possible, in order thereby to change his direction, and take new points on the ground, towards the ^opposite hand. ' •;. Thr i^^i t \ Of the BATTALION. ooo ne in advanc- The line of direction being thus ascer- MARCH, tained, at the word march, the whole battalion instantly step off, and without turning the head, eyes are glanced to- wards the colours in the front rank : the replacing officer betwixt the colours pre- serves, during the movement, his exact distance of six paces from the advanced Serjeant, aryd is the guide of the battalion. I The center advanced serjeant is answer- I able for the direction, and the equal ca- >«( dence and length of step j lo these objects he alone attends, while the other two, scrupulously conforming to his position, maintain their parallelism to the front of the battalion, and thereby present an ob- ject to which it ought to move square j they are to allow no other considerations to distract their attention, and will notice and conform to the direction of the com- mander only, and if any small alteration in their position is ordered, it must be gradufilly and coolly made. 1. Officers in the ranks can only be observant of their own personal exactness of march, they are then but individuals equally attentive as their men j they are not to attempt to dress their companies by looking along or calling to them^ otherwise they will certainly err themselves, and derange the march: such care be- longs to the officers in the rear; and well trained sol- diers themselves know the remedy that is required, and will gradually apply it. * 2. The weight of the colours, and the embar- rassment attending them in windy weather, rough ground, &c. make it impossible at any time to depend on the officer carrying them for a true direction, or an equal and cadenced step ^ but they must always be carried uniformly and upright, thereby to facilitate the nioving and dressing of the line. 3. The 1 A w<. V4 « I it ■: S34 PART III. Soldiers. 3. The MEN are on oo account to turn their heads to the colours, but to preserve them, and consequently their shoulders, square to the front, and to depend principally on the light touch of the elbow, together with an occasional glance of the eye, and the accuracy of step for their dressing.— If heads were permitted to be turned to the center, the inward shoulder would be brought forward, the wings would remain behind, the files would open, and disorder would arise in en- deavouring still to adhere to the center, and to coun- teract what would be occasioned by the fault of prin- ciple, and not of the soldier. Sti'p. 4. Inattention, or inequality of step, will produce a waving in the march of the battalion; but the com- munication of this may often be stopped, by the exer- tions of the major and adjutant, who seeing where and why it 'originates, will immediately apprise the companies in fault, and coolly caution the others that are well in their true line not to participate of the error. ■ A flank of the battalion may at first sight appear to be behind, when the fault really arises from a central division bulging out, and thereby prevenliog the flank from being seen. 6. Whatever alteration is to be made in any part of the battalion must be made gradually, and not hurried, that the consequent shake it occasions may be as little felt as possible; the mounted officers only can point out and correct such faults. Jluiiks. 6. The FLANKS on no account are to be kept back; much less are they to be advanced before the center ; in either case the distance of files must be lost, and the battalion will not be covering its true ground; the convex or concave shape of the battalion will shew this to the commander, and the beginning of each inaccuracy is to be studiously corrected by necessary cautions.-^— The officer who is on each flank of the battalion, being unconflned by the ranks and not liable to be influenced by any floating that does arise, may, by preserving an accurate .'"step, and having a general attention to the colours and .*,* .- -• to m^ Of the BATTALION. 225 to the proper line which the battalion should be in with respect to the advanced directors, very much assist in preserving the flanks in iheir new position: When he observes that a line drawn from himself through the center of the battalion passes considerably before the other flank, he may conclude himself too much retired; when such line passes behind that , flank, he may conclude himself too much advanced, he will therefore regulate himself accordingly. ---When ihc battalion in march is convex, the wings must gain the straight line of the center, by bringing up the out- ward shoulder j and it must be strongly impressed on . the soldier, that in all situations of movement, by ad- vancing or keeping back the shoulder as ordered, the most defective dressing will be gradually and smoothly remedied, whereas sudden jerks and qaick alterations break the line and produce disorder. 7. The RBAR RANKS which were closed up before ^^'^^ x^\\\.i. the march began, must move at the lock step, and not be allowed to open during the march: the correct movement of the battalion depends much on their close order. 8. Supported arms are allowed when halted or Arms car- vvben in column, as not interfering with its exact- '"^"^ ness ; but in the march in line, arms are always to be carried shouldered, as otherwise it is in vain to look for a just line or true distances of files, and slo- venliness, inaccuracy, and disorder, must take place, at a time when the most perfect precision is required. 9. The COMMANDER must himself attend to the Cliangeof correct movement of the directing Serjeant ; if during flo'ection the first 20 paces he perceives steadiness and no float- ^"/j^ '^^"' ing in the battalion, he may be assured that the line of murcli. march is justly taken ; but the contrary will be the case if (the parallel front of the battalion being preserv- ed) he sees the files on one flank opening, and on the other crowding; he will instantly apply the remedy by ordering |he directing serjeant — right shoulder FORWARD, if the opening is on the left of the batta- Q lion, /( Fig. 89. D. E. \^ I ^ / ■H^ Tl; 22f) PART ni. ¥.m'n ill I I i'i ( t- lion, or left shoulder forward if the opening is on the right ; At this command the serjeant making an almost imperceptible change of his position (by bringing up one shoulder,) and of his points, and the colours in the battalion when they have advanced 6 .paces to his ground conforming to it^ the whole will by degrees gain a new direction. — Every change of direction made in this manner must produce a kind .of wheel of t{\e battalion on its center, one wing gra- dually giving back, and the other as gradually ad- vancing, an attention which the commander must take care is observed. The battalion marching in perfect order, when it arrives at its ground re- ceives the word halt; the step which is then taking is finished, and the whole halt; eyes remain turned towards the .91 's:}i center, the whole remain steadied, and the commanding officer places himself close to the rear rank, in order to see whether the battalion is sufBciently dressed, and in a direction perfectly parallel to the one it quitted. — No preparatory caution is to be used be- fore halting, such caution supposes and encourages incorrectness, and cre- ates uncertainty : at the word halt, ^ the whole halt firmly. When the battalion is advancing in line for any considerable distance, or moving up in parade, the music may be alldwed at intervals to play for a few 'seconds only, and the drums in two divisions to roll, ]but it is the wind instruments only which play, the large drum, or any other instrument whatever which tl' ' ,; marks time by the stroke, is not to be permitted.— When the line is retiring, music are never to play. 1 HALT. JS ,n k • ^a, ' . < ■V •'ji !0 hii'ml n'- » -I ■~^ I:,--' ■itt ■ »*-■ .; >■. ' u '. -RijM tiiii 'lo ii'd Siir .■'i"'{* ^J S. 167. ^ •'i..-yu^ Of the BATTALION. 227 S. 167. IVhen the Battalioji is to Dress. It is evident that in the oressimo of a single bat> talion after the halt, whatever correction is neces- sary raust be made by advancing or retiring the flanks, and not by moving the center, which having been the guide in the march, has justly stopped at the point where it has arrived. 1. When the commanding officer gives the word dress, the company officer on the left of jj[»e colours in- s^ntly dresses the 6 or 8 files to the right of the colour in a proper parallel direction, the two wings immediately conform to the center,, and afterwards receive the word eyes front. .mf^ ^ , 1 * -. ! . ■•' ti • EYES FRONT Fig. «2. G. BATTA- LION, RIGHT DRESS. MARCH. Halt, Dress. 2. Should the commander require a more exact dressing than the above gives,' he will order one colour to ad- vance one step, and facIe to the left, also the second company officer on the left of the colour to advance one step, and face to the left; then the flank company officers to advance, and to face to the center; then each other J company officer instantly to cover ] those at their due distances, and face to the center J then the officers of the left wing to face about, so as the whole stand fronted to the left.— Then batta- lion, RIGHT DRESS, ou which the companies march up to their rcspec- tive officers, who are favourably posted for halting and dressing each his com- pany j after which, and without loss Lof time, the officers front into line. ?(M :h Q2 3. It ^f •t r. .y>f V A R T HI. H-A ■■ 4 I I'l h J ? • r I k^UI Cliaiige of direct ion on the flank hidted. 3. It mtist be observed in this mode of dressing, whether it is taken from the center, or from a flank, thut platoon officers, who originally face to the left, take distances equal to the front of their own platoons from the officer before them ; but such as face to the right must take distances from the officer before them equal to the front of the platoon^ which in. line is on the right of them.^ — When circumstances allow the dressing to begin from the left, an advantage arises, that the officers do all originally face to (he left. 4. A small change of direction may in this manner be given to the battalion when baited, either on a flank or central company. — To the Front by advaii* cing and placing the officers. — To the Rear by the covering Serjeants in the same manner giving the ground, the men facing about, lining with the Ser- jeants } then fronting; and the officers replacing the Serjeants. But a flank is never in such case supposed to move above 20 or 30 paces. The battalion may also be occasionally dressed in the following correct manner.— One of the colours is advanced some paces. — An under-officer on one flank of the battalion is placed in a determined line* — An under-officer on the other flank lines himself with the last placed one, and the colour. — The two center grand divisions are moved up to the colour, and dressed to each flank. — The wing grand divisions then move up, and the grenadier and light company in same manner. This dressing may soon be made if done at the ordinary pace, without hurry, and that the chiefs of divisions aligne in the prolongation of the base. ■■•»' *, . -s'lnl ainl ia-A it .t S. i6s, '^M f *nmtmt»mh, i --> ^ -tfi^ir* Of the BATTALION. 2*9 S» 168. When the Battalmi is to Retire. THE BAT TALIOiSr Will BR It is evident that it ought to be previously dressed with the same correctness, as when it was to advance, and the same care in ascertaining the direction of its march must be taken. — Therefore before the retreat is to begin, an officer w!i' have placed himself 30 paces in the rear, so ns to cijad perpendicular to the front directu g ieneant, i^nd c-f course he will be in the line, or neai'y so> of thr, directing Serjeants. f At he word, the battalion will I RBTMRB; tm. dii jcting Serjeants face j abour. The r/amt center sisrjeant that i directs to ti.e front t'n:;cts also to the J rear; he rr.ovfs qi\ ti lh« ihie of the ad- v^occd ciBoer, <} p-dixs bet'ond the rear rank H;vJi halts ; and thi; 0'.':\es scrjeants ^are on each aide of him, f Ar the word hiort abovt fACE, the ) whole fare; snd the srpfr^vumerary of- 1 fi»'rr who replaces the, directing serjeant, I ift'/jvei up irt,> the irrdsrjg rankj a mouaterl ^eJd oificer ttasses through to the rear, tud t'se d'r.vjting serjeant in the interim ptcAotii*^ hi? line, and takes his objects betwixt the feet of the posted officer. ( Im'Tjediately after facing about, the 1 word MARCH is given, and the whole I proceed in the same manner, and with J the same attentions as in moving to the *> front : the directing serjeant conducting on his points, under the correction of the field officer who is lo paces behind the ^battalion. RIGHT ABOl'T FACB. MAXr.i. vl Uurtii Q 3 Wh;a .• ^ 'I X m*^ I' 1 !!■ ti ',1 X 1 I) Attentions in retiring. Wing pla- toons. Fig. 83. A. B. HALT. FRONT. < 830 ^ P A R T III. When the battalion ii to front j it re- ceives the word halt, front, and im- mediately halts and fronts, the Serjeants, &c. resuming their proper stations: it is then dressed if necessary in the manner .already prescribed. 1 . In marching to the rear, the battalion must co- ver its proper extent of ground. — The rear rank men must avoid closing their files more than usual, other> wise the front men who are in general larger, will be crowded in their rank. — Music, drums, supernume- rary officers, 8rc. will take care to march with exacts ness not to interrupt, but rather to assist the batta- lion.— The battalion is not to face about, till every thing is prepared for its instant march, and its HALT, FRONT, IS ouc Command: when retiring there- fore it never unnecessarily stands faced to the rear. 2. When the wing companies of a battalion are wheeled backward and faced outward in order to co- ver its flank— Such companies if during the retreat they march in file, will take particular care to move in the same direction as the battalion, and not im- pede its progress. When the battalion fronts, those companies will face outward, and always recollecting that their immediate business is to cover the fianks, they will regqlate their position and movements by those of (he battalion. — When marching they move in file perpendicular to the line of the battalion: when fronted they make an angle with it of about 45<*, according to the apparent circumstances that threaten. 1 I S, 169. Changes of' the Battalion when in Movement. The battalion when marching in front, must be piuch accustomed to step out^ to step shorty to oblique ii^l -rr '■ f ■ to Of the BATTALION. f3l (o right or left, and to change direction by a sroall and gradual turn of the shoulder : all these must be executed with the utmost precision, in perfect ca- dence, and upon decided words of command, as they are operations wanted and essential to the perfect luovenients of a considerable line. ' ;.' : KIGHT OBLIQUE rORWARD. j < LEFT SHOULDER FORWARD. RIOHT SHOULDER FORWARD. u. 1. Obliquing a battalion in a paral- lel direction to gain a flank or to pre- serve a given appui, is a difficult, but necessary operation. — Obliquing a bat- talion when in line with others fur a few paces in order to correct an inter- val, must be done without eyes being , turned from the center. 2. Changeof direction on the march begins with the leading serjeant, and is conformed to by the center and by the battalion when they arrive at the point where the serjeant began it; it must be made almost insensibly, and gradually in proportion to the extent of the body that is thus to change direction, for without incurring disorder, the out- ward flank cuo only get into line by lengthening its step, which requires l^time. •^"* ' 3. Obliquing the battalion by the wheeling up of sections or sub-divi- sions is performed as in S. l64. and is used where a considerubU; space is to be gone over. 4. Change of front and position, by sub-divisions or sections, is pertormed as in S. \C)b. 5. If the bnttnlion halted or in move- ment is rt-quirtd to miike a whctl on a flank, with an uniturm front, such whcrl can seldom br wanted tu exceed the 8th Q 4 ur 4*' ^M H BIGHT WHEEL. FORWARD. MALT. - K 238 PART III. or 6th of the circle. On the word to the right wheel, the right marks the time, the center takes a half step, and ^ the left a full step, the intermediate parts of the battalion conforming ac- cordingly ; and at the word forward, or halt, the whole are directed by the cenft^r; this movement requires every aid that can be given by the mounted and supernumerary officers. 6. If the battalion in movement is re- quired to make a small change of front on the center. — The center will mark the time, a very small turn of the shoulders will be gradually made, the wings will conform, one advancing, the other giv- ■i.r ing back, till at the word forward the r whole move on as before. 7. A battalion halted may change its position for- ward to a certain degree, or throw back a flank, in a manner that gives great protection during the move- mait if made near an enemy. — At the word mauch, the right company, or left, w/nels into the new direc- tion, and the rest of the line at the same time moves on in front, and by command obliques to join the left on the first company. When the right flank of the se- cond company has arrived there, it also uheeh up into the new direction, and the rest of the line continues to oblique to join its left flank. In this manner the ]ine preserves its uniform front, obliques, and gra- dually enters the new position as its leading company arrives in it, at the same time that it covers and pro- tects the flanks of the formed companies.— By the same means also will a battalion throw back any Fig. 89. number of its divisions in presence of an enemy:— I'he angular company will give the direction, the rest PACK ABOUT, MARCH, oFLiouE, successively ivhnt into it, and f'rotit. —The outward company of all which may he formed as a flank to the battalion, wiU Wheeling «|) or tlirovving back the wliolc or purl of the biittulioti. Fis- 87. Of the BATTALION. «33 wiii march in hie, and cover the flank. Before this niovfinent commences, officers must shift to the in- ward flank of their companies, in order to dress them on the given distant point after the wlieel, in the same manner as in the Echellon movement, of the nature of which this partakes. ' '^ ' PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES WHEN THE BAT- TALION IS MARCHING IN LINE. WHEN the battalion is marching either to front or rear, the partial obstacles that present themselves will be passed, by the formation, march, and deployment of the close column. — Such parts as are not inter- rupted, still move on in front; such parts as are in- terrupted, double by divisions as ordered, behind an adjoining flank or flanks, and in this manner follo>r in close column in their natural order. As the ground opens they successively deploy, and again perfect the line. — The columns are always behind the line, and march closed up. — The formed part of the battalion, whether advancing or retiring, continues to move on at the ordinary pace, and in proportion as the obsta- cles increase or diminish, will the formed or columti parts of the line increase or diminish. In general the columns formed will be of sub-divi* sions} the flrst sub-division that is obliged to double will be directed to which hand by the commander of the battalion, the others, as they successively double, will in cunsequence place themselves behind it, and behind each other, and the hand iirst doubled to, will be that which presents the opening most favourable to the subsequent inarch and formation, and which the commanding oflicer will always hold in view, and order accordingly. The interrupted body will double to one or both flanks according to circumstances, and •\ r tilt Passage of the obstacl* in clo»e column, either in advancing or retiring* Fig. 8J. General attentions. \\i i '»\\* f i n _ii fd4 PART III. Ti the order it receives. Obstacles that impede a flank >vill occasion a single column to be formed from the flank towards the center. Obstacles that impede the center or a central part of a wing, will, if considera- ble, occasion two columns to be formed, from the cen- ter towards the flanks. The columns will follow a flank of such part of the line as is not impeded -, and either in doubling into column, or extending into line, the rear divisions will conform to the move- ments of their then leading one. No part less than the front of the column doubles or moves up, and when half or more of a battalion must be thrown into one column, it will be ordered by companies. .P. uVi' ■n ili 'ri S. 170. lllten the Obstacle presenta a con- siderable Front pural lei to the Line. Fig.84.C.D. CAUnON. HALT^FACB. to Halt, Front. Q. March. Ordinary. The divisions impeded must all at once double behind such one or two other divisions as clear them of the ob- stacle, — In this case a timely caution is given by the commanding officer to the part of the line that is to puss the ob- stacle; the necessary portion of the line, when within a few paces of where it is impeded, is ordered to halt, face, either to one or both flanks, and the -( heads of the sub -divisions (except the leading one) disengage to the rear. The whole M Alien quick, and each, as it ar- rives square and close behind the pre- ceding one halta, fronts, and marc/us forward, taking up the ordinary step when closed up. The leaders of the sub-divisions of the column remain on the flank next the opening which they I are to fill up. S. 171. ,:r 0/ Me BATTALION. 235 S. 171. IF/ten a Po'mt of the Obstacle is presented to the Line, and that it con- tinues to increase. Fig. 84. G, f The doubling is then successive, be- ginning with that division which is first interrupted, and continuing, as it be- comes necessary, till the column canad- CAUTioN. vance in clear ground. In this case the HALT. sub-division impeded will be ordered by FACE. the commanding officer toHALT, face, o. MARCH. MARCH — Halt, Front, March, by its Halt, Front, own leader, and follow the one adjoln- Q. March, ing to it, which makes the flank of Ordinary. that formed part of the line. When •^ this last sub-division also becomes im- peded, these two perform the above operation, and place themselves in co- lumn behind the next sub-division. — The three, the four, &c. successively repeat it as the narrowing of the ground requires (and upon the words given by the commanding officer or by the officer of the then head division, should the commanding officer be otherwise employed), until the obstacle ceases to interrupt the march of a formed part of the line. ■I ! \ nfTT'^' S. 178. f36 PART III, v> -ij'i .S'. 172. JV/ien the Obstacle is passed^ or dimiuishcSy and that the Line inaxases. ii^; :: ll ■■ 'T HALT. FACE. a. MARCPI. If it is of such a nature as to permit of the complete extension at once into liue : the whole column performs it Halt, Front. '\ by the commands and deployments of Q. March. \ the close column on the front division Ordinary. (_ which then makes part of the line. ^ Fig. 84. T. HALT. FACE. a. MARCH. lialtf Front t Q. March. Ordinary. But when the obstacle diminishes by degrees only; then the divisions of the column must come up into line succes- sively as the ground opens, and the re- mainder of the column roust in dimi- nishing, shift towards the obstacle, in the same manner as it before shifted from it in increasing. When the second sub- division of the column can therefore come up ; its leader, or the command- ing or mounted officer gives the word for his own and the following sub-divi- sions, HALT, FACE, MARCH, and whCH -^ opposite to his ground halt, frokt, MARCH, and when he is up in line or- dinary. —It depends on the opening of the ground, whether more than one division of the column can come into line at the same flank movement.-^ This operation is repeated by ihe mounted officer, or the leader of what is then the second sub-division, as often as such sub-division sees that it is pro- per to move up into line, and is con- formed to by the rear of the column, till all its divisions have successively arrived in the line. The Of the BATTALION. S37 The commanding officer himself, or a mounted offi- cer, must as much as possible order the doubling of the divisions, and their moving up into line; and par- ticularly when any (Considerable part of the battalion is obliged to double into one column.— But if there are several doublings in the battalion at the same time, he can only direct the most considerable one, and the others must be ordered by their several head officers. These mt^vements are all made on parallel and per- pendi(!t!nai:,' iMt oblique lines, and the progress which thetWmed p^Vt|of the battalion is constantly making, shews^ih^ nl^ time must be lost either in giying or executiitg 'il>e words of command, and that the divi- sions of the column must be well closed up, and its movements quick, firm, but in perfect order. — The divisions of the column form successively into line, as the obstacle permits them, or again double so as to conform to the shape of the ground, which must al- ways be filled up. —The march of the uninterrupted part of the line must be steady and exact, and the openings made must be carefully preserved from the center while it continues to direct, or from whatever point does so while the center is impeded; the co- lumns depenfl on the formed parts of the battalion to which they are attached, and are independent of each other. — When the center is interrupted, a named company officer of the line will be ordered to advance six paces to regulate the whole, till the directing Ser- jeant of the center can again resume his true and ori- ginal line, which he by advancing singly from the co- lumn will endeavour to do as soon as possible. Whether the battalion is advancing or retiring, the same operations take place, and the columns in both cases are behind th'fe formed part of the line; in re- tiring, the rear rank leads. ^ General attentiuiiK. ?y J nijj!^: .}, . !.■ S. 173. •««*•»*«,■ ■ ■• II "T* p/m^ ml ii '. I fu $3S ./. PART llli ^0 S. 173. fy hen ike Battalion fir es^ during the Passage of an Obstacle, > HALT. j'j<.:^'ii Fig. 84. I.K.L.M. HALT, FUONT >o S. . -i/K:.,:4: r}f one . .,r|'_,. RIGHT ABOUTFACE MARCH. r If the battalion in advancing should ibe obliged to flrej it halts in the < situation it is then in, executes such i firings as are ordered^ and again ad- \.vances. f If the battalion in retirjnif Ui pressed j by the enemy,' the p^jL >^g]f^e will HALT, iRONT. the parf ]i^^,9>lumn I will move on till the l^a^Mi^^ipn ar- I rives in line, and willji^npp halt,, -l FRONT, The firing that is ordered, will be executed} and when it is again proper to retir^, the whole will fa op about, the part in X\x\f willMARCH^ and the cblumns will also be put in marc^i when the line arrives at their head. .^ ■■■■> S. 174. When a Battalion is ad^emming^ it may also under certain Circumstances pass such Obstacles as present themselves > hi/ File. In such case the interrupted division or divisions will be ordered to face eit^ier to one or both flanks, and closely to follow in file such parts of the battalion as are not broken : the filing will increase as the obstacle increases, but as it diminishes, file after file will suc- cessively and quickly move up to their proper place till the whole are again formed ; and during this opera^ tion, the leading file will always remain attached to the fiank of the part in line. — The same rules that direct the doubling in column direct the doubling by files; when Of the BATTALION. 239 when a snb-division files it will be from the flank only; when a company files it may be from both flanks J and if a larger front than two companies is interrupted, it then doubles into column. — Where the obstacles are of small extent, but frequently oc- curring this mode is the readiest that can be applied in advancing: but in retiring it cannot be used, if the enemy are at hand to press upon the battalion ; and therefore the passiag by column is to be looked upon fs the general method. 1 ' ' In plate 10. fig. 84. — The position A. is a battalion and part of two others formed in line, they advance meeting with obstacles. — B. three subdivisions of the left of the battalion have doubled. — C. one sub-divi* sion of the right has also doubled. — D. a central ob- stacle now occurring three sub-divisions of the right and one of the center, also two of the left, and three of the center have doubled. £. one 6f the right has moved into line, and one more of its center has doubled, also one of its left has moved into line.— F. the whole divisions have moved into line, except three snb-divisions of the left which are in column.^'G. the three sub-divisions of the left remain in column, and two on the right and three at the center have again doubled. — H. the whole having arrived on open ground have moved up into line, except one sub-divi- sion on the right. If the battalion A. instead of advancing in front, is supposed to have faced to the right about, and to be retreating; the positions of the divisions in column will be the same as above, they performing their move- ments, with their rear ranks in front. The positions I, K, L, M, shew the passage of ob* stacles, by the impeded parts filing round them. — At N, the line is again completed. — O, P, shew the pas- sage of a wood, by the filing of companies. — At Q. all obstacles are passed; and the situation of part of the adjoining battalions al30 appears during this march. tr). ; . . S. 175. pwi** \(^ ' jj .«n I' rllfl ' r. 240 H PART nr. S. 175. JVhGH the Battalion moving in Line passes a JVood^ or othci' Imptdi- ment^ to Front or Rear, by the filing of Cofnpanics. PASSTOTHE FRONT. Right, turn. 'I5^( 1 . Tffo pass a xcood, or other embar- rassed ground to the front ; when it is found necessary to break the battalion, the commander will order it to pass from the right of companies to the frontj^on which each company officer orders his com[i!\r\y Uight,turn, wheels out his leading iile,and passes on as fast as the difficulty of the ground wil> al- low him, endeavouring to preserve a relative distance from the left as being the head of the column, or from the Fig.84.0.P. j other flank if particularly so ordered. Fig. 85. A. j Each officer on arriving at the farther edge of the wood will halt his compa- ny, and remain till the others are come up, and till the whole are ordered to march out and form in battalion ; which will generally be done by standing in open column the left in front, dressing pivot flanks, and wheeling up into line. — Or, if the companies form separately on the edge of the wood, they will ^ march out and join in the battalion. 2. If to pass to the rear— When the battalion retiring in line, arrives at the point where it must break, it is ordered PASS COM- to PASS COMPANIES BY FILES. — Thc PAN1E8 BY leader of each gives his word left turn, FILES. and proceedsas above directed; the heads Left turnf -^ offiles are regulated from the left j and af- Q, March, j ter quitting the wood, at an ordered dis- -; s tance 0//Ae BATTALION. f4l HALT, FRONT. rig.gy. PASS COM- PANIES BY PILES. Right face, Q. March. PBONT. ,f5, PAS'S COM- PANIES BY FILES. Left, Turn, Q. March. &c. (tance they halt, froitp into column the right in front, and wheel to the left up into line.— The line then again Lrctreats if necessary. 3 . If a battalion in first line passes ' through a second lokich advances and re- lieves «7—the second marches up to within 12 paces of the first and halts. — The battalion of the first then receives the word pass companies by files. Each leader gives his word Right face, Q. March, and proceeds at a quick pace to the rear through the second line, ^ ^hich, whenever the head of a division presents itself, throws back as many files as are necessary to give it passage, and again immediately moves up ) the retiring files, who are regulated by their left, at any ordered distance HALT, FRONT iuto column the right in front, and wheel front into col- lumn the right in front, and ^heei ^up to the left into line. 4. When the second line does not ad- vance to relieve the first— tht battalion of the first line retires, and when it comes within 12 pa^es of the second, it t{ then receives the word to pass com- panies BY files ; each leader orders to the left turn, and proceeds as before directed ; the column when halted and ^fronted, having its right in front. Circumstances may require, that the companies should PAS6 from their proper left instead of the right, in which case the leaders will shift and conduct such left, until the line is formed, when they will again resume their proper places. E 5. ir « « ii i •-^- T''— ~-^ ' m^mtn' ' ip f Iji I ■ l''^^^ ■ i ■ ^ ' ' ll , 'it r li \* 'm 242 PART III. 5. If a battalion in second line passes hyjiles to the front through a first line, it will advance within 12 paces of the first one. On the command to pass to the front by files ; each company leader will give his word right turn, and move on at the head of his file in ordinary time, through the first line, which makes openings for it. When the rear of the files has passed the battalion will be ordered halt front in column the left in front— wheel into line — and may then advance. There may be occasions where, instead of halting In column, and wheeling into line, the battalion may be ordered to form by the rear files moving np to , their front leaders ; but the line thereby obtained will generally be a very inaccurate one, and not fit to advance without a bait, and a previous dressing. 6. If a battalion in second line advances and passes in front t through a first line which it is to relieve. — The first line will at the necessary instant, wheel back by companies into open column, the advancing battalion will pass through it, such files as are interrupted fol> lowing to the right, moving up as soon as they can, and the battalion thus reformed moving on to its ob- ject—— or, if a battalion advancing in front, meets with a line retiring, this last will throw itself into open column, and halt, till the advancing battalion has passed, — ^or, if a line is retiring in files, it will ta> same manner, halt square when it meets the advanc- ing line, allow it to pass, and then proceed. **.. ' S. 176. ,^»->* '■-^^^smmmm. Of the BATTAUON. S43 S. 176. IFhen the Battalion retires by al- ternate Companies in two Lines, BTORT COMPANIES^ HALT, FRONT. LEFT COMPANIES^ HALT, FRONT. RIGHT COM- r PANIB8, ^ ABOUT FACE, MARCH. LhALT^ FRONT. LEFT COM- PANIES. r ABOUT FACE^ < MARCH. i HALT, FRONT. R8 f The right compa- nies stand fast, or, halt front if the battalion is "already in motion.— The left retire in line a given number of paces and halt, front : on which the right companiesretire in the same manner beyond theleft,andhalt,front: —In this way they proceed till the batta- lion isordered toform. One colour remains on the flank of its pro- fter company in each ine, and directs its movement, for which ^ purposed Serjeant will advance 6 pacesbefore it during the march. Distances are preserv- ed from that colour. The eyes of each line remain turned to their colour, and officers are on their inward flanks of their com- panies. — Each line has a command. The light infantry may be divided in theintervals of the first line, retire (^witbit,and change to the 4 if i , '• i !*■ S44 PART III. \- the other line whene- ver it becomes the ad- vanced one: in tiiis si- tuation they cover the retreat, and may fire. , • ' ■ LEFT MALT. ARCIi. RIGHT ATING Thalt. Vrbaoy. PRESBNT. ^ FRESBN ' JFIRB. (.MARCH. 6'. 177. fVhen the Battalion advances or retires by half Battalions^, ami fires. 1 . If the battalion is in nriiirch and advancing. — The left wing halts when ordered, i^nd the right one continues to move on 15 paces, at which instant the word MARCH being given to the left wing, the right <{ at the same time is ordered to halt, to fire and load, and the left marches past them, till the right wing be- ing loaded and shouldered, I receives the word march, the other wing halts, I fires, &c. and thus they ^alternately proceed, 'J. If thebattalion is in march, and retiring •—The right wlr^ is ordered to halt, FRONT, and when tho left one has gained 1 5 pace8,.and receives the word halt, FRONT, the right wing is instantly ordered to I IRB,t0 LOAD,tO FACE about, LBfT WING — halt. READY, ^!. &C. t:' ^'^ , ,1 '. right WING, HALT, FRONT. LEFT WING, HALT, FRONT. READY. BIGHT WING PRESBNT. FIRB. ABOUT FACB.-^ MARCH. ■I . -f Of the BATTALION. 245 LEFT WING, HALT, FRONT. r READY, .^ j PRESENT, LEFT WING, ^^^^^ C &C. f about, and diarch 15 paces beyond the left, where it receives the word HALT, FRONT, on which the left wing gets that of fire, and in the same manner alternately proceeds, every due dispatch be- ing made in re-load- ing. There must be a commander for each half battalion. One colour remains on the inward flank of each half battalion, to which the men continue to look, by which they move, and before which a directing serjeant ad- vances 6 paces. The make ready, present, fire, of the advanced wing, is instantly to succeed the march of the other advanced wing, or the halt front, of the retiring wing. In the half battalion firing, advancing, and retreat- ing. — If formed two deep, both ranks will fire stand- ing.-— If formed three deep, the front and center rank fire standing, and the rear rank remains shouldered in reserve. S. 178. CAUTION. FORM saUARE. COMPANIES INWARDS FACE. IFhen the Battalion forms a Square, or Ohlong. ' A 1. The 4th, 6th, Cth battalion com- panies stand fast (in ccnsequenceof the explanatory cautionth.it is given prepa- ratory to forming ihe square), the rest uf the battalion faces inwards, and dis- engages the heads of-companies to the rear j the colours and their coverers fall back, the 4ih company closing to the R 3 left 940 PART III. Q. MA&CH. \p m^ Halt, Front. Fig. 92. r^' f , y «'' , ■ •'■•"* '.I tAUTlON. • FORM ' SaUARE. COMPANIES BACKWARD WHEEL. a. MARCH. Halt, Dress. RIGHT ABOUTFACK * MARCH. Halt, Front f Dress, Fig. 90. n. left to fill up their place. They inarch quick.— The 7th, 8th, and light com- panies place themselves in open co< lumn behind the 6th j the 3d, 2d, and 1st place themselves in open column behind the 4th; the grenadiers place themselves between the light compa- ^ ny and the 1st. When these three last companies close up to the 8th and 2d, and face about (having each first countermarched, if it is thought ne- cessary to have the front rank outer- most) at the same time that the 7th, 8th, and the 3d, 2d, wheel outwards, the oblong stands complete, or, the square may be a perfect one, if it is composed of the eight battalion com- panies only ; the grenadier and light I company being in reserve in the rear, I ready to be applied according to cir- Lcumstances. f 2. T/ic square or oblong may be formed by the 4th, bth, (ifh companies standing fast. — The rest of the batta- lion wheels backward, each company the Rth of the circle^ on its inward flank. They face about. They march to complete the square a^ above ; each wheeling when if comes to its ground, and then fronting : and •{ in this manner will the proper front rank of the rear face be outward.—— The commanding officer, colours, and their coverers, drums, &c. itc. are within the square, as also the batta- lion guns, which are shifted to where- ever they are most necessary. — The square is composed of the front, tiie right, the left, the rear faces: the front face is that on which the square originally forms. 3. ir/iui 0/M tM rt «> il ,'. \ its sub-divisions perform the same ope* ration of wheeling up, each the eighth of the circle} but its direction of march will not be in the diagonnl of the ob- long, but in that of a square, viz. of the line which equally bisects the right tangle, r i£j. f). C. T/ie angular march of the square or oblong — may be made in any other direction to the right or left of the above one; but in such case the sub-divisions of two opposite sides will have to wheel up more than the eighth of the circle, and those of the other two sides proportionally less, in order to stand as before perpen- dicular to the new direction, the sum of these two wheels will always amount to that of a quarter circle, and their difference will vary as the new line departs more or less from the equal bisecting line ; this will be known by first wheeling up the two angular divi- sions, till they stand peipendicular with the new direc-* tion, and then ordering all the others to conform ac- cordingly.— This movement is very difficult in the execution, and cannot be made with any degree of accuracy unless the perpendicular situations of the di- visions is correctly attained and carefully preserved. , , , , 5. The square halted changes direction on any one of its files— by that file wheel- ^ ing upon one of its Hank divisions, whicl^ is previously placed : its two flank sides , V at the same time make a similar gradual change to comply with the alteration; and the rear side marches in file to com- j plete the square. , . 6. IVhcn the square in march halt.'i, (uvd , fronts, to repulse an expected attack u/cU' valry-'ihe front rank kneels, and present their bayonets sloped ; the two rear ranks fire standing; either companies by ranks successively, or companies (independent of eachothtr) by sub-divisions, one firing when the other has loaded ; or companies by files, as ordered; the front rank re- maining ''h >;«*(r-B. Of the BATTALION. C49 ft ;!.-jJj maining as a reserve.— Should the batta- lion be formed only two deep, the front rank will remain kneeled^ and the rear rank will fire by files. 7, The front and rear faces of the square or oblong in march are increased — by re- peatedly adding to theirflanks 4 divisions from the column sides which are thereby shortened, and oblique outwards to co- ver : they are decreased by the 4 outward divisions of the front and rear repeatedly becoming part of the flank sides, which are thereby lengthened, and oblique in- wards to cover. — Thus, eitiier advancing or retiring, the whole may diminish to two sub-divisions in front, or, if neces- sary, to a double file nr^arched off from the center of the leading face. 8. IFhen the sguare or oblong forms in line on one of its sides — or on any named company which is placed in a given di- rection. — Each other company will be WHEELED up morc or less, till it stands with its inward flank perpendicular to its point in the new line, to which the whole will MAKCH and enter successively, the Fig, 94. "^ outward companies taking care not to impede the inner ones, which must form before them. — According to the part of the battalion formed on, will this opera- tion be more or less complex. — Or, this may be done by the facing'and filing of each division from its inward flank to its point in the new line where it will form I up. p. If from open column of march, it is nrcasarv to wake frcnt in oblong 3 deep to tfoth Jiunks — the leading division Halts, .1 th« ^'\if *^i, m 4 ^.'^ e50 PART in. , 1 t i t : » i-ji" : • .t / < ■ I ! ,t : ; ■»' Fig. 95. •»- ,t ■ *••■•/ I -.. * . r.f ; '*« 4 l*ff tn i< the other divisions of the column will take half distances and Halt : the half divisions will WHEEL outwards, Halty and form an oblong, closed in the rear by the last division. When column of march is to be resumed, the half divisions will wheel backwards into column, and the battalion will proceed. If there are several batta- lions in the column, each will form as above, closed by its own front and rear divisions ; and the distances betwixt bat- talions will also be closed. 10. If a battalion is marching in open ground f where it is necessary to be prepared against the attack of cavalry — It may move in column of companies at quarter distance, one named company in the cen- ter being ordered to keep an additional distance of 2 files ; in this shape the bat- lion is easily managed, or directed upon any point — When the column halts, and is ordered to form the sauare, the first company falls back to the second ; the last conipany closes up to the one be- fore it : The whole companies make an interval of 2 paces in their center, by their sub-divisions taking each one pace to the flank ; 2 ofBcers with their serjeants pface themselves in each of the front and rear intervals : 2 officers with their Ser- jeants also take post in rear of each flank of the company from which the additional interval has been kept ; and a serjeacc takes the place of each flank front rank man of the first division, and of each flank rear rank man of the last division } all -^ other officers, serjeants, the 4 displaced men, &c. &c. assemble in the center of the companies which are to form the flank facfs. I' I yH Of the BATTALION. S51 Fig. 95. faces. Those last named companies hav- ing been told oiFeach in four sections, WHEEL up by sections, a to the right, and 2 to the left : (the 2 rear companies at the same time closing up, and facing outwards) the inner sections then close forward to their front ones, which dress up with the extremities of the front and rear companies, and 4 files on each flank of the second companies, from the front and from the rear face outwards. — The whole lhu3 stand faced outwards, and formed 6 deep, with 2 officers and their Serjeants in the middle of each face to command it : all the other officers as well as Serjeants, &c. are in the void space in llie center, and the files of the officers ia the faces may be completed by Serjeants, &c. in the interior, in such manner as ihe commandant may direct. — The mounted field officer must pass into the center of the column by the rear face, if necessary, opening from its center 2 paces, and again ^closing in. When ordered, the 2 first ranks all round the column will kneel, and slope their bayonets, the 2 next ranks will fire standing, and all the others will remain in reserve ; the tile coverers behind each officer of the sides will give back, ani enable him to stand in the third rank.-— JVhai the march is to he resiinird, the sec- tions that closed up fall back to their dis- tance; the sections then whkkl back into column ; the oilicers, srrjeants, Ike. take their places on the flmks; and when the column is again put in motion, the companies that closed successively lake their proper diblance. Unlesi i / 5i ti I i f^i )Sv J?'' 262 PART HI. Unless the companies are above 16 file . ; they cannot be divided into 4 sections 3 if therefore they are under 16 file, and told off in 3 sections, the column will 1 march at the distance of a section ; and in ' ^-' forming the square, the two outward sec- tions will wheel up, but the 3d one will stand fast, and afterwards, by dividing itself to right and left, will form a 4th ,j rank to the others; in resuming column the outward sections wheel back, and the .J,. rear of the center sections easily recover • .^ their places; as to all other circumstances they remain the same. . BY the foregoing Regulations, and the Rules they lay down, is every battalion to direct its practice; to regulate the parades, guards, and field exercise j to disuse whatever is contrary and repugnant to them; and in no instance to deviate from the principles they contain; for, to their strict observance is everyone enjoined. — Among many other essential circumstances they pointedly require hurry and disunion to be avoid- ed ; order and mutual efibrt to be held sacred ; ranks and files closed ; music to be disused in instruction, march, or manoeuvre ; uniformity of position ; equa- lity of step in length and cadence; accuracy of dis- tances; precision of file marching; movements and formations made on determined points and lines, and mounted officers ready and accustomed to give such points and lines ; alertness and intelligence in officers ; energy and decision in their commands ; nodes of executipn fully determined, and never vary- ing. — Thus, previous explanation being no longer necessary, prompt performance in all situations may immediately follow the ordered measures of the qom- miinder. » • ^ - ;';t W' ; ii'V, <. D. D ■ tf- tf 1 . (■ End of Part T HIRD. t 853 ] ./ 5 U: i INSPECTION OR KEVIEW OF A BATTALION of INFANTRY. HTHE Battalion inarches to its ground in open co- lumn of companies and half companies : marches into the alignement by companies : forms in close order;— takes open order as directed in the formaitioo of the battalion. In this disposition, and the whole dressed to tho right, the General is awaited.— He is to be received with the compliments due to his rank, as set forth in the regulation of military honours.-— The colonel and lieutenant-colonel on this occasion are on foot at the head of the colours ; and at all other times they are to remain on horseback. A camp colour is to be originally placed 80 or 100 paces in front of the center of the battalion, where the general is supposed to take his station ; but al> though he may choose to quit that position, still (he colour is to be considered as the point to work upon, and to which all movements and formations are re- lative. licce ri( ,' ivias S54 INSPECTION OR REVIEW. ; I y PRESENT ARMS. SHOULDER ARMS. lUI Receiving the General. When the reviewing general presents himself before the center, and is 50 or 60 paces distant, he will be received with a general salute. The men pre- sent arms, and the officers salute, so as -{ to drop their swords with the last mo- tion of presented arms; the music will play, and all the drums will beat. The colours only salute such persons as from I their rank, and by regulation, are en- Ltitled to that honour. C The men shoulder, and the officers < recover their swords with the last mo- (, tion. The general then goes towards the right, the whole remaining perfectly steady without paying any farther compliment while he passes along the front of the bat- talion, and without facing when he goes along the flank and rear. When the general is going round the battalion, the music will play, and the drums beat ', they will cease as soon as the general has returned to the right flank of the battalion. C While the general is proceeding to REAR ranks! 1 I- ir • *i r Tx *U' ,1 place himself m the front, this com- AKE CLOSE I j^gj^ J ^,jjj jjg given, and the colonel and or er. i lieutenant-colonel will then mount on MAR(.H. ^^ horseback, in the rear of the center. !•' .i\0it'^''^u' . ■\ ■■«-; •■ ..I : a'i t ;*• J' J.' \J Marching '(^■■■"afc*- INSPECTION OR REVIEW. 355 Marching Past in Ordinary Time. COMPANIES ON YOUR LEFT, BACKWARD^ WHEEL. MARCH. Halt, Dress, MARCH. f The battalion will break into column of companies the right in front. The column is put in motion, pioneers and music having been previously ordered . to the head of it. Points will be ascer- •^ tained by the adjutant for the exact and several wheelings of the divisions,sothat their right flanks in marching past shall be only 4 paces distant from the camp colour, where it is supposed the generd places himself to receive the salute. Ualtf Lefty Wheel, f Tlie several companies wheel Halt, Dress. < successively at the first angle of March. (, the ground. Halt, Left, f The companiessnccessively make thi» Wheel. I wheel at the second angle of the ground* I and which brings them on the line on which they pass the general. Each leader of a company, when it has ad- vanced Spaces from the wheeling point, changes quickly by the rear to the right flank of his company, and as soon as he has placed himself oathat flank, be wilt Eyes, Right. Lorder eyes to be tuii^ed to the right. " The leading company, and each other successively, as it arrives within 50 paces of the general, opens its ranks, at which time the officers move into Halt, Dress March. J Rear Ranks take Open Order. the front of his company, and the lead* ing one is replaced on the right flank ^by his Serjeant. ;^ , . ,■;... In marching past the reviewing general, the colonel is to be at the head of the grenadier company, with the major . -,./|^ IT IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) ^ "■*V^ ^^^ ^ .^^ 1.0 1.1 11.25 m lis g UJ |22 £ us IIP 114 "^1^ V*- HiotQgraphic _Sciaices CorpoFation <# 4^* <^ "\ 33 WIST MAM STMIT WIUTII.N.Y. I4SM (n*)in-4S0) v\ *|r^**** m 256 INSPECTION OR REVIEW. major a little behind him on his left. — ^The music are in two ranks 6 paces before the colonel : The pioneers are in two ranks 6 paces before the mu8ic> having a corporal at their head to lead them : — The drummers and fifers are on the left flank of their respective com- panics. ' The lieutenant-colonel is to be in the rear ; but in the absence of the colonel the lieutenant-colonel will of course supply his place. -*The adjutant is in the rear, behind, and on the left of the lieutenant-colonel. The colours are 3 paces behind the fourth battalion company, covered by their Serjeants. Staff officers do not march past. In marching past at open ranks, the serjeant who is on the right flank of the company is responsible for the proper wheeling distance being kept from the front rank of the company preceding him.— The leading officer must invariably preserve his distance of 3 paces before the right of the company, and not derange its march, the rank of officers dress to him, eyes are turned t little to the right, and they divide the ground in order to cover the front of the company : If there is only one officer with the cotnpany, he is towards the right of it. — Supernumerary Serjeants are 3 paces in the rear of their several divisions. The music begin to play, just after the leading com- pany has made the second wheel } they continue to march on, and do not draw up opposite the general.— lliev, as well as the pioneers, regulate their march by the head of the column. The officers, when they arrive at their proper dis' tance from the general, must prepare to salute suc- cessively by compnnies when within six paces of him, and recover their swords when 10 pacts past him, without in the least altering the rate of march, or im- pedinff the front rank of cnmpnies. — The command- ing oAoer, when he has saluted at the head of the bat- talion. INSPECTION OR REVIKW. 2i7 talion, places himself near the general, and remains there till the rear has marched past. Ilie drummers give a roll each, when the officers of his own company salute. r The officers commanding companies I will each successively, when he has Rear Ranh \ passed the eeneral by SO paces, close take dose -^ his rear ranks, and at this time each Order. I individual of the company resumes the I post which he held when the column Lwas first put in motion. Haltf Left T The several companies wheel succes- H^heelt \ sively when opposite the ground where Halt, Dress, < the left of the regiment stood, their March, i leading officers having shifted to their V,left flank when the ranks closed. When the leading company is near to where the left of the battalion stood* HALT. ^ the whole halt, music ceases, arms may SUPPORT J be supported, and the quick march may ARMS, (.instantly commence. # Marching past in Quick Time. auicK MARCH. {- The whole march off in quick time. No music. Halt, Left f The column makes three several IVhiel. I wheels, viz. at the point where the left Halt, Dress. \ of the battalion first stood : at the point •^ where the first wheel was made: and Quick at the point where the second wheel March. was made, which places it on the line ^ of passing the general. S B«for« ■ii ■i' 'it ^ V-' 1( i.;i 4 rfyMtmt"'' I If' i " 1 # # if 1!^ ^i>% UVSPEGIION OR REVIEW. ffifKif.'.i ' ( Before the leading company has made CARRY ) the last wheel, arms are carried. ARMS. \ \Vhen it has completed that wheel the " (^ music begin to play. In mnrchiiirr past the general in quick time, and at close order, officers do not salute or pay any eompli* ment, but are attentive to preserve the proper intervals betwixt their companies. — The leading officer of each company shifts to its right by its rear in the same manner as in ordinary march, 6 paces after the last wheel, which brings him on the line with the gene- ral, and when he has passed the general 30 paces he will resume his proper pivot flank. — The supernume- rary officers and scrjeants march in a rank, in rear of the companies, at one pace from the rear rank, and officers swords are carried against the right shoulder, and steady. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, major and adjutant, I. are in the same places as in marching past in or- dinary lime; as also drummers, pioneers, and music j which last will commence playing just after they have wheeled into the line of passing, and will continue to march on at the head of the column. f The several companies 30 paces after r / ft J P^^'sing will successively dress to the '.Vf J ' "< jj.jj qj- jjjg proper pivot flank, and the 'officers will shift to that flank. Halt, Left Wheel. C The companies successivelj Halt, Dress. 1 wli^el when opposite to the ■'*^ March. j ground where the left of the (, battalion stood. When the head of the column approaches f the column ( of the ground received i^ie will cease, and lalted in order ary march, for g on an alignc< But, should the Performance of the Ma- nual, and Platoon Exercise be required^ The commanding officer, afler the line has formed, gives a caution that the manual and platoon exer- cise will be performed, and goes to the rear of the battalion. The major advances to the front of the battalion, opbms ranks; unfixes batonkts ; IHOULDBRS Ahms; inakts the officers and colours TARE THEIR POST OP EXERCISE in the rear, by facing to the right ; marching through the several intervals occupied by the Serjeants; and when 3 pac^s S 2 beyond 4 "^ / ?li.l*«*" (OO INSPECTION OR REVIEW. beyond the rear rank, they half, and then receive tht word FRONT : The commanding officer, lieutenant- colonel, adjutant, pioneers, music, supernumerary Ser- jeants, drummers, tifers are at their posts in the rear, as when the battalion is formed in close order. Manual Ea^ercise, i|l! m: \ \ \ THE major proceeds with the manual as directed by regulation, observing that the front rank onlj comes down to the last position of the charge bayo* nets, the others remain ported. The Serjeants who preserve in the front rank the places of the platoon otficcrs, remain there steady during the whole of the manual, except that they charge their pikes at the same time at the bayonets. Platoon Exercise. The major closes rear ranks for the platoon exer- cise, and platoon oliicers, and Serjeants, and colours, ifnd every other individual, take their places, as when the battalion is at close order. I'he major proceeds with the platoon exercise, and the several ranks made ready each according to ill fiiiuation of front, center, and rear; after firing they load and shoulder agreeable to the regulation. The manual and platoon exercise being finished, the major goes to his post, and the comnMnding officer of the bjlialion proceeds to primb ard load with cartridge, and then to commence tht ordered move* bients. \ '¥'1 ill INSPECTION OR REVIEW. «0l: Movements, inual as directed front rank only be charge bayo* he Serjeants who >s of the platoon the whole of th; beir pikes at tbe [he platoon exer- ints, and colours, r places, as when 1. O •^* <« ■«• •fe J k, § o ^Form close column of companks be- hitid grenadiers Form close i >/v*'»// tt/ fjvo conipaniis Face and march to the right Dephif on the rear division e: o 2< ft .s cs (5 3. a; a ^ 'Form close column of companies in jrontoftheleft Form close column 7 of two companies ) Face and march to ? the left \ Deploy on the front ) L division j Form close column "] of companies J on j a central compa- ! »j/, cither^ank j in front y and \ facing to the rear J Countermarch each division close column Sect. 137 Deploy on any cen- ) tral named com > pany i 137 Plate 16. Thecolumn niarehef quick 20 or 30 puces to thf right, and without hailing begins todepioyr into line on the rear division. The cotij-^ manding officer of the battalion givesihewdrd for each division to . halt, front. Thecolumn nnarch.es quick 30 or 40 paces to the left, and without halting bfgi'otodeplojr ^ on the front division. --> The commanding offi- cer of the battaliongives • he word for each di- vision to halt, front. : 138 143 14G The close column is formed facing to the rear. It ihen counter- marches eac^ division so as to return to the proper front. — In the cenJial dt*ployment by companies, the com- pany officers give I he words to halt, front. ■ V I il . i, 'A i S3 4. irhrri _.,J r^-i,-»*<^- ' 1 '¥^ 96e INSPECTION OR REVIEW. 4. e S o e open k into ") 'jmn of I s, the r front J a. 3 5. back colum companies right in M ax ch forward 30 \ or AO paces. Enter an oblique line (the 3 or 4 leading compa Sect. 108 111 nies) by wheeling j iuccessivclytothe I Itjt a half wheel] Halt. The rear companies 7 JiU into column j ^ Wheel up into line Y 126 1'he battalion thus, , at an intermediate )■ point, enters an aligne- ment on which it is to form. (J The left company is wheeled back, tilt parallel to the ori- ginal position.— The I -^ rest of the companies Y ^ wheel into echelhn, "^ March to the rear. •S — F<;rw on the left S [^company T is6 1I8_ The whole companies wheel back at the same time} the left company twice the number of i6o ^ paces that the others do. Should it be neces- sary for the subsequent movements, the line may retire 50 or 6q paces, and then front. 6. H^heel lis/st^ECflON OR UEVIEW. S63 6. ft S '' Halted back into open column, the right in front Couatermarch com- panies, bt/ files March in column 30 or 40 paces. —Head division halts close to the head of column Form square t and prepare for firing ^ Reform in close co- lumn Open out to open column from the rear and halt Change head of co^ ' lumn,b\fthe coun- termarch ofcotfl- panics, from the rear to the front Column moves on and halts Wheel vp into line 7 . Co un termarch by files 071 the center of the bdtialixin Sect. > 108 \ 100 } 138 189 153 101 After the counter- march by files, the co- lumn stands with its left in front.— Tlie co- lumn closes iu quick time. — The sqqare is formed, and close co- lumti reformed ila in part 4th, S. 189. The column opens out ' in quick lime from its rear division, and halts.— '^'he counter- march by companies from the rear to the front is in ordinary time. When the line is formed, it is then considerably to the ge- neral's right, and with its rear to him. } This brings back the 08 .battalion toits sfriginal 3 front. V m I I S* I. Purm •i*»'««** ii- I!- 1 l f p. I; i I r: A «* i504 INSPECTION OR REVIEW. 8. o s: ^Jbr« o;»ffn column^ behind the left com- I /'any, wAtcA ii put \ in march when the ^ 3d company has tu hen it 5 place in co ^ lumn §."^ The right sub-diTi'^[ iions double The right sub'divi- ' sions move vp The column halts,'' and pivots are cor rected J , Wheel up into line ''H^heel hack int(t^ open column f the > left in front j the third company ") is wheeled hack the 8 th of the circle, and each of the . others 3-\6ths of I the circle J Form line on the third company, by the echellon march Sect. 121 87 88 0. o A. The companies that are filing incline to- wards the head uf the column : successively front at their wheeling distances, ascertained as usual by their Ser- jeants: take up the I ordinary step« and fol- low in open column. When the column is marching steadily, the whole sub-divisions double at once by one command, and agaia move up at another. 109 58 > u U Kl 10. § f The left company is ':^ I wheeled up the Sth of the circle, and each of the others 1 - 1 6th ■■ Form , line by the echellon t march J } 159 > 159 The line is thus formed oblique from open column, on 8 central company, by the echellon march. The line thus chan- ges position to the front, on the left cora- ' pany, by the echellon march. U. The 4 INSPECTION OR REVIEW. 965 11- O The battalion facea^ to the right. ~~^ f Marches in file r C 50 or 60 paces) ) forms column of ^ companies on the > march j fti< Halts.^irheels up into line, except the light compa- ny, uhich jiles quickly to the right, and forms behind t^e co- lours. Sect. 12. 2J The battalion r«-"| tires C 50 paces J I "■Halts, fronts - -"Fires tioice by companies from center tifjlanks. , Retire by tdternate' companies in two linefi, C9&0 paces]) each retreat about 60 paces Form line Retire in line (^0 ■ paces) halt t front. L'V ..1 I. 94 9^ The column of com- panies is formed by the rear men of each mov- ing up quick to the left of their leaders, and of each other: the officers ^move to pivot flanki« and pivots are instant- ly corrected. The co- lumn halts when the colours are opposite to the general. l68 176 The light company, being previously sub- divided and prepared, acts in the retreat by alternate companies as 'directed in S. 176, and when the line halts and fronts, it resumes its place 00 the left. f I - 13. Companies 'J'^-.i***' # 13. I V n I INSPfettlON OR ktvifc\v^. -! Companies ma fie h ha ff wheel ^o th^ tight Match in echellon tiSO pde^s) Wh^el back on the march into p ydltelline Fotioard ('lOd pa c€i.)-^Hatty • Fife thrice by cfhmr pafiies, jYom Jlank^ to€€hter. '"'''^ect: { heV dr V 154 166 156 At ihe Word v^'hecl b'dck into litie, the pi. vot flanks mark nme, and thedivfsions Wheel ba(!:k iti ordinary time. At the propef* instant ^when the battalibn is formed, the c6mi;nan> ddr gives iiis word for- ward, for the whole to advance by the colours, and to correct any ir- reg(ulaVi ty' that (here ' tti^fht in thebatt^ion. If the battalion has been hitherto formed .two deep, it will now forra three deep, if its conipauies are of ten files each. 14- S >1i 2; •8 I Form square, March- t/ie square . btf the left angle (^ the front face C5ii pdtes)——^ Halt'— ^ Farm square. March square by the left face •• Halt Forki square. March square by the rear face f 60 paces) Halt — • Form square. Fire in square by companies. Form the line. 'I -■if > 178 > "The 8<)uare is form- ed by tb6 echellon hiarch of coiApanies. AYter the marth by Che leftface, the square is fo^tn^d wh^n it is opp68ite to thegeheral. The firings in st^uare are as e^presse^i in S. 178. The line is formbd by the echellon wheel up, and march of compa- nies. When the order is given to form line, the light company marches quickly, and places it- self two deep and in two divisions, lo or !'<; paces behind the two center companies. 15. Retire mSPBCTION OR nEVIEW. ^r ned .two deep, iiies are often 15. Q bo o 16. ■te o bo bo bo Advance in line 50 ' | paces) - - - ; File from the right " of companies to the front (50 paces) Haft in . open column the ( left in front — j W'htel up into \ line. J Advance in line (50 paces J .Advance hy alter* naie half batta- lions, and fire four time*. l68 Retire in line (lOO 7 paces) • - - 3 File by companiesS from the proper w right's—Halt in> 175 opeti column, the L right in front. J Wheel up into line. Secl.^ When the line harf passed the light coropa* ny no paces, that com- pany extends to cover the center of the batta- lion, and follows* at 50 or 60 paces distance ; and when the column baits y to form^ the light com- pany passes quickly through and beyond it. The companies file quick to the rear. The battalion forms line at the extremity of its ground ; the light company 30 paces in its rear. 166 178 Before the line ad- vances, the light com- pany quickly fornis ex- tended 30 paces before the center^ and pre- serves that distance ia advancing. -■'' When the column haltd to form, the light "company passes quick to the rear, Atid assem- bles half tif it behind each flank, an'd moves relatively with the flank conipanies till after the charge of bayondt. The alternate halfc battalions fire, the two first ranks standing. t nn- iiw- ie fwii -.'s 111-' vjBV,v,ig." )7. Foj'm '■ ii f^?**'*'^' 268 INSPECTION OR REVIEW. Form line //rf- vanie (50 paces) t, ' '—Fire volley ^, J Advance (20 paces) - j —Fire vofUy-— Charge batfoncts ■ (50 paces) — Halt -^Load. '. .. J I bo .1 -i Sect.' AHvamx in line (ioo paces )~-~ Halt — Fire Ixco volleys Port arms at the last one, and half cock. Open ranks— ^ Ad' vance within (50 paces) — lialt-^ General salute. ^uch other Manoiuvres as > 18. f Retire in line, (100 paces.) '"i Return by alternate ^ half battalions — > Fire four times. } Retire in lina 100 "53 paces or more— ^ { Halt, Front. J 9. ("Advance 177 After the volley, bny. onets are polled, the battalion advances firm by the center at the quick step, and at the word Halt, the front rank comes down to the charging position.—— The word Prime and Load is then given, and the light company issu- ing from behind the flanks, pursue, return, and assemble and join on the left of the bat- talion. The whole battalion being assembled : The alternate half battalions fire, the two front ranks standing. In the obliquing, and in the volleys, the front rank kneels. The music may oc- casionally play, and drums roll, while the line advances. The music will play, when advancing at open ranks. may at the time be required. The INSPECTION OR REVIEW. t(J9 The nannber of paces mentioned in the several movements are not positively prescribed, but are sup- posed to be nearly such as will giveMhe intended re- lative situations.— If the ground allows the marches to the rear and front to be longer, it will be so much th« better. No improper pauses should be made betwixt the connected parts of the same movement. — The de- tached points necessary in formation should be time- ously prepared and given. The advance of the battalion should instantly suc- ceed the forming of the line: .and when it .irrives and halts at the point where it is to fire, the firing ought instantly to commence at the word Halt ; for the bat- talion having been apprized, during the march, of the nature of the required firing, no improper delay need therefore be made. The greatest care is to be taken by the officers and nnder-officcrs in the rear, (whose principal attentiuii this is,) that the rear ranks are well locked up in the firings, and that in loading ihey do not fall back. The line, if retiring, halts, fronts, nt one com> mand, and instantly begins firing, having been ap- prized during its movement of the nature of the firing. The pause betwixt each of the firing words Make Reudi/, Present t Fire^ is the same as the ordinary time, viz. the 76th part of a minute, and no other pause is Co be made betwixt the words. In firing by Compnnies by w/«o^«— Each wing car- ries on its fire independent, without regard to the ether wing, whether it fires from the center to the flanks, or from the, flanks to the center. — if there are five companies in the wing, two pauses will be made betwixt \\\tfiie of each, and the makv nady of the •ucceeding one. — If there are four companies in the wing, three pauses will be made betwixt the Jire of •ach, ind the make ready of the succteding one. — This t ' ■J^^.iltk*-' §70 INSPECTION OR BEVIEW. Thii will Allow sufHcient time for the first copipaay to liave again loaded, and shouldered at the time the last company fires, and will establish proper iotervaU.be- twiceo each. In firing by Grand Divisionsy three pauses will be made betwixt ihe^re of each division, and the make ready of the following one. '" In fifing by Wings, one wing will make ready the instant the other is shouldering. — The commanding officer of tne battalion fires the wings. In firing companies by Files each cortipany fires independent. — When the right file presents, the next makes ready, and so on. — After the first fire, each man as he loads comes to a recover, and the file again fires without waiting for any other; the rear rank men are to have their eyes on the front rank men, and be guided by, and present with, them. In general, after the march in front, and halt of the battalion, company or platoon firing should begin from the center, and not from the flanks.— In other cases, and in successive formations, it may begin from what" ever division, first arrives, and halts on its ground. The intention of fixing upon some of the most es- sential infantry movements, and thus ordering them to be executed by each battalion when seen separately \i, that thereby the Inspecting General may be en- abled to report the more minutely and comparatively, on the performance by each battalion, of the great leading points of movement. He wili therefore, among other circumstances, par- ticularly observe and specity — IVhether or not The original formation of the battalion is accord* ing to order. The marches are made with accuracy, at the rc» quired times and length of step, and on such objects as are given. %K . Tht iiU\ IljJS^CTIQN OR REVIEW. 171 T\^^ prp|j>,^r distances j^a <:olumQ and echellon arc^at all times ptc,5erYet|. /( T^i,e wo)?^|if^fj,are p^ade just, and in the manner, pre?(;ri.b9d. ! ' Thp fprmations into line are made true, without f,alse o^^nings, or necessity of correction. 'thp piSicers are alert in their change of situation, cj^aptin their oy/ni p^r^pnal i^npvenaents, gn4 1q«4*, d^cid^jd, ^pd.pp^nted, iri t^eir w,or4§ pf cbmnn^n^' Tfte, ijbarch >" Hue;i^ upiforiPily steady, withput floating, opening, or clqsine. The march in file, close, firm, and without lengths ening out. The officers and under officers give the aids re- quired of them with due quickness and precision. Hurry and unnecessary delay in the movements are equally avoided. In the firings, the loading is quick, the levelling just, the officers animated and exact in their com- mands. When two or more battalions are inspected, or ex- ercise together, they will bf formed in one line with the ordered interval. — They will receive the Geveral, march past, and may perform the same identical movements as are before prescribed for ihe single bat- talion, observing the additional directions that are given for those of the line. When the line of two or more battalions is March' ivg past in column of companies, it must occupy no greater extent of ground than when it originally wheeled into column.— The order is never to be broken or lengthened out. — No particular battalion or the artillery, are allowed to increase distances for their own partial appearance. — The battalion guns will march t wo a-breast. — Ranks are one pace asunder, or if ordered to be open, the distances between com- panies and battalions will not be increased. — The mu- sic of each battalion in passing may play, but will con- tinufi to march on. —The ordinary march is preserved. — Otficf IS do not salute marching, but when particu- larly ordered. -R Whea T ^.£ 97 « INSPECTION OR REVIEW. m >y^ When a considerable body of infantry, or when in* fantry and cavalry are united, and t6 act in corpSf their combined operations, ^uch as mo^eRiei^ts in co« iumns, echellpns, or lines, their formations, the con- duct of attacks, the retreats. Sec. depending on num- bers, and circumstances of ground, or situation, can only be determined and applied according to the views of i\i6 commander j but the great principles of tnove< pieht laid down for the line will still direct, and the detail of execution will remain invariable, being cotn- pounded of those prescribed for the Cvrnpani^, Batta* lion and the Line, 4 .r i t «73 4 '. »lis LIGHT INFANTRY. GENERAL ATTENTIONS. tTTHEN the Light Infantry companies are DbtMce *^ in line with their battalions, they are to for;n of file*, and act in every respect as a company of the batta- linn i but when not in line they may loosen their files to six inches. Open order is to be two feet between each file. — Open or- The necessity of increasin , this distance must depend dvr. on circumstances, and be regulated at the moment by the commanding officer. ^ The files may be extended from right, lef^, or cen- Manner of ter, according tocircumstancesj in executing it each exttDdinif. front rank man must carefully take his distance from the man next to him» on that side from which the ex- tension is made j the rear rank men conform to the \ movement of their file leaders. j When the company is not in e;^tended order, all firing is to be by single men, each firing as quick as he can, consistent with loading properly ; the firing to begin from the flank, or from the point first formed. In firing in extended order, it is to be a standing Firing. rule^ that the two men of the same fiU are never un- T loaded «"■ i'f.JSilp. :, K '.t*-^'***' 274 LIGHT INFANTRY. Ik* ' iiii'J reli'.at- To ceajc hiiiig. Iklove- nunU in quick tiiiiL'. Never to itiu iiulesA ordered. Avoid cmi- fusiut). File iiiovc- uienis. " m I't.riiiiiiii fi) the iiuia. 1 llli 1^ ' loaded together, for which purpose as soon is the front rank man has fired, he is to slip round the left of the rear rank man, who will make a short pace for- ward, and put himself in the other's pbce, whom he is to protect while loading. When the iifst man re- turns his ramrod he will give liis comrade the word rf.ady, after which, and not before, he may fire and immediately change places as before. The same method of firing to be observed when ad- vancing or retreating, which must always be in ordi' nary time, (especially if cannon are ordered to the front with the light companies, which may often be the case.) — Particular attention must be paid to cease firing on the first word or signal for that purpose. All movements of the light companies, except when firing, advancing, or retreating, are to be in quick time. The light companies are never to run, unless parti- cularly directed, and in that case they are only to run at that pace in which they can preserve their order ; and it is to be a rule, that the two men of the same file never separate on any account whatever. The utmost care to be taken to avoid confusion, which too much hurry, even in the smallest bodies, will certainly occasion. — The intermixture of files can never be allowed of. Though all movements should be made la front as much as possible, yet, from the nature of those of light infantry, and the ground they are more particularly liable to traverse, file movements may frequently be ntces^ iry. — All such to be made from one of the flanks by previously facing to it, and the files to loosen, so as tq march perfectly at ease, but not more. In frtiining, the inversion of files or of ranks is not to \yf. aUfnded to if time is thereby gained. — Forming fit f/ic Ironf, to bi: done by the file moving briskly up ;.o the right or It^ft of th(; leading file as ordered. Forming \ LIGHT INFANTRY. 27 S Forward to leU. tu reitr uud t'uriiiiiig. Stgnuis \c iur ofllcurs coiutudiid- iug. Signals. Forming to right or left. — The leading file will halt Right or and face as directed, as will the succeeding ones as luft. liiey cume up to their proper distances. rormi^ig forward to riu/it or left. — The leading file halts and faces an directed ; the succeeding files lead round the rear, and t'orm to the same front as the leading file has done, and at their proper distances. When inarching to the rear by files, and 4o form to MnicWv.r the front — The leading hie will halt and front, the suc- ceeding files will go rtjund the rear of the leading file, and form on the right or left of it as directed. — t'orni" iiig to right or left, or Jbrziuril to right or left, is done in the same manner as when marching to the front. All signals, xvords and con- form themselves exactly to the movements of the se- cond and seventh companies, so as at all times to be in their proper places. _, If the line forms a close column, and the light com- panies receive no particular directions, they are to form by companies, and close up in rear of the column, in the same manner as their respective battalions. When the column deploys into line, the light com. panies will face, each as its battalion does, file with it in the rear; and when the battalion forms in the line, will take its proper post in divisions behind the second and seventh companies. If the light companies are ordered to cover the line to the front, either by word or signal, the divisions will move to the front, from their inner flanks, round the flanks of the battalions; and when at tlte distance of fifty paces, the leading flanks will wheel towards each other, so as to meet opposite the center of the batta> lion, opening their flies gradually from the rear, so as to cover the whole extent of the bnitalion ; the Ser- jeant coverer of each division attending to the flies taking their proper distance, the flies are to halt and front of themselves.— In this position, and in all ex- tended order, the post of the officer commanding is in the rear of the center, and the movements are to be regulated by the company belonging to the battalion, which regulates those of the line. When the light companies are called in, the line may either be halted or advancing. In the flrst case they will retire towards the line, closing to their outer flanks by degrees, so as when they come near their battalions they may be in two. divisions, ready to flie round the flanks of the battalion to their places. — If the line is advancing, they will only close to their outer flanks, so as to be in two divisions, by the time the line comes up to them, when they will instantly face outward and flle to the rear. Line forms close co- luimi. Line do- plovg. Cover front of batulioiis.. Post C)f coiuiiiitiid ing oilicor. Line halt- ed or ad- vancing when light infantry are called in. T3 Light / ^ 1 V H ' 1: V ' ti Vi Movonient !>atiie as tlie line. Qii'ck tune. Cover'n<» pivots, Ckc- Regulating company'. * !■ 1 May occa \ eionally ] •l run. «78 LIGHT INFANTRY. i! ^ Light Infantrif Companies formed in Battalion, When the. Light Infantry companies are assembled in bi^italion, their movements must be on the same principles as those of the line ; the officers and non- commissioned officers posted in the same manner, and, as far as possible, the same words of command should be used ; it is in their rapidity alone that they must be distinguished, to facilitate which the files are to be loosened to the distance of six inches, but great care is to be taken that rapidity does not degenerate into confusion. , When two or more companies are together, they aretoconsider themselves as a battalion ; the senior of- ficer is to take the command, leaving the immediate command of his own company to the next officer be- longing to it. — As light infantry seldom act in large bodies, all their movements may be in quick time : but, when in column, the same attention must be paid to the pivots covering, and the preservation of dis- tances, as is done by the line; the doing so will always be found the quickest way of forming, by precluding the necessity of much after-dressing. In marching in line to the front, a regulating com- pany must be named, by which the others mu«t care- fully dress, and whose movements they must follow. — The officer leading this regulating company must take points on which to march perpendicular to the front of the battalion, and must lead steadily on them, though in quick time; without these precautions, and great attention being paid to them, the march in front must soon become irregular, the files will inevitably inter-f * mix, and great confusion must be the consequence. A battalion of light infantry may occasionally beor*_ ^ dered to run, for the purpose of anticipating an enemy ^ going to occupy any particular post j but in doing so, ' the utmost care is to be taken that confqsion do not • ensue i '•# . . ^ * If ^ - •"■IIM" LIGHT INFANTRY. 279 rnsue ; for which purpose the velocity must never ex- ceed that at which the divisions can keep together and be dressed ; the distances must be preserved as much as possible. Running must generally be in a column ; but in a caseofabsolute necessity to make a very quick movement to the front, with a battalion of four or five companies or more, the best and easiest way of doing it without confusion will be in cchellon by companies, each retired six paces from the preceding one. •^-* • All columns of light infantry to be formed by sub- divisions, that is, half companies. <; The forming from open column to the front may frequently be done by the divisions obliquing to the right or left of the leading division^ and if necessary, firing as they come up. — Light infai.try firing in divi- sions is to be always by single men, as directed in ge- neral attentions. Battalions of light infantry may frequently find it necessary to move by files through woods, and over very rough countries : in all cases where it is practica- ble it is to be done from the right or left of companies, and distances must be preserved for forming in the quickest manner possible. Whenever one cornpany forms, the rest are to do the same, even supposing they do not hear the word or signal fur that purpose. If to form to the fronts the leading file of each com- pany halts and dresses, the rest move up to the right or left of them to their proper places. 1( to form to the right or left, the companies first form separately, and move up and dress with what will then be the front company, by which means the officer commanding will have it in his power to keep such companies in reserve as he thinks proper, as also in forming to throw them to the right or Itft of the front company, as circumstances may require: the companies which are to dress with the front company are to move up to it obliquely in line. T 4 A battalion i*.- i.,:yK But gf fie- ri; I ly III to- Itiniii. 4 w :i May in echtllf'ti. Forming J'roin open- roluiiiii. Firing in divisions. Movemont bv files. j' ♦ 'T Furniing in (runt. Forming in right ur '11 t? :i I V Advanced and flank* ing partiei. To secure a wood* 2B0 LIGHT INFANTRY. Firing m liue. Ce-opera- tion with liue. To take post. Conmand- log officer. A battalion of light infantry marching through a wood should have parties in front, and on its flanks, ia proportion to the strength of the battalion. The par* ties should march in front with extended file« and if attacked roust take post and defend themselves till supported or called in. When ordered to secure a wood of ^o very great extent, the battalion should go through it, and take post on the opposite side, within its skirt, so as to have the plain before it: in this, as well as in all other cases, parties should be detached 30 or 40 yards o^ the flanks. When firing in line advancing, the march must be very slow, the line must be preserved, and the officers must take care to point out the supposed object of at* tack, and see that the men direct their fire to it j— very particular attention is to be paid that the fire is directed to the proper object, and that it ceases on the first word or signal for that purpose. When the light infantry in batttalion is detached from the line, the officer commanding must take care to understand thoroughly the nature of the intended movement, so as to be certain of co-operating with ^ the line with exactness and precision. In general, the method of taking post with a batta* Hon of light infantry, whether large or small, roust depend upon the intelligence of the officer who com- mands it, but he must observe the same rule as was given for a company, viz. Whatever detachments he may find necessary to make, always to keep the most considerable part together as a reserve. The success of any engagement in a wood or strong country depends upon the coolness and presence of mind of the commanding officer, and the silence and obedience of the men, fully as much as upon their -, bravery. Th» "•'^ — LIGHT INFANTRY. 281 Tbe armfl of the light infantry, when in battalion, Arnuhow while in movement, are generally to be sloped, butaU carried, ways by order, and their bayonets are to be fixed. If at any time ■ battalion of light infantry is ordered I^igl>t in- into the line, the files most be closed, and it must in 1."""^^ '° every respect act as other battalioua of tbe line. '"^ The Signals, fh< ic SiOKfAis— To Advance; To JRetreati To- Halt; To cease firing } To assemble, or call in all par- ties ; are to be always considered as fixed and deter- mined ones, and are never to be changed. The bugle born of each company is to make himself perfect axias- terofthem. All signals are to be repeated. '' All of those signals made from th9 line or column are to convey the intention of the commanding officer of the line to the officer conmianding the light iufan« try> who will either communicate them' to thesovera) , tompanies or detachments by word or signal. i ds. commander of the regulating battalion of the line, or of the head of the column, where he himself generally is : and sometimes to the commander of the battalion to which he is then nearest, and each battalion com- mander repeats them loud without delay. When any complicated or combined movement is to be made, which requires previous explanation, it must be com- municated clearly to the commanders of corps by detached officers, before its execution can be ordered to commence. The several chiefs of brigades, &c. watch over and direct the interior movements of their repective bodies; they repeat the general or- ders of execution given, if they see that it is necessary, • •* and announce such preparatory ones as are verbally sent to them. 3. When the general order is not heard or under- stood by part of a line, each battalion commander (where the intention is obvious) will conform a* quickly as possible to the movettjents which he see* executed to his right or left, according to the pomt from whence the movement begins: but platoon of- ficers execute only on the orders of their battalion commander. 4. The commander in chief will always himself rommandi loudly announce his commands of execution, as ".' **''ft"- MARCH, or HALT, and the commanders of battalions will, without waiting for each other, nulenvour in the same moment to repeat them: if officers are quick, observing, firm, and decided in their commands, such repetition will be instantaneous. 5. h '.?! 1 < t • '4 jil ^ 1 |! m"***^ 1 I M Cautionary cotuiuauds. S84 Repulat- inij body of nioveiuent. PART IV. ' S. It is impossible to ascertain the words of com- mand to be given in all cases. Where such are not pointed out, they must depend on the circumstances of the situation, and be short, clear and expressive of what is to be done. Where they are not compre- hended, they must be repeated; and no operation begnu, till its intention is well understood : otherwise that disorder which may be originally prevented, is not easily remedied if once it has taken place. 6. When troops are halted, explanatory cautions are proper before they are put in march ; but when they are in motion, and in situations where perfect correct- ness is expected, as in the march in line, and in the prolonging of the alignement, no caution should pre- cede the word halt, but the whole should at once firmly halt. This is to be understood of a column of manoeuvre, but where a column of march is unavoid- ably, from impediments of the route, a little opened out, and that its head stops in order to remedy such extension or to form in line, the several rear battalions will be halted successiively at their just distances. 7. The movements of all great bodies are made either in line or column.— In line they are in general regulated by a battalion of that flank which is nearest to, and is to preserve the appui, or which is to make the attack : — in column they are directed by its head, and the commander of the whole is with the regu- lating body. There are very few cases in which the center ought to regulate, although the direct march of the line in front appears to be the easiest conducted by a battalion of the center, if an enemy is to be turned or an attack made, it is by that flank that such move- ments are led: it is the flank that must preserve the line of appui, in all movements in front : if the line is thrown backward or forward, it is generally on a flank point : if the line breaks into column, it is the head or leading flank of that column which conducts, and whose writhes and turnings are followed by every other part of the body, and such head becomes a flank when THE LINE. S8S SupportiAf liuea. when formed into line : it is seldom that an attack is formed from the center, and a movement seldomer need be. — The commander will therefore be on whichever flank directs the operation of the line, and by which he proposes to make the attack, or to coun- teract the attempts of the enemy. 8. No considerable body should ever be assembled, Re»ervei. or formed for action, without a proportion of it being placed in reserve, or second line, and more or less strong, according to circumstances. 9. Where several and supporting lines of attack are formed, the second should out-flank the first, the third the second, &c. the advanced one being thereby strengthened and supported on its outward wing. 10. The cannon attached to battalions, whether in Cannon, line or column, will accompany in all situations the movements of their proper battalions. — Those that are brigaded, make a separate object. 1 1 . The general firings of the line are executed se- parately and independently of each battalion. 12. The chief commander of a line must have se- veral mounted officers, or other intelligent persons, at his disposal, both to circulate his orders, and to mark and determine such original points as become neces* sary in movement. — The adjutants of battalions are in general wanted to assist in the separate formations of their battalions. Tiriiigs. Necessary aids. 13. Partial signals of the drum for a battalion must not be given in line — But from the battalion where the chief commander is, and by his particular direc- tion, such signal may, when proper, be made for the whole (but not repeated) t If halted and standing at ease to assemble : if assembled to be ready to march : If firing in line for a general cessation : and before a march to mark the proper cadence by five or six strung taps. — Signals that cannot with propriety be applied in service, should not be used in exercise ; and it is evident, Signals of the drum. I <>f al' i'l h I —4 ;^'.»*«i*' lU Inversion ol tlie iiiio ill loriiiii- tiiin suine* turn's iie- fc-fssur)-. >»i 15. S86 P A R T IV. evident, that no loud signals, or even comnoands, or rriusic, or drums, can be used in columns of route, or in movements made near to, though not in presence of, an enemy, ns it is most important on such occa- sions to conceal them, and not unnecessarily to disco- ver them to the enemy. 14. Although in general the iNVEKsroN of all bo- dies in line is to be avoided, yet there are situations where this rule must be dispensed with, and the quick- est formation to a particular front thereby obtained.— The battalion or line may be obliged to face to the right about, the more readily to oppose a dauger, in- stead of changing its position by a countermarch : ic may even be under the necessity of forming to a flank with its rear rank in front. The column with its right in front may arrive on the left of its ground, and be obliged immediately to form up and support that point, 80 that the right of the line will become the left. — Part of a second line may double round on the extremity of a first line, thereby to out-flank an ene- my. — A corps moving to a ilank by lines may be obliged in the quickest manner to form up to the front of its march, so that the new lines shall be composed each of parts of the old ones, — Many other situations may be imagined, where opposing the rear rank ad- mits of no choice,, and where an inversion of the di- visions of the line will gain much time, and become^ absolutely necessary when the formation is required from the point of appui, and near to an enemy.— Troops must therefore be accustomed to such opera- tions; but the application of them requires great me- thod and recollection, otherwise, in such critical situ- ations, confusion is \try easily produced, and will even be attended with the most fatal consequences. )1 OPEN THE LINE. ?87 f., • » f » ' V, , OPEN COLUMN OF THE LINE. N of all bo- uences. i->i J h 1. The great changes of situation of the line are performed in open column of manoeuvre. r 2. The line breaks into open column by wheels of the quarter circle. , ^ 3. The general circumstances attending the open column have been already explained under that head, part the 3d. 4. The several general directions given for the . ' . single battalion in open column, extend to each bat- ^. , talion chat makes part of a considerable column, and their minute observance is then most especially essen- tial, and must be carefully recollected. 5. In open column, the leading division of each laterviUs battalion will preserve the distance of intervals be- twixt battalions, in addition to that of its own front. The column of companies or sub-divisions marching * at half or quarter distance, will preserve an interval between battalions equal to the front of the column. G. Battalions are to a line, what companies are to a battalion. Not only the whole divisions of a bat- ' talion, but the whole battalions of a line or column « • should MARCH off, and halt together; and to ensure this in the exercise of considerable bodies, signals of cannon are often given for such purpose. In most " .^ , situations the quick circulation of verbal commands ,i^, must be sutiicient. 7. The same rules that direct the entry and march Points of of one battalion in an alignement on which it is to f<'i'iii.iuon form, (S. 116. 118.) apply with increased attention to those of the most considerable column. The puint where the head of the column enters an alignement, and which is never quitted by a mounted or other officer ai 111 open cu- luiiiii. I •1 ll J., ass PART IV. II .; % h* Post of command- ing oflicer and adju- tant in for- loatious. Distant points are of great advantage. Sitiratior.9 in wliich inoveioents in open co« tumo are «saeutial. officer but as be is relieved, and until the wbole have entered; the point where the head of the leading battalion halts, in order to form : the several adju- tants who place themselves in the true line; the pro- longation of battalions which may have formed up; all these are so many marked points within the line itself J on which the dressing of pivots or battalions can be regulated, either while marching in the line, or when each halts and is to be corrected, in order to wheel up into line. 8. When the head of a battalion in general column or in its individual column, halts on a line on which it is to form, the commanding officer must invariably be at that head point, instantly to correct his pivots on the adjutant, who is invariably at the rear of the battalion in the true prolonged line on which it is marching, or which it is to take up. In like manner the commanding officer is with the leading division of an echellon coming into line, and the adjutant marks the other flank of the battalion on which the divisions are successively corrected. ,., g. In formations or changes of direction, the com- mander in chief will if possible preserve and procure conspicuous distant points, in their prolongation, which, when known, will assist others as well as him- self in keeping the line in the position he intends. 10. The movements in open column of manoeuvre are particularly necessary. When d line formed in order of battle is to extend in the same direction to either flank, in order to follow the march of an enemy, or to outflank him if he remains posted ; nor is any movement, more important, or can be more securely or effectually practised against an enemy inaccurate and inferior in discipline, who, in attempt- ing the counter- movement, is generally thrown into confusion. Or, when arriving in column of march on any ground, the comn>f^ will preserve the parallelism, or give gradually the new inclination to the heads of the other battalions. — These during the inarch never having overpassed the line of their leading ones, nearly dressing up, and pre* serving their battalion distances, arrive at their adju- tants and form in line by wheeling, filing, or Echellon marching, as may have been ordered. If in front of and facing to-^ the old line. " The battalion columns will as before enter and form on the line. — Within themselves they need not be inverted, but the right of the line will now be the left, nor can it well be avoided, unless — by countermarching the line before the movement : or by a complicated operation during the movement : or by countermarching first the battalion, and then the line after the movement. If in rear of and facing as-' the old line. The same identical operations, ac- cording to circumstances, are applied as when the position in front is taken, fa- cing as the old line. — ^The line or echel- lons after facing about ; or the heads of battalion columns after breaking ; march to the rear, and front or form in line facing as the old line. If in the rear <'7'>H place as ^';f/''^*'^Mofand/i old line. The battalion columns will lead to the rear, and enter and form on the new line, the other circumstances will take when the new line is in front A faces to the old line.- — ^The Echel- lon movements will not apply in this case without inverting the ranks. 2d. When a considerable line is to take J up a new position which (or whose prO" T\g.96.C.B.J the line which is first thrown into the new direction may so effect it by the Echellon march on the named fixed division.— The whole will then wheel into open column, and prolong the line till the rear arrives at its point. Or, The named division being placed with its pivot perpendicular to the new direction, and fronting the way the line is to extend, the rest of the line breaks inwards and backwards towards it.— That division is then put in march, and is itself followed in column by that partof the line whose flank will naturally first come to its ground : the other part of the linemoves on at the same time in a separate column a-breast of it, the whole being thus in a double column of divisions as marched off from the center. The head and the column imme- self. — When the third battalion has entered, its adju- tant relieves the second, that second relieves the first, and the first proceeds 200 paces farther, and again alignes himself. — In this manner, and till the last bat- talion has entered the line, do the adjutants succes- sively and diligently relieve each other. — If any of the adjutants overtake or interfere with the advanced persons, who in the front are prolonging the line, such adjutants may return to their battalions, as being no longer of service. 3. As to the persons m. n. o. who are in the front of the column, two of them at least having taken their station by the time that the leading battalion enters the line, as soon as the head of it approaches the first of them, he gallops on and new alignes himself be- yond the other two : and this operation each succes- sively repeats till the column halts, which has always had (independent of any accidentiil distant point) two such persons to march upon. 4. So many fixed poiits being thus ascertained, all which are successively passed by the pivots of the co- lumn, the accuracy of direction cannot but be pre- served ; but as a farther aid, each commanding officer of a battalion is at the point of entry invariably to place himself on the flank of his leavling division, and m this situation, moving on the posted adjutants, he (allowing for the breadth of bis own horse) cannot fail to keep his battalion in the true line, by frequent- ly going before his J' rision, turning round, and cor- recting bis flanks, if necessary, on the nearest adjutant in the rear, which the wave of a hand will suffice to do. — As each commanding officer arrives at a posted adjutant, he must go behind him, and again take up the flank of the division. 5. Every ii ' THE LINE. 297 5. Every division of the line having carefully taken Attentions its just wheeling distance before arriving, or at latest *•**"• when it does arrive at the point of entry, and from '"""^ ' thence having invariably preserved the step by a steady march ; the pivots also (occasionally corrected back- wards) having preserved the just line of the several adjutants, and no halt, or alteration of step, or dis- tance, having been made by any one division or bat- talion from the instant that it has entered the line ; the whole halt at the same moment, on that word being loudly and rapidly repeated by each command- ing officer, who immediately examines and corrects his pivots, and the column is thus prepared for the next order of wheeling into line. 6. If the column halts when the last battalion has Adjutants, entered, the adjutants remain fixed till the line is cor- rected and formed : but if the column is still carried on, then the pei"son posted at the point of entry, when he sees the rear of the colunm approaching the last adjutant, quits that point, relieves that adjutant (who proceeds, &c.) and repeats that operation till the column halts and forms in line. 7. When tiie column halts in an alignement to rowction form, the various marked points in it which then exist of pivots, give the greatest facility to commanding officei*s in- stantly to correct their pivots, if necessary, each (as has been mentioned) on the next posted adjutant in his rear; and which will also generally be on the pivot of the front division of the succeeding battalion, in the same manner as companies dress from the pivot of one to the pivot of the next ; for, such correction should be merely internal, unless some inexcusable mistake has deranged the whole, and thrown the rear •f the column out of its true direction. 8. If great accuracy is required in the movements iiit{ oi!icci« ol bill- luliuns. 5 '»'. :i .iU: _.ii 300 PART IV. I. Prolonga- tion of a line. Fig. 103. Fig. 102. Change of direction. General aids in marching in column. When the open co- lumn changei its •ituation on •ny fixed pomt with- in itself. ins; officer is invariably attached to the head of his bat- talion; for, in other situations of march, he must by no means remain fixed at its head, but be moveable on its flank, in order to watch over its general progress. 18. When a line already formed is to ichecl into open column^ and prolong its direction. Three persons, m, n,o, take their stations in the front as points of march, and the adjutants place themselves each close to the pivot flank of his own second division. The column is put in motion, the last adjutant, when the rear approaches the one next to himself, relieves him, and he going on they successively relieve each other. 19. IVhen a line, prolonging a straight direction^ changes into another straight direction^ the advanced persons, m, n, o, will of course be first pliiced in that direction, the front adjutant will be at the point of change till he is relieved, and the column will pro- ceed as before. 20. If the march of the column (although in open ground) is not meant to be critically straight, then the placing of adjutants can be dispensed with, and the divisions, at their true wheeling distances, will scrupu- lously follow the line which the head of the column traces out: but, the better to prevent any improper deviation of the rear, commanding officers or adju- tants will frequently stop at true points of the march, until the rear of their battalion has passed, and always at points where the head of the column makes any considerable change of direction. If every division of a column does not accurately follow the path traced out by the leading one, opening or closing of distances must take place, running up, or stopping short, will ensue, and the column will not be in a situation to form in line with precision. 21. JVhen the open column ofmanauvre has prolonged a straight line, stands halted, and is directed to make a change oj situation on any fixed point within itself- — All the divisions before that point countermarch and stand faced to it; the battalion, if single, or the central ba(^- tulion THE LINE. 301 talion of a line, and the one on each side of it, will file by divisions into the new column ; the others will march in column, and enter where their Rears are to Fig. 45.48. be placed. If the column is intended to proceed, the division facing the given one having taken single dis- tance, and the others of that wing being arranged be- hind it, they will all countermarch, and the column may then move on. If the column is meant after such change of situation not to proceed, but immedi- ately to form in line, then the division facing the given one having taken double wheeling distance, the line will be formed Ly a wheel up to the pivot flank. In either case, a previous caution will determine the po- sition of the division facing the given one. )' i" ? I I'' i • ' I S. 181. Formation in Line on detached AdjutantSyfrom the Assembli/ or Mass of' Battalions in Columns of Companies. 1. if a column of several battalions has halted z.i pig. ]o<;. half, quarter, or close distance, or that its battalions have assembled in contiguous columns with small in- tervals, and that they are to extend into a line which is at some distance from their then situation, on their respective adjutants, and facing either to the front or to the rear. 2. A battalion is named as the one to be formed General upon, and which may be either a flank or central bat- prelimi- talion of the new line, but should be that one which, uary at- being placed at the point of appui^ determines the po- Mentions. aition of the line, and therefore will commonly be a flank one. The general column, when arrived at, and standing on the new line, should always front to the point ofappuif whether flank or central. Each ad- jutant marks one certain flank of his battalion in the new line: and each in taking up his ground, allows for the front and interval of his own battalion from the •■ ■ 11 . t! 'I ! » p. ,00^1^0- '* hi I): h I 11 ^ Fig. 106. Point of nppui de- termined. Adjutants mark flunkii. 302 PART IV. the last placed adjutant before him. Each Adjutant always marks that flank of his battalion in the new line, at which its head is to enter, and at which its REAR division in column is to rest, and therefore it is that flank, which is farthiest from the point o(appui; if his battalion is to march with its right in front, he marks its left, and if with the left in front, he marks its right. It is therefore often necessary, as will be mentioned, that some or all of the battalion columns should separately coutermarch (S. 101.) at their point of assembly, in order to move off with their proper flank divisions in front, and thereby enter the new line at their respective adjutants. 3. Supposing therefore that the battalions are stand- ing in columns (the right in front) either in general column, or in contigtious line. If the position is to be taken from the rigAt B, of the new line, the adjutants will from thence prolong it, each successively marking his own left. If to be taken from the left C, the adju- tants will from thence prolong it, each successively marking his own right; and the battalions, on sepa> rating from the general mass, will each counter- march, so as to arrive at its adjutant a column with the left in front. If to be taken from a central point D, both flanks of that battalion must be marked; its adjutant, and those of the battalion standing to its left (or behind it if in column) will mark each its own left ; the adjutants of the battalion to its right (or be- fore it if in column) will mark each its own right, and those battalions will in consequence counter- march, so as to enter with their left in front; and in this manner will the whole stand on the new line facing to the central point. 4. These circumstances determined and understood all the adjutants are sent forward to the ground of the named battalion ; the general direction of the line is ascertained by stationed objects; the flank point of entry is taken by the named adjutant; and all the others from him successively prolonging the line, mark their respective ordered points of entry ; they are ex- ''n THE LINE. 303 Battalion* enter the new line. pected to give ground quickly, according to circum- stances, both by their eye, and their own step, as well as by the step of their horses. 5. In the mean time, the whole are put in motion, and when sufficiently advanced, they halt. Such battalions as are to countermarch, are ordered so to do, and each then diverges to right or left, avoids crossing or interference, and marches quick to its own point of entry, opening its divisions in the course of the march. — At that point a momentary halt is made; the head division wheels into the line, the others suc- cessively follow it at open distances, and in ordinary time (S. 125. 115.) till the word halt is given on the arrival of their rear division at that point. The bat- talion thus standing in open column, and its pivot be- ing corrected on the adjutant, is ready to wheel up. into the line, which is in this manner separately en- tered by each battalion, whether it is to face to the front or to the rear of the march. 6, As the adjutant always marks the point where the REAR division of his battalion column is to be placed, so the point where the head one is to rest, will be of course easily known (and may be also mark^ ed in due time by another detached person) being at the distance of a proper interval, and the front of a di- vision from the preceding adjutant. The several ad- jutants, when placed, become so many points of march to the battalions that are prolonging the line. 7. Although unnecessary ground may seem to be Uoncral gone over by the head divisions of some of the bat- rule, talions, when they enter at their rear point, yet the rule that each of them shall enter the line where its REAR is to I'est, is simple, general, and most readily corrects any mistakes that may be made ; and, ail circumstances considered, it is a quicker and surer manner of forming on the new position, than if tht; battalions were to enter at their head, or intermediate points. ' R. Wh(Mi :X,. J 1M V rl 364 PART IV. I.;**" (i SI i. • 8. When the enemy cannot possibly interrupt the movements of the detached battalions, this is an ex- peditious method of taking up ground in a defensive position: but it requires great exertion in the distances given by the adjutants; for, if they misjudge their points there will be false intervals in the line, which can only be remedied by the battalions marching on to their proper distances before they halt. If the battalion of appui is nearest to the new line, and the first to form on it, then, as all the others must enter it successively, any inaccurate marking of the adjutants may be reme- died; because each battalion, without interfering with any other one, can, before it halts, march up to its just distance from its preceding one, but if the batta- lion of appui is the last to enter the line, each must then HALT at the point marked by its adjutant, and no cor- rection can be attempted till the battalion of appui has halted, and that the whole are in one general column. p. Should adjutants be ordered to mark the head Xinstead of the rear) point of their battalion columns, and should such columns not counter-march, as is be- fore required : In such case, each must sometimes take distance not for the front of his own, but for the front and interval of an adjoining battalion, and the column would not face to the point of appui; these circumstances would much tend to embarrass the formation of the line. When an adjutant has to allow for the front of another battalion, he must be apprized of the number of files, officers included, in such battalion. 10. Although the adjutant does always mark the REAR flank of the battalion column, yet as its head point, or any intermediate one, is afterwards easily ascertained, it can be directed (when particularly so ordered) to enter at eith«?r of those points, as well as at the rear one, for, any of those operations places the whole in open column in the new line. 11. When battalions assemble in line of contiguous close columns, they should be so placed that n j crossing M THE LINE. 305 or Fig. 105. or retirdment of the after-march mav be occasioned. If the new position to bie taken faces the same way as the columns as they must have successively arrived in it, each will halt when its head is at a due distance from the pre . ceding battalion, its pivots will be corrected on its ad- jutant, and it will thus be ready to wheel up into line, when the next battalion behind it shall have three di- visions at least correctly standing in column on the line.— Or, the adjutants still marking the rear points to their battalions, if so ordered, the head of each may be conducted to its respective head point (which is readily ascertained,) it will then halt, face, and file into the new line, and its pivots being corrected on its adjutant, it will be ready to wheel up into line as in S. 124. A column marching at halfy or quarter distmce^ may in the same manner take up its ground.-^The division that is to stop at the point of entri/ being ascertained, such part of the column as is before that division will successively there enter the line, and prolong it at open distances. — In the mean time such battalions as are behind that division^ breaking from the general co- lumn, will march to their respective points, and ex- teod along the line. S* 183. When a Line of several Batta- lions, thrown into Open Column, changes position on a fixed fianh Division, The mrectipn of the new line being ascertained and prolonged, and the (lank company placed perpendi- cular to it, as already directed (6*. 120.) the whole wheel backward into open column, facing to the standing company. — The flank battalion faces and FILES into column on the new line {S. 120.) but the head division of each other battalion wheels and MARCHES off quick in separate column to its adjutant, who marks its rear pomt in the new line; it there X 2 enters, 4 )i Fig. 47. U- ■,^0^Ji/m' 308 PART IV. enters, prolongs, and wheels up, each successively, a« directed (S. 125) — Or, if so ordered, each battaliton may enteral its head point, as in ( • I* 312 PART IV, V I leading battalions having in the mean time prolonged the line, when it comes to the turn of the 3d, it gra- dually takes its distances, follows in open column, as ' also all the others, till the whole are ordered to halt, and the line to be formed by wheeling up. 3. The justness of this movement depends — on the points in the new direction being taken up quickly, and with precision; on the previous determination that a certain battalion or division of a battalion, shall pass or halt at the point of intersection ; and that every part of the column which is behind that bittta-^ lion shall throw itself into opeu column on the new line behind the line of intersection, ready to prolong or to fornx the line whenever it comes to its turn. * • • 4. This movement will often take place in the change of position of a second line, and is performed by all those that are behind the division which is to stop at the point where the old and new lines intereect.- • And at all times when the open column changes into a direction on which it is to form, and that the divt-> sion which is to be placed at the point of entry can be determined, it much facilitates the operation to make every thing behind that division gain the new line as quickly as possible, without waiting till the head of the column halts. 5. Suppose the column marching on a line parallel to an enemy's front, to have entered opposite one flank, and to be marching towards the other, as if meaning to form in parallel line, but that circum- stances .determine to form in oblique line C, and at* Fig. 109. C. tt^ck the flank it has passed. — ^The column will be halted when the rear has arrived at a determined point; the direction of the oblique line C, will be given; each division of the column will countermarch: the battalion that is to rest at the point of intersection will be named; the whole will be put in motion.— - Two or three of the leading battalions continuing their march, will, by the successive wheeling of their divisions, prolong the new direction ; such following ones '..ill THE LINE. \ 313 ones as arc to be before the point of intersection, a. will assemble close to it j such others as are to be be- hind it, will at once march otT quickly and separately to their point of entrv in the new line, and stand in open column upon it : in proportion as the head ad^^ vances, the whole will extend along the line in open column, be halted and formed by wheeling up. 6. A line formed parallel to an enemy, may change situation in the above manner, by wheeling into open column, marching on to the point of intersection, and then taking up the new oblique position. 7. If a column moving parallel to an enemy, should stop and take up a new position on any point then within itself, such formation would be a central one, and made either on a fixed or moveable division. Ml CLOSE COLUMN OF THE LINE. I . THE great object of a considerable close column is ; to form the line to the front in the quickest man- ner possible; to conceal numbers from the knowledge of the adversary ; and to extend in whatever direction the circumstance of the moment may require : which 'till it is nearly accomplished cannot be obvious to an opposite enemy : It is a situation for the assembly, more than for the march of troops : It is not formed until the head of the troops is arrived in column of whole, half, or quarter distance, near the ground where they are to extend into line. — The formation from close column into line is an original one, generally protected by cannon and cavalry, made at such a dis- tance as not to be interrupted by the attempts of an cneniy, and avoiding the enfilade of artillery. Its po- sitions cannot tail to be truly taken. 2. The ^ii .^;^a**> 314 PART IV. li \\ k 2. The close c6luinn should not exceed 5, or 7, battalions ; where there are more troops, it is best to form more columns if it can be done ; therefore the columns of march may often be sub-divided when they come near the points of forming into line, be di- rected upon them, and then closed up. 3. In general the bttttalion close columns before they begin to deploy, should stand 2 companies in front, and Fig. 70. 7S. 5 in depth : In this situation, the right company has its officer and his Serjeant on its right flank, and the left company has its officer on its left, and his serjeant on its right. (S. 14?.) 4. From close column, the whole or any part of the body may be ordered to extend into line to either hand, as circumstances may require. 5. When a close column is halted, each battalion of which it is composed is 3 paces from the one be- fore it. 6. A close column must loosen its divisions before it can march in front, and its changes of direction must be made circling and on a moving point, to en- able its rear gradually to comply : If too great inter- vals should be made in the column, they can best bo closed by a halt of the head. 7. Battalions standing in niass should be 6 paces distant from each other before deploying into line. 8. A close column of 2 or even 3 battalions, may • occasionally deploy in the same manner as a single bat- talion does, and on any divisions; but in proportion to the number of divisions does the difficulty of execu- tion increase, and at any rate the formation will pro- bably be inaccurate and defective. — Therefore, when several battalions are hailed in a close column, they do first deploy in mass on any named one, and thus stand in contiguous line of battalion columns, with any or- dered interval between each. If the columns are of Cf)m- "W - THE LINE. 315 cx»m|Mnies, the interval will be equal to the front of a company and a half, they will ll^en form columns of 2 companies each in front ; and the whole will then de* ploy into line on any named division of any battalion. ■k « ■ S, 187. ff^en a Column of March {by Companies) of several Batta" lions forms close Column, and 111. then extends into Line, CLOSE Ta QUARTER DISTANCE. ORDINARY. < Fig. When it is found profier to shorten the column of march, tho rear divisions are ordered to close up to a certain dis- tance. The leading division of the co- lumn either halt» or shortens its step, and the rear divisions close up to quar- ter distance : an interval of a company is reserved betwixt each battalion, and the divisions when closed resiume the ordinary march. C When arrived within aboutSOOyards FORM' CLOSE 1 o^ where the line is to be formed, the COLUMN, j head is halted, and the rear divisions HALT. (^move on to close column. B*■■'■ ^d'l' .feV S. IBS. Oblique Deployments ^ The deployment of the close column into a line ob- lique to the one on which its head then stands, may in some situations be required, where circumstances da not permit of the previous operation of placing the column perpendicular to Mich a line; as when a wing is to be lengthened out but refused, or an enemy's' flank to be gained by throwing forward one or more battalions which have advanced in close column be-^ hind th^ point of a wing; or when the nature of the ground on which the column stands demands a de>- ployment that will give a support to a flank, or pre- serve the advantage of a position. Sucbk deployments muS)t be miidc by the troops a* standing in one column,, and by tne \vh()le as^ if one battalion, according to the mode prescribed for it; they do THE LINE. 319 do not apply to battalions separated and standing ii» mass on the same line. If more than one or two b^ti" talions take np an oblique line, it will require great attention in the commanders to preserve order, and tq form with justness. Such formatioi^s are required on. the front division of the column ; hardly on the rear or on a central one ; the attendant difficulties are suft liciently obvious : the colu«Tin must be well closed up, and two companies in front. Whenever circumstap^ ces permit the column to be placed perpendicular to its line of formation, it must always be done: oblique formations are unavoidable exceptions. • i S. 189. If a Battalion close Column of Companies should be required to form - the Square, * The column being halted with the usual interval of fjg. 108.B. one pace between the companies, receives the cau- tionary command to form the square, on which the front half of the companies in the column take one pace forward ; the Hrst company then falls back to the, second one pace, and the two last companies close Up 1 and 2 paces to the companies before them. The, whole companies make an interval of 2 paces in their center, by their sub-divisions taking each one pace to the flanks; 2 officers with their Serjeants place them- selves on each of the front and rear intervals; 2 offi- cers with their Serjeants also take post in each of the increased intervals in the center of the sides ; and a Serjeant takes the ^lace of each flank front rank man of the first division, and of each flank rear rank man of the last division; all the other officers, Serjeants, dis-^ placed men, drummers, &c. &c. assemble behind the center of the companies which are to form the flank faces. On the word outwards face, the two rear companies face outwards, and 4 files (supposing the companies of 12 files each) on each flank of all the companies (except the first and last) also face outwards, the S56 T? A R T IV. Cu 1^'. H\ the whol» lining with the flanks of the front compai ni^, and dressing in ranks from front to rear. Atth6 word Q. MARCH, the 5th file from each flank of all the companies except the 2 first and 2 last, followed by the front rank man of the 6th file, move up to right and left, and respectively fill up the intervals between the flanks of their own and the preceding division; the remainder of the men of the side divisions arrange themselves to their right and left, forming close in the rear of their own divisions respectively* The whole thus stand faced outwards, and formed at least 4 deep, with 2 officers and their Serjeants in the middle of each face to command ; all the other officers, as well as Serjeants, &c. &c. are in the void space in the center behind their companies ; and the files of the officers in the faces may be completed by Serjeants, &c. &c. from the interior, in such manner as the commandant may direct. The mounted field officers must pass into the center of the column, by the rear face, if necessary, opening from its center two paces, and again closing in. M 'it, Whenordered, the two first ranks ail around the column will kneel and slope their bayonets; the 2 next ranks will fire standing, and all the others will remain in re- serve ; the file coverers behind each officer of the sides will give back, and enable him to stand in the 3d rank.^ — Whatever is the strength of the companies which compose the flank sides, the whole of them will face outwards except their 4 center files, which are , always reserved for filling up the intei'vals. To reduce the square. — On the word form close COLUMN, th^ files that faced outward will come to their proper front, and the files that moved into the intervals will face about. — At the^ word Q. mauch, the grenadiers take one pace forward, and the 2 rear companies take one and two paces forward, and then face about; the files from the intervals take their proper places ; officers, Serjeants, &c. will quit the interior, move to their several stations, and the com- panies that compose the flank faces will be completed ; the companies will also close inwards by sub-divisions one pace. S. 190. I ^a ,Ng:->-* THE LINE. 321 S. 190. IVhen several Close Columns are formed from Parts of the same Line, The pacts of the line which are to compose each column are named : each battalion forms a close co- lumn on one of its own named divisions : The se- veral battalion close columns march by a tlank, and place themselves before or behind the directing bat- talion of that general column to which they are to belong. , S, 191. If several considerable Close Co- lumns are halted at acciden- tal Distances ^ but with their rig. 113. 114. Heads dressed^ and are or- dered to form in one Line, At whatever distance the heads of the close columns are halted from each other, the separate battalions will move up into line, each column upon its own named battalion : The point and division on which the whole are to form will be named ; the whole will extend from it ; the distances altd commence- ment of movement will be taken from the named point, so that the outward battalions may move suc- cessively as It becomes necessary to preserve their dis- tances from the inward ones. Or, the adjutants tak- ing their points from the given one of appui^ the co- lumns will in the mean time be previously so placed as not to cross or interfere in the march ; the batta- lions of each will then disengage, march, enter, and form on the line. h 4 r s. 19?. iV 322 PART IV. S. 192. If two Columns halted at dpen^ half, or qunrter Distances^ are Fig. 115. E. to exchange Places. The divisions of each will face inwards and file ; when they have nearly approached eacTi other, one of them halts, the other continues in march, and paiwes through the intervals of the halted one.— Both co- lumns then move on until they arrive, halt, and front on the ground which each other occupied, and which has been properly marked and preserved for them : during this flank march, the heads of the files are kept nearly dressed, and are regulated in each column by the two leading divisions. — This operation is ne- cessary when a line is to he taken up and formed on facing the reverse way to what the columns then do ; and if such line is in the rear of the columns, thej also countermarch their divisions by files, in order to enter and prolong it. This mode of columns ex- changing situation, which is equivalent to the passage of lines, may be required on several occasions. V* S. 193. When tzvo Columfis are to form Fig. 115. in Line in any given Position. Points tire prepared. — The columns, by marching, counter-marching, exchange of situation by files, or by whatever other operation is necessity, are brought up with their heads to the given points in the new line; the columns close up; the battalions disengage, place themselves on the new line ; the division or divisions of formation ai'e naraed> and the whole relatively de^- ploy into line. — Or, points being prepared by the se« veral adjutants, the battalions will disengage at a due distance, and march on their ires^^^e points, and form in line. s. 194. THE LINE. 323 6'. 194. If there are two ColumnSy com- posed each of Parts of txvo Fig. 114. Lines, which are to form. The battations of the second line will halt at a pro- per distance from the first, and deploy or form in line in the same manner as the first one doe^. — Or, if the first line is to form facing to the rear, th'- se" nd one will hare to proceed and to nas* ;t, in i>ider ' > arrive at its relative situation. \i If two lines march off to the J^Oyif in 2, 3, or 4 qc^--.,, lumn!}, each composed ofpfr; of the iwo line-:: , cui - vance at certain distances fioai eaeh cJher *;y \-'hk.TC their heads enter on 2 givjn p imlllel WwiS ; whef 1 fhdr heads to a fiank into, and pvoUing thr>^e !)ne» to aiiv extent: Then, as the columns of fAch Vint have, of course joined each other, the \vh»;le *vil) bcj iiK'VUig in 2 columns of lines, ready .to forni by a wheel -up to the flanks, when the object of the movemen.; is jic- complished, which probably may be that of c>at"(iank- ing, or turning the flank of &n mien.y. i ,v If two UneSf marching in column of liw^a tr* iijl.ank. are unexpectedly obliged to make front to xtm vlank^ then the new lines will be composed each of pyrt of the old ones, by forming up to ri^lit and left. !'\ ECHELLON MOVEMEtCTS OP THE UNE. . 1. The J5.CHELLON movements of a. ^reat corps Echellou plaie it ia an advantageous situation to disconcert an '"°^®' enemy, to raq^ke a partial attack, or a gradual retreat. ^^^^^^ Different previous manoeuvres must always have di- ^orps, verted the attention of an enemy, and prevented him .., ., Y2 from _ !■ f ' f ,Strcn«th of V.chelloiis. Obliqne inarch. Kcln Hon formed on diiy divi- sion. I'artial for- inntionx in T'.cliellon. Directing point. hf 324 P A R T IV. from being certain of where the attack is to be made. It may be formed from the center, or from either of the wings reinforced: If successful, the divisions move up into line to improve the advantage : If repulsed, they are in a good situation to protect the retreat. — In advancing, the several bodies move independent, act freely, and are ready to assist : In retiring they fall gradually back on each other, and thereby give mutual aid and support. 2. I'he Echellons of a line are according to its strength, of one, two, or three battalions each. — Though thftrir flanks seem multiplied they are not ex- posed, as they cover each other; and if they are far a^nder, they may be protected by artillery and ca- valry relatively posted. 3. Echellons seen at a distance appear as if a full line ; being short and independent lines, they can the easier march obliquely to out-wing an enemy, or to preserve the points of appui to a wing ; and such movement may not be perceptible to an enemy. 4. The Echellon may be formed direct from line, on a flank or any central division, either marching or halting to front or rear. 5. The whole or only part of the line may be thrown into Echellon and that either to the front or rear.— In the fust case, with a view to gain the flank of an enemy, or obtain a cross Are ; in the second to refuse or cover one's own flank. 6. When the Echellon is unconnected with a line, the advanced flank or division regulates all its move- ments ; when attached to a line, it must depend on the motions of that line. 7. The same general principles of movement and formation apply to ail Echellons similarly formed, however great or small they may be, and whether they are acting to the front or the rtur. 8. EcUellom T H'fc 11 N t. 3^1i 8. Echellonsof half battalions or less move fonvard <^."»<'"»* ''^ by their directing flank, which is always'the one ad- ""■.^''^'^">!^. vanced from, or wheeled to. k^chellons of battalions *^^^.^^ move by their advanced Serjeants. Echellons* of seve- Echcllons ral battalions move in line each by its own centei , an '»» niove- the whole by the battalion next the directing flank. •"*-*"^- 9' By at any time altering the Echellon th^ leading Cliange of division may be changed, and instead of one flunk the ^! k^"'^ other may be made the advanced one : Or, instead of (jivisiom of an Echellon formed from a flank, it may be converted the Echrl- into an Echellon formed from the center ; this is tf- luu. fected upon any named division, by the relative and perpendicular movements of the others to front or rear. In this operation when the Echellon is a direct one, ' the divisions of it will exactly pass each other's flank: when it is an oblique one, which has been formed by wheeling, a part of each in passing will necessarily be intersected by the one precedin;: it, and must therefore double in passing, and afterwards extend into its pro- per place. A. ^ju wx S. IQo. When a conmkrahle Line changes to an Obliijue Position by the Echellon Af arch of' Companies. ^ , 1 . If fhc new line inierseets anj/ paif of the old line. — ^The battalion so intersected will make its change Fig. of position on that (ixod point flank or central {H. 1 jp. l6l.;) and all the »)tliers will march in 3'xhcllon, whether forward or bftckward, to their respective points in the new line, before they successively begin to form in it. {S. l62.) 2. If the new line infersecfs the prolongation of the old line. — A point will be given in tlu; new line where the leading (lank is to be placed. The leading divi- sion n ill }i(> wliccicd so that il may move jh.'I j'cndicular .'«»( .ri V .1 m ,M .,A 326 FART IV. Fig. 79, on that, ppinti and all the other diviyipos of the line will whed up the same number of paces': the whole wjU march up in Echellon, regarding their leading flank as a moveable center ; and as each battalion arr rives at the new line it will halt, and foim in it by a * new interior arrangement. (5.157.) In th^se changes of position, the whole Echelons /offline are situated, and may be considered relatively • the sjtiVje as the platoons or Echellons of a battalion : ■J'»,fl>K»i-. M> the wholfc move together and connected at the ordi- nary ijtejp ; each battalion arrives successively at its point in the new line, and each as soon as it arrives begins its formation? on it.: So that whether it is the battalion or a line which so changes, the march is made with precision, and each Echellon forms up in succession. IV I'i- J; .11 . 111 fi ■.'vl t ! lif- 86. *''. S. 196. When the Line marches obliquely t outzvards in Echellon of Companies, and changes Position ifiwards to move upon a Flank which it has gained. The iine formed and halted m«rcbes to the flank in Echellon of companies {S. 135.) forms in line pa- rallel to the one it cj^uitted (JS. 156:) and if it then instantly makes an oblique change of position (S. 159.) it will be placed in a situation to marclpforward with the greatest advantage on the weak point of the ene- my. Or, according to the distance from the point of attack, the line, after resuming its parallel situation, may move forward a given space, then make its oblique change of situation, and again march on in the new direction it has acquired on the enemy's flank. II" 5. \97. V .', i . THE LINK. 327 tiir, .*5;i.-. S. 197. JVhen from Line parallel to an Et2emi/t considerable Echellons advance from a Flank to the Front, The divisions of the line and the distance of Echel- Fig. lis. Ions being announced; the flank Echellon moves on ; 119. when it has taken the given number of paces, the next one follows, and thus successively till the whole is in motion ; the whole halt, when the leading Echellon halts. 1. Two under-officers from each following Echel- lon will march in the line of each preceding one, so as to stop (when the preceding one does) in its just prolongation, and at the puints 8t which the inward Fig. lis. Hank ami center of the fullowing one is to be iialted when it is required to move up into line, and whose position intuch line must be thereby easily and accu- rately determined. If the Echellon is composed of more than one battalion, the others, when such de- tached under-officers stop, will send forward to mark also their several centers in the prolonged time. 2. It depends alone on the conductor of the leading Echellon when it halts, to give it such a direction that its prolongation shall pass before the enemy's front ; and if the others are to move up into line, and are then within reach of the enemy's me, it is evident how much care each ntust take, not to throw forward its outward flank, and be thereby exposed to an enft> lade. l!r 3. Notwithstanding every measure taken to obtain exact parallel lines, the following Eclicllons must, and on the march will be guided by and conform to the leading one ; their great object is to preserve, in moving on, their parallel and relative situations, their ordered distances, and proper flunk interval : in this they are to act in the same manner as when advancina ' ¥4 ill '•1' ;f. ''ff --- fig. 119. 328 PART IV. in line, and having the leading Echellon to guide them, together with the assistance of the mounted of- ficers who attend to their movements, and prevent their outward flanks from being thrown too forward ; they will execute with justness this important ma- noeuvre. The preservation of intervals is also as es- sential an attention, as in the attack in line. 4. Wheti large Echelions having marched forward are to wheel up to their advanced fiank, and form in line oblique to the one from which they departed — the outward flanks which are to be the standing ones, must be halted as soon as each touches the line on which the formation is to be made : and for this pur- pose a line must be ready marked by advanced officers (prolonged from the leading Echellon) on which such flank is to halt, and on no account to pass it Each Echellon forms in line by a change of position on that flank : but if there is not a previous arrangement of distances, and a degree of doubling of each in propor- tion to the intended obliquity of the line, there will be increased intervals between the Echelions. Fig. 1J4. S. 1^8. fFhen a Line formed otif and be- yond an Enemy's Flank, moves to the Attack in great Echelions. The Echellon which is then placed perpendicular to the point of the enemy's flank will move on, the rest will successively follow it from each hand, and at their prescribed distance; the Echelions on one flank will be refused, and on the other they will advance beyond the leading one, to envelope the enemy. From whatever situation of Echelions placed St " the others immediately takfng new relative positions \o conform to it. — - -..- a body is placed in; a change in those Echelions may be in- stantly produced, by altering the leading one, and all the others immediately taking new relative positions 5. 199. THE LINE. 3^9 S. 199' ^hen a Line formed in Front of, and obliquely to the Enemy, is to move forward from a Flank to the Attack in great Echellons parallel to the Enemy. The number of Echellons and strength of each being ascertained and announced, the Echellons will natu- rally be formed to and led by the advanced flank. As t)ie oblique Echellons of a battalion are formed by the wheels of each company ; so the oblique Echellons of a line are formed by wheeling up the 8th file of each flank company of each Echellon a given number of j)aces, and then correctly dressing the company to it ; the other companies of the battalion or body which compose the Echellon, wheel each their 8th file half that number of paces, dress up to it, and the whole march and successively line upon the prolongation of the given one, proceeding as in the Echellon change of position of one or more battalions on a fixed flank. {S. 159) Great pains must be taken in the correct placing of the flank directing division of each echellon. 1. Il must be observed that when the Echeliom have - been formed from the obiifjueWne, so as to stand parallel to the enemy's front, they will be doubled behind each other in proportion to the degree of wheel made, and that were they to move directly forward to form in line with the leading one, a portion of each would be there- by cut oft", and the general extent of the line reduced. — Toeideavour by obliquing in the course of march- ing to rectify this defect, would be very difficult, and is hardly to be attempted : It must be remedied either by an earlier attention to taking the necessary and greater intervals than usual before forming the oblique line; or, before the whole advances, making the Echellons take gn>und to the flanks, and place them- selves in their proper relative situations, as they would be when formed irom parallel line: Thii done the whole may move on, either from the advanced or re- tired Fig. 120. 121. / c, i> 330 PART IV. I I; 'S I I I Fig. 121. tired flank, and when proper, march up into parallel line: Should this not be done, part of each Echelluu would of course be excluded on forming the general line, and must remain behind it. The line may also be formed (provided the front Echelloii halts in a fili- ation that will allow it) by each other one at that in- stant making such a change of direction backward on its regulating flank, as will allow it to march perpen- dicularly forward to its proper point in the new line, where, by another change ot direction forward, it will take up the prolongation of the leading Echellon. 2. Whether the original line is formed parallel or oblique to the enemy's front, the Echcllons before marching are always to be placed perpendicular to the line on which they are to more. — From this situation a diagonal march on the enemy's flank may be made, and in such case large Echellons must be broke into companies; but it is an operation difficult in the exe- cution, that would require much circumspection, and if attempted too near would be very dangerous, as the flank thrown up is much exposed to the enemy's enfilade. . • 3. This ATTACK can be at once formed from a co- lumn of march, or the open column of a line, which is prolonging a direction upon, and oblique to that of the enemy. The column will halt, wheel into line, and without any sensible pause the leading flank of each Echellon will wheel up parallel to the enemy, the other divisions of the line will each wheel the half of that space, and move on into their several Echellons, the whole will then be ready to advance led by any named Echellon. The ATTACKS of considerable bodies are almost al- ways conducted on the principles of the echellon: there are few situations where the* whole could act at the same time, or where it would be prudent or eligi- ble so. to do : they are therefore made by fractions of a line well supported and reinforced. S. 200. THE LINE. ■ -■?' '^r S. 200. With respect to the Enemy J and the 331 fl("j#-,. f Parallel, intended Movement; yQ,,^.^; LPosition. 334 PART IV. i i- 4 If ¥ 1 ! ' ^ ! (U Justness of the line. Cadence. Attentions. March. General pace. lutervali. 2. The same principles that direct the march of the battalion direct that of the line; besides which several peculiar observances are required, and in proportion ns dit!iculties increase, must attention be given. 3. No body of troops can advance in line with firm- ness and order, unless the original formation of that line has been perfectly straight, and its correct preser- vation during the march requires every attention. 4. The cadence of the march is not to be altered by particular battalions; but when it is necessary each will lengthen or shorten its step by word from its own commander. 5. The march, and hall, and attention in line of the officers and men of each battalion, are by its own cen- ter; the commander alone regards the regulating bat- talion. — Dressing to a flank is by a separate direction, and given when necessary and proper after halting. ; 6. Battalions in line, marching over heights, or across valleys, will require more time to past) them, than others who are moving on the same extent, but of level ground; in order to preserve equality of front, the last must therefore tfi general be ordered to shorten their step. 7. The march of a considerable body in line can only be at the ordinary step, a quicker movement would produce disorder, nor could artillery well attend its motions when advancing to the enemy : But there are situations, where a brigade or smaller front should move on to a particular object or to an attack at a lei^thy step, or where even a quicker cadence may be required from them. 8. When a line of several battalions' is formed and halted; there is an interval of 12 paces between each for two pieces of artillery : the men are generally dressed to a flank ; ranks are closed up ; the whole staod ready for movement : and for which the direct- ing Serjeant of each has prepared himself as required in the sit^le battalion. ' ' S. 201;. Lt. THE LINE. 335 ^. 201 . JVhen the Line is to march in Front, One of the battalions is named as the regulating one, to whose movements all the rest are to conform. — The Commander of the line is himself with that battalion; every precaution, as already prescribed, is taken to ensure its perpendicular march, and its directing ser^ jeants are ordered to adrance. THE LINE r At a Caution quickly circulated, that WILL AXi- THE LINE WILL ADVANCE, the direct- VANCE. ing Serjeants of each other battalion move out their C paces; it is almost impossible that they should not halt m perfect line ; but if any small alteration is necessary, the Serjeants on either side of the regulating one, being from that last ordered to move forward or back- ward as much as appeai-s necessary for this correction, will, together with the regulating one, give a line to which all the othei-s will immediately conform. The Directors of the march being thus placed pa- rallel to the line, must take care that their bodies are perfectly square to the froiit, and they will again re- mark their near points of march, for they must not look out for distant ones, but take such as accidentally occur on the ground ; those of the battalion of direc- tion are not liable to be altered, but all the others are to be considered only as relative helps to begin the march, subordinate to those of the regulating batta- lions, and liable to be changed from the instant that they appear to the commander of the battalion to pro- duce a movement which does not correspond with the regulating one, whose march is here supposed accurate, and as justly taken as possible; for, should that battalion take a false direction, universal disorder must i i\ V '■ y 336 PART IV. * m I must take place, unless it immediately assumes and perseveres in a true one, perpendicular to the front of the general line. From the circumstances in which lines must gene- rally be expected to move, as thick weather, smoke of cannon, dust, &c. &c. it is evident tUat distant objects of march cannot be looked for or taken, nor any other observed than such as are near, and derived from the eye and the squareness of the body moving upon them. The Commander of each battalion is ten paces be- hind the rear rank, in the file of the directing serjeant, and will there remain; his adjutant is behind the flank next that of direction, and the major is behind the other flank. — The commander of the line, or some person that he appoints, is near the directing serjeant of the regulating battalion, and with' coolness and judgment may m«ke such signal to the serjeant of a neighbouring battalion as will gradually bring him forward or backward, and by then being a direction to the others, will tend to preserve the parallelism of the line; but this correction is not to be attempted \vithout great and gradual discretion, and so as not to occasion any considerable alteration to a flank of the line. At the word MARCH given to the bat- MARCH. C J talion of direction, and rapidly repeated, J each battalion at the same instant is put in ^motion by its respective center. .:/ From the first moment of mpvement the quickest and greatest attention must be given by the command- ing oflficer, to observe whether the direction of the re- gulating battalion is just ; this will be seen in the course of 20 or 30 paces ; for, if the rest of the line is mov- ing steadily, and that this battalion is closing to one flank, and opening to the other, its direction must be changed accordingly by advancing a shoulder; but if the whole are steady, or that the battalion is not altering within itself, or with respect to the general line, its di- -; ij , ,;^ ■ "- . . rection THE LINE. 337 rection must be persevered in and not afterwards changed. Till this circumstance is ascertained with respect to the directing one, and which must be im- mediately done, its contiguous battalions will make no alteration in their position. ^ 2. The Regulating battalion must be regarded as infallible, the commander of the line watches over it, and from the moment that its direction is ascertained, the commander of caw^ other, and their directing ser* jeants, are to consider their movements as subordinate to it, and to conform accordingly : it is the helm which guides the line, and must not change cadence, nor will it lengthen or shorten its step, but from una- voidable necessity, and by particular order. 3. The instant communication of the word march is particularly important, that the.advanced Serjeants nf the whole may step ofl^ together, and thereby main- tain their line parallel to the one they quitted, and which becomes the principal guide for their battalions : each preserves its 6 paces from its advanced serjeant ; this distance is to be kept by, and depends on, the re- placing officer next to the colour, who covers the di- recting serjeant; and if these trained Serjeants do step equally, and in parallel directions to each other, they must be dressed themselves in line, and of conse- quence the centers of their following battalions. 4. But as the Flanks of battalions are apt to be be- hind their centers, the majors and adjutants will par- ticularly attend to this, and also the flank officers of each battalion, who, being unconfined in theirpersons, may preserve themselves in the general line of the co- lours. When a flank officer observes that the line drawn from himself, through the colour of his batta- lion, passes before the general line of colours, he may conclude that he himself is too much retired ; but when such line passes behind the line of colours, he may conclude he is too much advanced, and will regulate himself accordingly. The great object in movement is to have the whole of each battalion perpendicular to Z tb« 4«i| 338 PART IV. , t Fi ! the direction it marr'jes upon, the whole of the several battalim^s in cne suaight line, and their several march- ing directions parallel to each other. 5. Ah tlie movement of fhe directing battal-on Is in- fallible, and must be conformed to, and as the preser- vation of intervals is the fivst and principal attention in the march in line, it is to that object, and of conse- quence to the direction of the march, that the exertion of the commanding officer of the battalion must be turned, and therefore the preservation of his interval, from the directing hand, is what will determine and regulate every alteration • he orders, and from the wftrning of his adjutant he will be always apprized when the interval begins to increase or diminish. As to the other Hank, he need never look towards it, that must nect^ssarily follow and accommodate itself to the « olours, under the correction of the major; but, pjie- vious to making any alteration, he is quickly and dt- cldedly to ob'iei ve whether the error aiises in his own battalion, oi whether it originates in one nearer than hiujselfto lh;it of direction, and which the battalion that alone Ikis closed or opened to one flank will na« tnrally remedy, by the am. er movement, without afltcting the order of the rest of the line. 0, 'J'lie rea^ulatiii'j: battalion being supposed on the rii:^ht, the comiiiander of any other subordinate batta- • lion, who linds himself closing the interval to the right, and that he ought to correct it, will instantly order the directing Serjeant niGHT SHOULDER forwap"^ j or, it hf is opening from the right, he will ordt left shoui.jm;k foknvakd ; these changes the Serjeant makes by a small but gradual alteration in his own position, and of coursemust chaiigehispoinis of march towards the crdercd hand — the di grre of such change it is impossible to ascertain by wonlsj but by the sub- Btquu)t movcmeiU of the battalion, the commander must farther correct it, if nectssary ; it must in all Kituatiiuis l)e very ; n)all, aid will be proportionally gi taler or bUiUlh r, as made siouucr or later alter begin- ning ./ THE LINE. 339 nitig to advance, or from the la^t time of correction. If, for example, before he has marched 20 or 30 pace!), the Serjeant is ordered to change his direction, he may conclude that he had taken one considerably wide of the true perpendicular j whereas, if it is ordered, after he has advanced 1 00 or 1 50 paces, he may judge that be has deviated but little from it. When such change of direction has affected the first object, a very small counter-change will be generally required to preserve the distance gained and the required front. — The re- placing otficer and colour in the center of the battalion will, on each command of change given to the di- recting Serjeant, make such relative movement as i* to necessary correspond with his new position. 7. When a battalion is marching in a true direc- tion, but that occasioned by the fault of others, an opening from, or closing towards, the regulating bat- talion comes from that hand, and must be complied with, the word oblioue (to the right or left) is given; the battalion without losing its parallel front, or eyes being altered, obliques till it receives the word for- ward, when the crossing of the step ceases ; and the directing serjeant proceeds in full front, but in a line parallel to the one he quitted, and removed from it as far as the line did indipe. 8. Should a 'jattalion from any partial reason, be behind or before the line — It will receive the words SiL? OUT, or STEP SHORT, and when the line is re- gained, the word okdinary. Q. In correcting the movements of battalions in the itiemy whom its fire may have shaken, for disorder must attend iti^un- Gonnected movements. m . 1 1 »* * «^ 1 .S*. i203. Jllien the Line is to retire. " When the Line is to retire — the necessity of its belong previously correctly dressed is full as essential as when it is to advance; if that preliminary is not taken care of, its movements must be disordered in proportiDU to its extent. — The several battalions will prepare for the re»reat in the manner prescribed by tiie single one, by receiving the caution that the line ivill retire, and then hy facing to the right about. f But, as there may not always be time to give it the wished-for degree of ex- actness before the lietient^tgnM,, such aids may be applied as will greatly as- sist in the course of its movement.— On the caution >hat thJi: line will HKTiRE, the directing serjeauts, ike. move to the rear (i paces, taking their several directions as already prescribed, onv of the colours next the regulating battalion will be considered as a fixed point, the colour ot the regulating bat- talion will then be placed, so that tne •^ prolongation of the line which nniteiS I the two shall give the required front of Z 4 the I THE LINE , :■; WILL KETIKE. ^ -yMM^ '-.f V.i ri»i *4 ) i .4 •>r< '■ .f ^SM0 o' ■ii- IP' 344 PART IV. n ii-»' H. ABOUT FACE. MARCH. HALT, FRONT. the march ; the other advanced Serjeants atid colours, without regard to distance from their respective battalions, will place themselves on this line. — ^Theline then FACES to the right about.— At the word m^rch, the whole move on, the advanced Serjeants preserving their position and line, and the battalions by degrees acquire their just distance of 6 paces from them. When the Line, in moving to the front, halts and renews its march, without any previous dressing, the same method may, without delay, be employed to re- gulate its advanced Serjeants before the word march is given. f prAen the Line is to front each bat- talion receives the word halt — front, and immediately faces about; if it is then to move forward, the colours and Serjeants are ordered to advance before the front rank, and are there correctly lined, ready to conduct his march.—* j But it it is to remain halted, the dressing I is then ordered in the manner already (^ prescribed. I. Notwithstanding every direction that can be given for the march of the line in front, the success of its execution will totally depend on the complete dexterity and training of its component parts; on the quick eye and ready decision of the commanders of battalions } on the accurate cadence, length of step, and lines of march, taken by the several aavanced Serjeants, and by the battalions ^ together with the perfect squareness of each individual person ; all these justly combined are nect-ssary to prot- .re that precision which is not unattainable, and is so essential in this most difficult and important movement. For the halt taking place near to the enemy, and when the firing should begin, thereisnolimeihen torectiryenors,and re-dress the line, but every thing must remain in the • situation ,1 .'»l 1^ THE LINE. S45 situation of that instant : and though a line a little ir^ regularly halted may not be deficient in fire, yet it will present exposed flanks of battalions, and will not be in a state to advance farther without disorder, or without first correcting its front, even should an ene- , my give way. .,■■. 2. Although no Caution should ever be given before -. > the HALT of the single battalion, yet it might some- times help to assist that of the line, if there was not a danger that, in permitting it, the march of the line would be habitually made with less accuracy, trusting to this correction, than if an instant halt was always to be expected j for this ought to be required of a line of any given extent ; and experience has shewn that it is to be attained when made with great atten- tion and on just principles. 3. Ec/itl/o/is of attack have generally a considerable front, as of three or four battalions, and equal to that of the part of the body, against which they are directed. — But was a Li/ie, in order to render its movements easier, to advance up to an enemy's line in echellon of battalion, retired five or six paces behind each other, although perhaps the intervals might be taken with surticent correctness, yet in such situation flanks would be liable to be thrown up, the general line not so well attained, and the bcittalions as they halted would be exposed to an oblique, as well as direct tire, till the others came up. The first part of a movement in front may be made in Kchellvn of batialions, but the Line should be completed before the last steps of it ap- proach near to an enemy; for, nothing can then sup- ply the place of or be depended on, but the accurate March in Line, acquired from attentive habit, and just training. 4. // ch(nige\t\ thedirectionof aline, when thewhole Ci-mcr of is in movement, can never be considcrablr; and must "'f^^^'*""' be made gradually, with great attention, and on the same principles as those of the battalion. {.S. 169.) 5. When the line is advancing in full front, or in Music. Echellon, for any considerable distance, the Munic of one Jf 1 i It '; ) ,1 ¥\ \ |«. i H ••'5 1 H 'itear rank lengtlien- ing out a line. i946 P A R T IV. one regulating battalion may at intervals be permit- ted to play for a few seconds at a time, and the drumg of the other battalions may be allowed occasionally to roll. 6. Altbough a single battalion may, by opening lis companies and files, /rom 3 deep form 2 deep, by in- troducing its rear rank into the other two, yet a con- siderable line posted, which is to be lengthened out to one or both flanks by its rear rank, must to greater fl^dvantage perform such operation, by each company wheeling the sub-divisions of its rear rank backward, and facing to the hand they are to march toj the last rank of each company closes up to its first ; the sub- divisions of each battalion move up to open distances from their respective head ones, and from each other : officers from their rear are appointed to command them J those of each, or of every two battalions being considered as a battalion, they march on in column and prolong the line. By this mode of lengthening out the line, the tvvo front ranks remain undisturbed, and they protect the movement which is made unseen behind them. S. 204. PVhen a coiisiderahle Line has to pass a Bridge or Dejile. I . It will proceed in the mas)>ner prescribed for (and as if it was) a single battalion, in pasMng to front or rear. Line pas- 2. When there are several bridges or defiles to be sing defiles at once passed, the line will be divided into relative portions, each composing a passing column. 3. "Whensuchmovcmentsareperformed in presence ef an enemy, thesafr'vand protcciion of them by :. ^ artillery THE LINE. B47 artillety and posted troops^ is a matter of previous dis- position. 4. As the lines of infantry are generally formed not nearer than ] S or 1500 paces from an enemy's posi- tion^ unless peculiar circumstances of ground favour a closer approach, there will often therefore be such ob- stacles to moving on, as besides the partial ones occur- ring to parts of battalions, may oblige large portions of the line to be again broken. This becomes a mat- ter of particular arrangement, in \^hich the great ob<* ject is the subsequent quick formation of the troops, and where Considerable close columns, or redoubled lines of battalions at small distances w:ill he employed. Soch situations are always hazardous if the enemy is so posted as to profit of the movement of passing, or if favourable ground, and a superior artillery, do not oblige him to keep at a considerable distance. :; :> 5. Where defiles are to be passed in approaching the position of an enemy, the mouths of thena must be strongly occupied; the column of march must pass on the greatest front thtry vriU allow of, be pre- viously arranged, well closed ap, and ready to deploy in an instant. Advancing lines. Columns of march. «Tf' swr.oj flftor 6. When in presence of an enemy, a retiring line Retiring is to break, and to pass defiles in one or more columns, ''"". moch steadiness and disposition are required.— The Kme approaches near to the defiles before it fronts; '^ the object is to pass quick, but without disorder; ^ commanding grounds are previously occupied, anxl flanks are covered; if bridges are to be passed, pro- tecting artillery will be placed on the oiher side. 'i ■HM S. 205. V, 348 PA R T IV. : "J li General atteiUioiis. i, A^. 205. When the Line advances or retires by half Battalions y and fires. (M . If the line is in march and advancing-^Oa the order from the officer commanding the line, the left wings HALT, and the right one continues t6 march 15 paces, at which instant iht word march being given to the left wings, the right at the same time are or- dered to HALT, FIRE, and load, during which the left march on and pass them, till the right wings, being loaded and shouldered, receive the word march, on which the left ones halt, firb, &c. and thus they alternately proceed. 2. If the line is in march and retiring-^Thc right wings are ordered to halt, front, and when the left ones have gained 15 paces, and receive the word halt, front, the right wings are instantly ordered to firb, load, face about, and march 15 paces be- yond the left ones, where they recsive the word halt FRONT, on which the left wings fire, Hcc. an^ thus alternately proceed. 3. In addition to the battalion directions (S. 177.) there must be a regulating battalion named, by the half battalions of which each line will move, halt, and fire : The commander of each line will be with such half battalion, and in giving bis several commands must have an attention to the general readiness of the line, especially after loading, that the whole are pre- pared to step off together at the word march. The filing of the advanced wing succeeds the march, or the MALT, FRONT, of the retired wing instantly; and each half battalion fires independent and quick, so that no unnecessary pauses being made betwixt the firing words, the fire of the line should be that of a volley as much as possible 3 and the whole being there- * , - bv THE LINE. 349 by loaded together, will be ready for the next com- mand of movement. In these firings of the line ad- vancing or retiring, the two first ranks will fire stand- ing* and the rear rank support their arras, 4. In this manner also may the alternate battalions of a line advance or retire, and when the whole are to form, and that the last line moves up to the first, every previous help of advanced persons will be given to ensure its correctness. S. 206. Firing in Line, 1 . The chief object of fire against cavalry is to keep Objoci of them at a distance, and to deter them from the attack j ^"^'-'• as their movements are rapid, a reserve is always kept up. But when fire commences against infantry, it cannot (consistent with order and other circumstances) be too heavy or too quick while it lasts, and till the enemy is beaten or repulsed. 2. The fire of 3 ranks standing is hardly, with our present arms, to be required, especially if the ground should be broken, and that the soldiers are loaded with their knapsacks. ... 3. Where infantry are posted on heights that are to DclpniUe be defended by the fire of musquetry, the front rank fue. will kneel, that onvthird of the fire that may be given should not be lost, for otherwise the rear rank in such situation could not sufiiciently incline their pieces to raze the slope. As soldiers generally present too high, and as fire is of the greatest consequence to troops that are on the defensive, and who are posted if possible on commanding grounds, the habitual mode of firing , • should therefore be rather at a low level than a high one; and the fire of the front rank kneeling, being the 1( ^, ^^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 £■» 1^ ■» lU a 2.2 : 112 12.0 I.I ^^^"^^^ '^i-v' ^> ri // Fh0togra{jiic Sdenoes Corporalion 4^ ^' s> ^- iXt^'" 4^ <^ 33 WKT MAIN STRMT WnSTM.N.V. 14910 (7U)t73-4»03 9iO PART IV. Ill line udvHiicing. Platoon tiriiij;. Filu firing. ObViquo firing. ') Kegulnrilv ut° tiring. Hie most efficacious as being the most razing, should not be dispensed with when it can be safely and use- fully employed. 4. When infantry marches in line to attack an ene- my, and in advancing makes use of its fire; it is per- haps better to tire the two first ranks only standing, reserving the thiid, than to make the front rank kneel and to fire the whole j but volleys fired at a consider- able distance, or on a retiring enemy, may be given by the three ranks, the front one kneeling. 6. A line posted, or arriving at a fixed situation, will fire by ptatuoiis, each battalion independent, and such firing generally commencing from the center of each. The first fire of each battalion will be regular, and establish intervals; after the first fire each pla- toon shall continue to tire as soon as it is loaded, in* dependent and as quick as it can, 'till the battalion or line is ordered to cease. 6. Behind a parapet, hedge, or abbatis, the two first ranks can only fire, and such fire may he Jile Jiring, deliberate and cool, the two men of the same file al- ways firing together: It may begin from the right or left of platoons, and should be taught in situations adapted to it, not in open ground. — Should the para- pet, hedge, or abbatis, be but little raised, platoon firing may be used. 7. Oblique ^ring by battalions is advantageous on many occasions, as when it is proper, or that time does not allow to give an oblique direction to part of a line, or that their fire can in this manner be thrown against the opening of a defile, the flanks of a column, or against cavalry or infantry that direct their attack on some particular battalion or portion of the line. a. As long a« the fire by b.ittnlion, half battalion, or companies, can be kept up regular, it is highly ad- vantageous, and can be at any time stopped; but abould file-firing be allowed, and once beguo, unless troops THE LINE. •fti troops are exceedingly cool and well disciplioed, it will be difficult to maku it finish, and to make tbein ad- vance in order. 9. ^Vl1en a line halts at its points of firing no time is to be lost in scrupulous dressing, and the firing is instantly to commence. But a line that halts and is not to fire, or when its firin|p ceases after the halt, may immediately be ordered to dress from colours to colours. 10. The attention of the officers and non-commis* sinned officers of the rear to the locking rp of the ranks in firing, cannot be too often repeated, v >' ■ 6' 207. Jl'hcn the Square or Oblong is composed oj more than one Battaiion, 1. Two battalions may form column of compa- Pi'. 110. B. nies, each behind its inward flank one, and close the interval between them. The oblong when formed will be six deep, if the companies are at half distance and wheel outwards by sub- divisions, excepj the 2 first and 2 Inst which close and face outwards: The grenadier and light com panics may be considered as making no part of the oblong, but be applied accord- ing to circjnmstanccs. 2. If a, greater degree of ppncfl is required in the interior of the figure, the side columns will be of sub- divisions, and lormed behind the 2d or 3d compji^y from the mward flank; a proportionable number ot the last companies will compohe the rear facf ; the ob- long whf n formed will be a deep, and the grcnadi* r and li^ht companies will be in the inltrior, to be ap- plied as ih found necessary. 3. If?, or mure liaftafiofix uretofotm a sijunre or Y\i. \c\^.V. ohIivg'-U depends on circumstances what part of the IIO.C. line, ,t \ \ , I \\ i 1 ■'I h t'. I )l] i I k w 352 PART ir. y A »U line, whether flank, or center, composes the front face, but the line is sub-divided accordingly, and the parts of it protecting each other in the movement, inarch in echellon or column to take up their different situations. The flank faces when the square marches will move in columns of sub-divisions. — fFhen the square is halted; the 2 flank sub-divisions of each face wheel back the quarter circle, and obtain a cross fiie at the angles: The grenadier anct light companies are teady to reinforce any particular part. H^hen the re- tiring square has arrived at a point where it can di- minish in safety, the rear face may halt and front in- wards; the side faces continue their march in column, and their heads if nece&sary unite; the front fnce halts, fronts, when it arrives at the rear face< that face then retires in 2 columns, followed by the front face, which in this operation is protected by such post- ed companies as make the rear of the whole. JJ the retiring square arrives at a favourable position, as a wood, heights, ice. which it is to occupy, the flank faces extend along it in columns of sub-divisions, pro- tected by the other two faces, which afterwards take up their own ground. These operations being sup- posed of necessity, will invert parts of the line, which must b« afterwards remedied as opportunity otFers. 4. The square or oblong is a shape which infantry have at all times taken, when obliged in open ground to march in the face of cavalry.— Though the mode of placing one or two battalions in this manner may be prescribed, yet the various formations, of which a great number are susceptible, depend on ground, the position of the troops, the movement of the enemy, &c. and must be made in consequence of the local orders of the coipmander: It is there- fore from circumstances, and from the flexibility of the military order, that in an instant, be will determine into what shape the body which he con- ducts must be throwu.— 'Should such bodies be at THE t I N t. 353 !8 the front jly, and the movement, icir different lare nnarchcs ~~fVhen the of each face n a cross lire )mpanie8 arc W^hen the re re it can di- and front in- ;h in column, le front face !ar facc« that i by the front by such post- /hole. Ijthe position, as a ipy, the flank divisions, pro- tcrwards take ts being sup- e line, which nity offers. tX the satfte time liable to the united attacks of a very superior infantry or artillery ; such situation would be triticul indeed, and from which nothing but the most determined resistance could extricate them. f CHEQUERED RETREAT OF THE LINE. 1. ALL Manffurres of a Corps retiring, are infi<» nitely more difficult to be performed with order, than those in advancing. They must be more or less ac- complished by chequered movements : one body by its number or position, facing and protecting the re- treat of another ; and if the enemy presses hard, the whole must probably front in time and await him; as the ground narrows or favours, different parts of the corps must double; mouths of defiles and advantageous posts must be possessed ; uy degrees the different bdlies must diminish their front, and throw themselves into column of march when it can be done with safety. 2. The chcqttered retreat, by the alternate battalions or half battalions of a line going to the rear, while the others remain halted, cover them, and in their turn retire in the same manner, is the quickest mode of re- fusing a part of a corps to the enemy, and at the same time protecting its mov(>ment, as long as it continues to be made nearly parallel to the first position. 3. If six battalions are in line, the 2d division or the three even ones (2d, 4th, O'th,) counting from the right, will go to the right about, retire in line about 200 paces, and then halt front, having carefully pre- «. .g- served their intervals. The two outward battalions '*' of the retiring ones will each, when it first faces about, form a flank of its outward platoon. As soon as the second division begins to retreat, all the batta- lions of the first one will immediately throw back A a their 1 'I 1 yf .*^j^-^ \$ilf'^'**' 3oi P A ;i T IV. il ^ / ,•>. I' their wing platoons l-8th of the circle, and thereby when necessary procure a cross fire in the intervals, and along the front. 4. When the 2(1 division fronts, the first one moves up its flanks, and is ordered to retire through the intervals, and to form at an equal distance in the rear: As soon as the first division arrives near the second one, that second one begins to fire by platoons stand- iivj, in the same manner as the first hath already done. 'I'he uing platoons of all the second division batta- lions place themselves on the flank, as soon as the first division hath passed them, and remain so, till their turn of retiring is again come. 5. During the retreat, should favourable heights or situations present themselves to either of the divisions, they should be for the time occupied by the most con- tit^uous battalions, who will halt or incline as is nc- cessary, .without scrupulously adhering in thatcase to the alignement, or intervals ; and any battalions that may happen to possess an advanced height, should thrMT their wings back, and nligne them on their neighbouring battalions, that they may be flanked by such battalions. (). The retiring division will move by a directing battalion, and any faults in the halt of the line can t^'asily and must be corrected, before the other division arrives at it. 7. The second retiring division having the intervals of the first to pass, and to move on, as a guide, can have no difficulty in its movement or direction. 8. During the retreat should any of the flank pla- toons be ordered to preserve their flank position, such |11atoons will then march in file. .9. The operation is repeated till the commanding ofTicer halts and fronts a retiring division in the inter- vals of a standing one. 10. /» ■.^«>. THE LINE. *55 10. In the course of the chequered retreat, a position ohfifitte to the original one may be taken vp, — The divi- sion of the line which is to retire, after facing; to the rear, will immo liatcly wheel up its phitooiis ( ) paces, according to the degree of obliquity which will be re(|uired for the line, it will theu march on in this echellon position, and when ordered, form as before directed (S. 157.) to the leading battalion, and front; Fig. 1^6. Ji. The other division of the line, when it is to retire, will perform the same movement, the battalions form- ing in their proper intervals, and completing the line as they severally arrive at it. — Or the retiring division, after facing to the rear, will march on, till arrived at the distance where one flank is to be posted, it will there halt, and upon that flank instantly make a change of position by the Echellon march, and then front : The other division will then retire in the same manner, till it arrives at the posted one, and it will there instantly commence its cnange of position, take its place in the intervals, and front in full line. — From this situation the parallel retreat may continue to be made, or a new oblique direction be again re- quired. 11. In situations of retreat not very critical, the oblique position which the retiring division takes up, may be quickest and easiest gained by the filing of platoons. 12. In the chequered retreat, the following rules must be observed. — The battalions of the division nearest the enemy, will form flanks as soon as there is nothing in their front to cover them ; but the other divisions will have no flanks except to the outward battalion of each. The battalions always pass by their firoper intervals, and it is «. rule in retiring, that the "^ eft of each will always pass the right of the neigh- bouring one. Whatever advantages the ground oflers are to be seized, without being too critically tied down to intervals, or to the determined distance of each re- treat. — The division next the eneifly must pass in front, through the intervals of the division immedi- >^ . A a 2 ately ^'! 3Ji P A K T IV. \ ately b(>hind, and any battalion that finds it necessary inuht incline for that purpose. — The retiring division must step out, and take up no more tune than what is necessary to avoid confusion. The division nearest the vut^my fires by platoons standing: the flanks of its battuli(»ns <»nly fii|^when the enemy attempts to push through the intervals; when that division retires, it tires on skirmishers by men detached from its light company if present, or from platoons formed of rear rank men of one or two of the companies, and placed behind the flanks of the battalions. But should any of its battalions be obli;i;cd to halt and to fire, a shorter step must then be luken by the iine ; and should the enemy tineati'n to enter at any of its in- tervals, besides tlic tire of its flanks, such platoons of the line behind it us can with safety, must give its support. 13. Tf a line with reserves finds it necessary to re- treat in face of an enemy — The alternate battalions, vkn<\ the reserves will retire 200 or 300 paces, and then front. The other battalions will then retire : and when they join the first, the reserves also will again march, and front at like distances, the reserves always leading the retreat. — This wRl continue, till it is proper or safe to break into column of march ; the cannon and skirmishers of the whole, covering the front of the retiring line. ' 14. Tuo full lines will generally make their retreat hy passing alternately through each ©ther.— ~Orthey may retire by the checjuered movement of each line. 15. Tj by the chequered movement ; and that th^ ilistance between the lines is 300 paces, each will give to its second division 150 paces for its retreat, and thus divide the distance. — When the second di« vi&ion of each line hath retired and fronted; the firs) divi!>ion of the first line will retire through the intei^ vals of its own second division ; it will tfien, when it arrives at the fii|t division of the second lint, pass by files through the battalions of that division; and .in the same manner will it pais through th« intftvalt of tU 1' H E LIN K, 35f the next division ; and when 150 paces in the rear of the whole, the pUitoonii will halt front, und wheel up into line. The 2d division of the first line hav- ing prepared its flanks, be;;ins to retire, us soon as it9 own first division hath passed the first of the second line: that second division will inarch throuj^h tlie in- tervals of that first; it will then proceed and pass by files through the battalions of the second division of the second line; it will continue in that shape, and pass through the intervals of its own first divisicm, which is by this time reformed, :ind when at its 150 paces in the rear of the whole, the platoons will halt, front, and wheel up into line. — Tht* divisions of the second line proceed in their turn exactly in the same manner. rit PASSAGE OF LINES. r i '>j'. In narrow grounds, where there are redoubled lines and in many other situations, it becomes necessary for one battalion to pass directly through another, in inarching either to front or rear. —But this must particularly happen, when a first line, which has suf- fered in action, retires throu<^h, and makes a place tor A second line which has come forward to support it ; — or — the second line remaining posted, when lli« 6rst falls back, retires through it, and thus alterniitely till a safe position is attained. Should the second line be ordered to adxancc, and oc- cupy the ground which the first is to quit — As soon OS it has approached within 20 paces, and halts, the frontline battalions receive the word pass to the rear; sccoml line each platoon is ordered to face to the right, and disen- aJvantv*. gage its head ; at the word march, each platoon moves off in file, a quick step to the rear, and passes straight through the second line. — The olliccrs of thv retirin'^ '^'*» ^*' • A a .'3 line Passage ot a tiriit lino, wIk'h tlie \ ys**'**' 358 PART IV. Fig. 127. IJ. I' P ' Passage of a first line when the second line is posted. Reform- ing the first line by a flank bat- talion. line having been cautioned that they are again to form at 150 or 200 paces from the other line, and having begun to take and count them from the passing uf that line, will accordingly be ordered to halt and front: the oihcers place themselves on the pivot flanks, take their just distances, and aligne to the front of the co- lumn, on the three or four first leading platoons, which will be instantly arranged in a true line by a mounted officer. Wherever the heads of the retreating liles present themselves, the officers of the second line cause four files of their platoons to fall back, and i];.niin to resume their places when the others have passed. — During the march to the rear, the heads of files must preserve their accurate distances from the left, that when the column halts and fronts, it may immediately be in order to wheel up into line. Jf the second remains posted — The ^rst retires in front, till within 20 paces of the second. — At the word, pass by files, each officer turns his platoon to the left — marches quick in file through the second line, and halts fronts, at iiis determined number of paces from that line by word of command. — The pivots of the column are dressed, and the platoons wheel up into line. When a line of several battalions hath passed in this manner ; and fronted in column, it is necessary to dress their pivots correctly before wheeling up into line. The commander of the head battalion will instantly place the pivots of his three first platoons in a true di- rection, and order the officers of his other platoons to line onthem, himself remaining with the head platoon at the point d'appui, will see that this is correctly done. — The first battalion thus steadied, will become a sufficient direction for the second, and every other one to prolong it by their adjutants ; and this operation, though successive from platoon to platoon, and4rom battalion to battalion, may be performed quickly, and correctly ; ^1 THE LIN E. 359 correclly ; if the atljvitnnts are timeously deiacheil, and it' the head of the colutnii is quickly arranged. Should it be thought proper to give the a/ignemrnl R<< I'onn- frotn a central (c,) rather than a flank l)attalion— In j"- >''^' "r^i this case, after hailing and fronting, the platoon pivots ])''|^',JJjJ ^ of the given battalion are from its head accurately i,.miiiion. lined by its commander, in the true direction. — This battalion being placed, from which distances and dress- ing are taken, the others will instantly proceed to line their pivot flanks upon it: those that are behind it will readily do this; those that are before it will And more diiliculty, as they must take their distances from the rear; — to facilitate this, their platoon oflficerswill tace to the directing battalion, and will then succes- sively take their distances and covering from their then I'ig- !-*?• front; as soon as each has acquired his true position he will face about, and make his platoon Join to and dress to him. — The line will then be ready to form by wheeling up to the pivot flank. Should a ncxc position (D.) not parallel, be taken by '"s'^'""; the passing battalions — 1 he commander, with his two a„ oMiqiu- leading platoons, will first enter it, and direct the position. others to regulate their flanks by them ; and if several battalions are passing the second line, the new aligne- Fig. 1*27. inent is thus made easier for them. ir/i€H a height (E,) in the rear is to be croxvncd by (Jiowniug a a retiring line — Each officer must not dress exactly to ''t^igl'i* the platoon that precedes him, but in joining it he must halty and arrange his own in such a manner, that the slope of the rising can be entirely seen and comfllinded, which is here the great object, and would ^'t^' '-^" not be* attained, if the troops were to adhuie to a straight line. A line which hath passed^ will often before forming, throw back a wingj — in order to occupy a particular position, — to prevent the enemy's designs on that wing; or at least to make him take a greater (let«)ur to effect it, — or that he may be obli<;ed to aligne his A a 4 own },: u i 360 PART IV. Refusing a wing. Fig. 128. own on a height which is occupied, and fronn which he may be flanked. :. » . . When the movement is foreseen, and according (o the wing which is to be refused, should the platoons of the line pass — If the left is to be posted, and the right refused, the platoons may pass from their hftf the column will thereby have its left in front, will be mpre readily directed on the point d'appui, and the preservation of distances will be facilitated, as they will then be taken from the front. If the right is to be posted, the platoons may pass from their right. The line (A B,) is here supposed to refuse its four right battalions (D,) after having retired and passed as a column with its left in front. — All the battalions of the line to the left of the fourth, proceed as already directed, and take up their line from the left or head battalion, which, in the course of the movement, is conducted to the point d'appui, where its head is to rest, and from whence the direction of formation is to be friven ; but the left of the fourth battalion be- comes a new point d'appui, upon which the four bat- talions of the right are thrown back into any situation which the nature of the ground and the views of th« commander may require. It may happen where the passing line is in post one flank, and refuse the other, that the officers will have their distances to take from behind ; the original re- medy for this inconvenience has been shewn ; another also tnay be readily applied, which is to halt the whole, at any time after passing, and to countermarch each platoon, which will then cause the future forniltioi) to be taken from the front of the column. • A retiring line may also refuse a wing, by forming in line, very soon after passing, and then taking up an oblique po.sition to the rear, by the echel'^n march, p;- sonie other of the modes already prescrilitrd. wmm ov THE LINE. 30^ . OF SECOND LINES. 1. NO considerable body should ever be formed without a proportion of it being placed in reserve or in second Hne, and more or less strong, according to circumstances. — The movements of such second line will always correspond to those of the first, and it will ftlways preserve its paralleliitm and distance. If the first line makes a tlank, or central change of position, the second must make x change also on such points as will bring it into its relative situation, 2. The march of the second line in front, is regu- lated by its own division or battalion of direction, which moves relatively to that of the first line. — In forming in line it will march upon its own points which are parallel to, and ascertained in consequence of those of the first. 3. When the lines break in columns to the front; the second will generally follow those of the first.— When the march is to the flanks ; the second line will compose a separate column or columns. — When the march is to the rear; the second line will lead i,n columns. 4. The distance betwixt the lines, may be in general supposed eqi^al to the front of two battalions and an interval. 5. Second lines are seldom composed of as many battalions as the first; they are often divided into dis- tinct bodies, covering separate parts of the first Ijne. 6. Second lines will not always remain extended, they will often be formed in column of battalions, or of greater numbers, ready to be moved to any point where their i^istance is necessary. 7. When- 362 PART IV. ( M' 7. Whenever the fiist line breaks and manoeuvres by its rij^htto face to the left, or by its loft to face to the ris^ht— The movements of the sect>nd line are tree and unembarrassed, and it may turn round the nui- na'uvrin" tlank of the first line, and take its new posi- tion behind it, by extending itself parallel to that direc- tion, how oblique soever it may be. 8. The central movement generally required from the second line to conform to that of the first, is equi- valent to that line marching in two columns of pla- toons, from near the center obliquely to the front, and from that situation forming to both tlanksi, 9- The movements of the central columns being ell understood — those of tl are similar in the two lines. well understood — those of the battalions of the wings 10. The officer commanding the second line, must always be properly informed of the nature of the change to be made by the first, that he may readily de- termine his corresponding movements. 11. It rec^ircs much attention— To conduct heads of battalion columns of both lines nearly parallel to their lateral ones, and perpendicularly or diagonally to front or rear, according to the nature of the move- ment. — To determine with precision, and in due time, their points in the new line, that wavering and uncer- tainty of march may be avoided — In great movements to allow the soldiers every facility of motion, without increasing the disiancesof divisions, and to require the most exact attention on entering the new line, and in forming— To avoid obstacles in the course of march- ing, but as soon as possible to re-enter the proper path of ihe cohunn. — VVhile out of that path, the colours of that battalion column may be lowered, (as a mark for the neighbouring column, not to be then entirely regulated by it) and again advanced when it regains its proper situation. 12. In many cases, and where great concert of movement is not re(|Uiied, a second line may form bat- lalio* i . THE LINE. 36'3 talion columns at half distance, e-ach behinn its flank nearest to the new position, and relative points being prepared, each will march up, and prolong the line. \o. All the battalions of a second line must, at the completion of every change of position, find themselves placed in the same relative situation with respect to the first, as they were in beft)re the commencement of the movement. 14. All chan}i;es of position of a first line are made accordin<» to one of the modes already prescrihe\ard to the platoon d ; the platoon moves its pivot fiank along ■ V the new line followed by all those betwixt it and a, till a arrives at the point a, 2. — The other platoon^ and battalions of the second line move relative!) to the part a, d, the whole performing the precise operation al- ready detailed in the change of position of the line on a moveable central point. S, 185. 2. But in order to accelerate the movement uf the se- cond line in central changes ; a platoon or flank point o, as much beyond a, as a is removed from d, may be taken ; this point is evidently the one which will rest at the point of intersection d, when a is arrived and halted fig. 129. at a, 2.— As soon therefore as the points o, d, are ascer- tained, *- ■♦- THE LINE. 365 taincd, and without waiting for the progressive move* ment of this center part of the line, every thing that is in rear of o, may march and form in the new posi- tion, regarding o, 2, as its leading flank point, and every thing that fronts to d, regarding d, 2, as its lead- ing flank point, will march and form upon it in the new line accordingly. S. l%6, 3. In order the better to ascertain the parallel di- rection of the new second line, two persons separated from each pther about 100 paces, may set out from different points of the new first line, and accurately Fig. t29, pace the known distance of the second ; when tliey halt, the line of their prolongation gives the new di- rection, and also the intersection of the second lines. Or if the first line points on any very distant ob- ject, the second line from the point a, 2, will be readily judged to pass a very little behind that object. i- •f Hi *"4^ *N ..V >UI I ' . •' i 1 t-i' " V 1 •' S. 209. ir/ien two Lines change Position Jhnvardy on a Flank ofthejirsi Line, The direction of the fii*st line being ascertained, Fig 130. that line will march into it by the cchellon march, iS. I9'>- In the* mean time the corresponding flank point a, 2, in the new second line, having been taken, and also the point d, in the intersection of the two lines ; these points serve as the base ot formation. The second line will break into open column feeing to the platoon d, of intersection : the whole will proceed as in 1$. 185, that platoon marching &k>og the nkv* line till a arrives at u, 2 : and when the other battalions which have moved forward artt anew arrangvd in op«n column, they wheel up into lint. ... 5.210. 1 t J •• >'< / 'f i: f i T\e. 131. l'"ig. I.{'.'. 366 PART IV. S. 210. fVhen two Lines change Position backward, on a Flank of the first Line. The direction of the first line being ascertained, that line will march into it, by the echellon movement to the rear, S. 1.95. — The corresponding points a, 2, and d, in the new second line servinc; as a base of form- ation, having been ascertained as well as the point o, that line breaks into open column facing to the point of intersection : The part of the line between a, and o, marches on to the point of intersection, and from thence prolongs the new lines : The part of the line behind o, regarding d as its leading flank point of formation, will march and form upon it in the new line accordingly. .S. 180'. t' S. 211. When txvo formed Lines wheel into open Column^ march to a Flanky change Direction^ and take up a nexv Position. 1. If the new posif ion is a retired one — Both lines wheel into open column (suppose the left in front) and move on. — C. is a point where the head of the first line is to change its direction into tnat of C. D. by wheeling on its pivot tlank : The leader of the second line being apprized of this point, sends forward to ascertain his corresponding point c. and his parallel direction c. d. ; these two points become the base of formation for the second line, and d, is in the inter- section of the old and new lines. — Both columns pro- cced in their Hi-st direction, and when the first line arrives at C. the head wheels on its pivot into tlie direction C. D. followed by the rest of its column ; but the. itecond line then changing its head on th« point c. moves [jimi^ii THE LINE. 367 moves towards it, tliere to enter its corresponding di- rection. — The first line lialts, and such parts of it as are in the new direction remain so ; while the rear of the column by the movement of S. 182, gains the new direction, and by wheeling up forms in line; or, if the ground permits it enters the new line by the echellon march of S. 158. each .division first countermarching by files, and then facing about, so that its rear rank may lead. 2. When the fii-st line halts, if the head division of the second line has nut entered the new direction, it still moves on its point of entry c. prolongs the line till it arrives behimi its corresponding point A. 2. of the first line, it then halts, and also all such others as have arrived in the new direction, while the rear of thecolumn, which since the halt of the first line has been gradually (by obliquing) and regularly throwing itself to the left, places itself in open column, on the new direction, and wheels up into line. 3. When the first line halts, if the head of the second has entered the direction, it moves on till it arrives behind its corresponding point of the fir t one, and the rear of the column obliques to avoid inter- fering with, and to make place for the forming of the first line.— When the head halts, such part of the column as is not in the new direction, gains it by the movement of S. 182. 4. If the head of the first line when it arrives at E. waits till the 2d line arrives at the corresponding point c. they will then proceed equally. — Or, the march of the second line may begin proportionally sooner than that of the first. ' '' 5 Iffhe new position is an advanced one — The first fj™ 135 line changes its direction at C. by a wheel to the re- vei'se hand into C. D. marches on till the head is r halted ; such part of the column as is not in the new line enters it, by the divisions of the column wheeling back into echellon, and then marching up successively into line.-— The second line, which has ascertained its , ^ . corresponding r I {i |>'-i I II 55S ? A U T IV. i By com- pHiiios or otiu'r di- visious. Disndvan- tages of file marcUo correftponding points c. d. moves on, enteri the ne^ direction at d. by a wheel to its reverse hand, and pro- longs the line till it arrives at its flank point, when the whole halt, and the battalions of such part of the to- lumns as are not then in the new direction, gain it by the movement of 5. 182. 6. The second line must take care not to pass its point d. but after arriving at it must wait till the head of the first lint*, which has more ground to go over, arrives equal with it in the new line : it will theii move on. - • 1 1 OF THE COLUMN OF ROUTE. 1. The column of route formed by divisions of the battalion, is the foundation of all great distant movements, and even of evolutions and manoeuvres. — It is in that order that the battalion should at any time be pcnniited to move; that the columns of an army should perform their marches ; that an enemy should be approached; and that safety can be insured to the troops in their transitions from one point to another. — All nuirches are therefore made in column of divisions of the line, and never on a less front than G files where the formation is 3 deep, or 4 files where it is 2 deep, nor does any advantage arise from such column, if it is an open column, exceeding 1() or 18 Hie in front, where a considerable space is to be gone over. 2. At no time whatever ought a column of ma- noeuvre or of route to occupy a greater extent of ground in marching than what is equal to its front when in order of battle; no situation can require it as an advantage. — Therefore, the march- ing of great bodies in file, where improper exten- sion is unavoidable, must be looked upon as an un- military practice, and only to be had recourse to when unavoidably necessary. — Where woods, inclosurei, and ^'HE L IN JE. ""les anfl a u^tr • ' "'^^P* '" a mining ^ "'*" '^" -^*^=*- THE LINE. 371 march. made} no advantage can arrive from them, and there- fore each commanding otiicer, when he arrives near the cau>e, should be assured that it is necessary before he permits the battalion so to double: On all occasions he should continue his march on the greatest front, that> without crowding, the road or overtures will aU low, although the regiment or divisions before him may be marching on a narrower front. 9. All openings made for the march of a column Ov» rtn- s should be sufiicient for the greatest front on which it is <*t murcU. to march, they should all be of the same width, other- wise each smaller one becomes a defile. 10. At all points of Increasing or diminishing the Avoiding front of the march, an intelligent officer, per battalion «>f ditiictil. or brigade, should be stationed to see that it is per- *'"• '|* *'"-* formed with celerity ; and the commandant of a con« " "" * siderable column should have constant reports and in- spections made that the column is moving with proper regularity, he should have officers in advance to ap- prize him of difficulties to be avoided, or obstacles to be passed, and should himself apply every proper means to obviate such as may occur in the march. (And at no time are such helps more necessary than when re- giments are acting in line on broken ground, and when their movements are combined with Uiose of others) — When the column arrives near its object of formation or manoeuvre, the strictest attention of offi- cers and men is to be resumed, and each individual is to be at his post. 1 1 . The great principle on all occasions of diminish- ing or increasing the front of the column in march is, that such part as doubles or forms up shall slacken or quicken its pace^ as is necessary to conform to the part which has no such operation to perform, but which continues its uniform march, without the least altera- tion, as if no such process was going on ; and if this is observed, distances can never be lost, or the column lengthened out. — Unless the unremitting attention and B b i? intelligence i- •v,. 37« PART IV. Import- ance of exactuets in the marcli. Co'imuis nil I their flistaucos. rniiibina- IlollS of march. intelligence of officers commanding battalions anA their divisions are given to this object, disorder and constant stops and runs take place in the column; the soldier is improperly and unnecessarily harassed } dis* ease soon gains ground in a corps thus ill conducted, which is not to be depended on in any combined ar- rangement, is unequal to any effort when its exertion may be required, and is soon ruined from a neglect of the first and most important of military duties. IS. The most important exercise that troops can attend to is the march in column of route. No cal- culation can be made on columns which do not move with an ascertained regularity, and threat fatigue arises to the soldier: A general cannot depend on execution, and therefore can make no combination of time or dis- tance in the arrival of columns at their several points : In many situations an improper extended column 'vill be liable to be beat in detail, and before it can be formed. Troops that are seldom assembled for the manoeuvres of war, can hardly feel the necessity of the modes in which a considerable body of infantry must march and move. 13. The distance of columns from each other dur- ing a march, depends on the circumstances of ground, and the object of that march, with regard to future formations. The more columns in which a consider- able corpii marches, the less extent in depth will it take up, the less frequent will be its halts, and the more speedily can it form in order of battle to the front. 14. On the combinations of march, and on their execution by the component parts of the body, does the success of every military operation or enterprize depend. To fulfil the intentions of the chief every concurrent exertion of the subordinate officer is re- quired, and the b^st ralculated dispositions, founded on local knowledge, must fail if there is a want of that punctuality of execution which every general must trust to, and has a right to expect from the leaders of his columns. ■ 16. The THE LINE. 9T3 Naturo of ni«rclie». 15. The composition of the columns of an army must always depend on the nature of the country and the objects of the movement. — Marches made parallel to the front of the enemy will generally be performed by the lines on which the army is encamped, each marching by its flank, and occupying when in march the same extent of ground us when formed in line. — Marches made perpendicular to the front of the enemy either advancing or retiring, will be covered by strong van or rear guards. — The columns will be formed of considerable divisions of the army, each generally com- posed both of cavalry and infantry ; they will move at half or quarter distance, and the nature of the country will determine which arm precedes. 16. During a march to the front , the separation of General the heads of the columns must unavoidably be consi- "''i^cts m derable; but, when they approach the enemy, they !'i'g'^^y,^^^,/" must be so regulated and directed as to be able to oc- cupy the intermediate spaces if required to form in line. Some one column must determine the relative situations of the others, and divisions must be more closed up than in a rparch to a flanks and in proportion as they draw near to the enemy must exactness and attention increase. The general, in consequence of the observations be has made, will determine on his disposition ; the columns which are now probably halt- ed and collected will be subdivided and multiplied : each body will be directed on its point of formation, and the component parts of each will in due time dis- engage from the general column, and form in line. 17. The safety of marches to the rftfr must depend General on particular dispositions, on strong covering rear objects in guards, and on the judicious choice of such posts as "^"'■c^t's to will check the pursuit of the enemy. In these marches "'"'^' to front or rear, the divisions of the second line gene- rally follow or lead those of the first, and all their for- ^lations are relative thereto. The heavy artillery and B b 3 carriages ,;#,. lii^' iiiip "1"*^-' rj 374 PART IV. carriages of an army form a particular object of every march, an4 must be directed according to the circum- stances of the day. — 1 he safety of the march, by the arrangement of detachments and posts to cover the front, rear, or flanks of the columns, depends also on many local and temporary reasons, but are an essential part of the general disposition. Advantage ot'oflTeiisive raove- iiionts. General Remarks. 1. ALL these Operations in Line, Column, or Echellon are applied according to circumstances — As Counter Movements of Defence — Movements ofprevi" ous Formation — Movements of Attack^2& well as Movements of Retreat. 2. Where there is equal skill in -the execution of movements, the defensive alteration of position is sooner made than the offensive one, as much less ground is gone over to oppose than to attack; the great advan- tage however attending the latter is, that the measure being previously determined on, every thing is pre- pared for rapid execution before the design is obvious ; whereas the counter-movement, depending on the ap- pearance of the moment, requires quick observation, immediate decision, instant arrangement, and a dis- position simple, and that cannot produce hurry and confusion in the execution. It is in these situations that the justness of distances and of the march in co- lumns allows of decisive operations, which durst not be attempted, unless the moving body could be de- pended on as ready at every instant to form up in complete order. Manoeuvre will chiefly operate where an enemy is inferior in number, inexpert in move- ment, weakly posted, and where the weak point is found out and attacked before he can move to Strengthen it. 9. If •Xtiiiiii. THE LINE. 37fl mciits of prt'vious iuritiiition. 3. If the flank of one body ii thrown forward, by Counter- the same means may tbtt of the other be thrown back. JJ'^^'J'^' ^^ —If one body prolongs its line to out-flank, the other with new plates, 7s. 6d. Elucidation of several Parts of His Majesty's Regulations for the Formations and Movements of Cavalry, with 33 plates, 7s. 6d. Manual for Volunteer Cavalry, recommended by His Royal Highness the Commander in Chief, for the use of the several Corps of Yeomanry and Volunteer Cavalry, 3s. Rules and Regulations for the Sword Exercise of the Cavalry, with 30 plates, boards, 7s. 6d. FOR THE INFANTRY. Rules and Regulations for the Formations, Field Exercises, and Movements of His Majesty's Infantry, boards^ 6s. Abstract of the same Work for Non-Commtssioned Officers, 2*, Light Infantry Exercise, 6d. Regulations for the Exercise of Riflemen and Light Infantry, and Instructions for their Conduct in the Field, with Plates of the Manoeuvres and Music, 3s. 6d. General Orders and Observations on the Movements and Field Exercise of the Infantry, is. Instructions for Exercising the Local Militia, 2s. 6d. FOR THE ARMY IN GENERAL. Annual Army List, bound, 14s. Manual and Platoon Exercise, 2s. Information and Instructions for Commanding Generals, and others, is. Act for punishing Mutiny and Desertion, and Articles of War, 5s. 6d. Collection of Regulations, Orders, &c. relating to the Finance of the Army, lOs. 6d. boards. Militia Laws, 7». ^ . '^ BOOKS PRINTED FOR T. EGERTON. Military Books hy various Authors, FOR THE CAVALRY. Remarks on Cavalry, by General Warnery, of the Prussian Hus- sars, with many plates, il. Is. Treatise on the Discipline of Light Cavalry, by Captain L. Neville^ with plates, 43. Instructions for young Dragoon Officers, with plates, 3s. 6d. Instructions for Hussars, &c. by G. H. Rose, Esq. M. P. 3s. Treatise on Military Equitation, with plates, by Lieutenant-Co- lonel W. Tyncl;ile, 7s. 6*d. Instructions and Regulations for Yeomanry and Volunteer Ca- valry, by Colonel Herrics, 2 Vol. I5s. 6d. Address to the Yeomanry of England, by a Field Officer of Ca- valry, 2s. Instructions for the Armed Yeomanry, by Sir W. Young, Bt. 2s. Minutes and Observations for the Use of Gentlemen and Yeo- manry, by William Allen, is. Hints to the Gentlemen of the Corps of Mounted Yeomanry, with plates. Is. Gd. Instructions for the Use of Officers, &c. of the Volunteer Cavalry, by William Penny, 43. Dalbiac's Catechism for young Officers, &c. Ss. Cavalry Review Manoeuvres, by Adjutant Hacket, elegantly en- graved, 5s. FOR THE INFANTRY. Reid's Staff Officer's Manual, detailing the Duty of Brigade Ma- jors and Aides de Camp, &c. 3s. Reide's Treatise on the Duty of Infantry Officers, and the pre- sent System of Discipline, bound, 5s. A Practical Guide for the Light Infantry Officer, illustrated with Plates on an entire new and intelligible Plan, by Capt. T. H. Cooper, 10s. 6d. boards. Treatiseon the Duty of Light Troops, by Colonel Von Ehwald, 69. Instructions concerning the Duties of Light Infantry in the Field« by General Jarry, of the Royal Military College, 4s. Duties of an Officer in the Field, and principally of Light Troops, Cavalry and Infantry, by Baron Gross, 48. Barber's Instructions mr Sharp Shooters,, with Plates, 8s. 6d. The Tactic of the British Army reduced to Detail, uniting in one View the Evolutions of the Battalion, Brigade, and Lioe, by Major Cuninghame, boards, I8s. BOOKS PRINTED FOR T. EGERTON. Russell's Instructions for the Drill, with plates, 7s. 6d. Russell's Movements and Changes of Position of a Battalion of Infantry, with plates, 78. 6d. Russell on the Inutility of the 3d Rank of Firelocks, &c. Is. Cd. Dickinson's Instructions for forming a Regiment for Parade of Exercise, and the Eighteen Manoeuvres, with plates, fis. Smirke's Review of a Battalion of Infantry, with plates, 7s. 6d. The Nineteen Manoeuvres, exhibited at one View, elegantly en- graved. By Captain English, 5s. The Nineteen Manoeuvres explained, by Two Officers of the Bloomsbury and Inns of Court Association, 5s. * ■> The Words of Command for the Eighteen Manoeuvres, accor- ding to the King's Order, Od. Hints for Non-commissioned Officers on actual Service, by Colo- nel Sontag, is. 6d. The Military Catechism for the Use of Young Officers, and Non- commissioned Officers, by Major Doyle, Is. Instructions for Reconnoitring, Is. (id. Fosse on the Defence of Picquets, relative to Service in the Field, is. 6d. • , ■. V Phipps's Military Discipline, with plates, 49. West's Military Figures invented for elucidating the Theory and Practice of Tactics, with Instructions, &c. ll. Is. and ISs. 6d. Exercise of the Long Bow and Pike, 38. ()d, ix^ ' Art of Defence on Foot with the Broad Sword and Sabre, with plates by R. K. Porter, Esq. 10s. 6d. Kelly's Bugle- Horn Sounds, as practised by the 95 lb Rifle Regi- ment, 7s. 6d. A Course of Drill and Instructions for Light Infantry, by Lieute- nant-Colonel Campbell, ds. boards. Scloppetaria, or Considerations on the Nature and Use of rifled- barrelled Guns, (js. boards. FOR THE ARTILLEUY, ENGINEERS, Sic. Antoni on Gun-Powder, Fire- Arms, and the Service of Artillery, by Captain Thompson, ICs. Adey's B(>nibardier or Pocket Gunner, useful to the Army in ge- neral, and to the Service of Artillery in particular, 4s. 6d. Malorti I)e Martemont's Field Fortitication, with plates, 153. Instructions for Military Plan-drawing, with plates, lAs. ' • Landmann's Principles of Artillery, Question and Answer, 4s. Mullcr's Works of Fortification, Attack and Defence, Engineer- ing, Artillery, ^c. in several VQlunic-s, BOOKS PRINTED FOR T. EGERTON. Landmann's Field Engineer's Vade Mecum, 7s. ' Landmann's Principles of Fortification, 3s. 6d. Landmann's Practical Geometry, 7s. fid. Hutton's Course of Military Mathematics, 2 vol. 188. ■ Tielke's Field Engineer, translated by Col. Hewgill, 2 vol. ll. 8s. Tielke's Works, translated by Colonel Crawford, 2 vol. ll. 10s. Officer's Manual in the Field, or a Series of Military Plans, I5s. Essai General de Fortification, et d'Attaque et Defense de« Places, &c. par M, de B***, Ingenieur Fran9ois, 4to. and plates, folio, 41. 1 4s. 6d. Jones's Artificial Fireworks, 7s. ()d. ^ Robin's Gunnery, new edition, 6s. fid. L'Espinasse — Essai sur TOrganisation de I'Armee de TArtillerie, 6s. boards. Horse-Artillery Manoeuvres, from the French of Gen. Kosciusko, 6s. Landmann's Construction of several Systems of Fortification, with plates, 14s. fid. FOR THE ARMY IN GENERAL. James*s Military Dictionary, new edition, bound, 2 vol. ll. 14s. James's Regimental Companion, 2 vol. new edition, bound ll.48. The Soldier's Friend; a new Pocket Vocabulary, in Six Lan- guages, by Capt. Wilson, fis. The Military Cabinet, by Capt. J. H. Cooper, 3 vol. I8s. boards. Armstrong's Practical Observations on the Errors of Generals, Field Officers, &c. &c. 7s. boards. Brigade Major 'is Assistant, containing Orders, Rules and Regula- tions for the Guidance and Discharge of the Duty of that Station, 4s. Reide's Treatise on Military Finance, containing the Pay and Allowances to the Forces on the British and* Irish Establish- ments, &c. ninth edition, 2 vol. bound, lOs. fid. Rules and Regulations for the French Infantry, translated by Lieutenant Colonel M'Donald, with plates, ifis. General WimpfFen's Experienced Officer, or Instructions to his Sons, translated by Lieut. -Colonel M'Donald, 5s. A Treatise on the Art of War, extracted from the Encyclopedia Britannica, with plates, 6s. Military Memoirs relating to Campaigns, Battles, and Stratagems of War, ancient and modern, &c. 12s. A Series of Military Experiments on Attack and Defence, made in Hyde Park, under the Sanction of his R. H.the Commander in Chief, by Lieut. John Russell, yCth Foot, boards, 7s. fid. BOOKS PRINTED FOR T. EGERTON. The Spirit of the Modern System of War, by a Prussian General Officer, with a Commentary, by C. Malorti' De Martemont^ IDs. 6d. Vandeleur's Duty of Officers commanding Detachments in the Field, 5s. Haly's Military Observations, with plates, 3s. 66. Turpin's Essay on the Art ofWar, 3 vol. 4to. in 1, with plates, ll. Is. Field of Mars, 2 vol. 4to. 3l. 3s. The Military Miscellany, containing Extracts from Colonel Tem- plehofFe's History of I he Seven Years War, translated by the Hon. Colonel Lindsay, 2 vol. ids. Thiebault's Duties of the Etat-Major in the French Army, trans- lated from the French, 4s. Tytler on Military Law, and the Practice of Courts-Martial, 8s. M'Arthuron Naval and Military Courts-Martial, 2 vol. ll. is. Delatons on Naval Courts-Martial, 10s. 6d. Adye on General Courts-Martial, 4s. 6d. Military Character of the different European Armies engaged in the late War ; with a Parallel of the Policy, Power, and Means of the Ancient Romans and Modern Freuch, 4s. The same Work in French, 4s. ' General Lloyd's Political and Military Rhapsody on the Invasion and Defence of Great Britain and Ireland, with plates, 7s. fid. King of Prussia's Instructions to his Generals, translated by Ma- jor Foster, los. Epitome of Military Events, with maps and plates, translated from the French Original, printed at Hamburgh, 2 vol. ll. 6s. Sir Robert Wilson's History of the Expedition to Egypt, with Plans, 2 vols. 8vo. 18s. The same Work in French, 2 vol. 8vo. 1 8s. Sir Robert Wilson's Inquiry into the present Force of the British Empire, 2s. 6tl. Phn of a Military Common Place Book, is. Gd. Military Memorandums for Officers in general, ^nd Staff Officers in particular, is. Gd. 'f*--, - Le Mesurier's British Commissary, 78. Military Operations in Ireland, during the time the French Troops were in it in 179a, with plates, 2s. Gd. Stephrns's History of the late War, 2 vol. 4to. 3l. 38. History of the Campaigns of 1796, 7, inc. 3 vo' with maps and plates. Paterion's Book of the Roads, U's. '^' BOOKS PRINTED FOR T. EGERTON. Pleydell's Military Observations, 4s. Marshal Saxe's Reveries, with plates, 4to. bound, l6s. Anderson's New Art of War, 78. Cd. Cadet, a Military Treatise, 6s. '^ '' Dalrymple's Military Essay, with plates, 6s. ? ' Bell's Essay on Military First Principles, 6s. Cnlhbertson's System for ihelnterior Economy of a Battalion, 5S. Donkin's Military Collections and Remarks, 5s. Plan for a Levy en Masse, and the Use of the Pike, by an Old Officer, 2s. 6d. Explanation of the Review Manoeuvres of a Regiment of Cavalry, particularly intended for the Instruction of Young Officers; with 18 plates, by Capt. W. Hackett. Robinson (Col.) on the Necessity and Utility of Rifle Corps in the British Army, 23. MuUer's Science of War, containing the Modern, Established, and Approved Principles of the Theory and Practice of the ' Military Sciences, 3 vol. 8vo. with Seventy-five plates, 3l. 3s. boards. Scharnhorst's Military Field Pocket Book, containing Instruc- tions for Officers of Detachments of Cavalry and Infantry, 12s. 6d. boards. King of Prussia's Secret Strategical Instructions for his Inspec- tors General, 4to. 1 5s. boards. Sir Robert Wilson's Account ot' the Campaigns in Poland, in 1806—7, with plates, ll. l Is. Cd. boards. Eliot's Treatise on the Defence of Portugal, and an Account of Lord Wellington's Campaigns from 1808 to 1811, third edit. plates, 12s. boards. Warnery's Anecdotes, Military and Historical, translated by General Turner, 58. boards. An Account of ihe Conquest of the Isles of France and Bourbon, 2 vol. 8s. 6d. boards. -- Inspection and Review Returns. Attestations, Furloughs, Discharges, &:c. Paymaster's Books, Regimental and Orderly Books. Regimental Description Book, royal folio, with engraved Heads, &c. Monthly, Fourteenth, and Weekly Returns and States for Ihe Horse, Dragoons, and Infantry. • *lMCf* z^T^ !♦>» P 7\ ^^^ Vi tB \ J J y/ A / A I'/ Li •< : h ' b9 /<•■• ^' to r" "■'''" N <.-...i ■••-.A t? i. •^ .= tB U I •I t i V ! V i&e *r^ \^^ ft' •} « /f- /; I f I iff i t 7 :' .-«' JVi * ■!gf-' V •t-^\. •■• ? -^ •^',*^ ■" i^P^?** I /--ff^i iii *•. f <- -^ % I" r r 1 1 V. i 1- t .. •;^^ « =it ^ H ffi^iit o o. Q. •e X />. 'I iininiei\t n i ^l \ V ..A rfS^^ ••••• •»& •■»e •a ^ li 1 \ r •rri;i-:;a!jw[||«i?s *///ffr///r^//A/ f //K/r f'v/-/^/: ^ (' Uilli'H.vlHi ffllBCE <*iIilfll{tfir?XIHi1iii.l]fr»?!MM'iillk2!!:^^^^^^ o A o & a Q xji 0. '"^ • - t" ...a ............. Pionrers IBjtA ...... .... .JIusi'c QO O O JAi/K ..O S...- o ...... . J)>iirnnirt\t \ •r N' •r r II f \ ■■••■■ V \ I "f ^ r i r ■ ■• *» . .5 '4. 4>. TT '■■• .^ •* ^- .A ^ 1 ■ ' / \ ._J r I „ ., il iM»«?- •■'•r* %■'. ■-»■ «<■*, ■»•«"< • '"^fT*- M -•». -^1 • > 4h«*>Cri^t4 I misiii. ■•f.xitf f'M»,i J 'HF. 1'i. i %^ 4 4 4 I, il CO I !' * '1 [ .'1 h^ 4 •rm 8 - . ■!» . ■ ; 'V' % V «(S^^f*M»^li^«l»jl :i •« ^ J J J ,n ...-J •■ I !! ^ \^ i i 1 1 1 n I IIIII9! Illlill g 3 1 1 / /. 7 k I KJ ^9 #. i 1- :.^ij»^ ■•••••\ > w I A 5 ■••./' 'I f .... . ' ■ • • in .*' • ' • > - 1 I' i '■. >■ *5 -4 J -J ^ )*»l* I* ti»W ,t.iV. M h) Mi) )V.i« t;,iV tw V IV A IV r« )V '♦'.N ,-' -v r r. I* ft* ^■: !*i TT^ "^S^^, tin i****"***!! J J bi ^ u. i i:: * i I ll 5?* > 11 1 |«H.wtv^ti|8t»l*»*>» 19 «2»)* »♦.'*•« I«»*|» m ^. .:•:" >li l»l»l> t«l»t»l«»>w •*■ •}> u « /« /I .>! I>l 11 H _ ■•'■■- ^t> ■■■. t.^''-^r^' fl rr- r"~~^"" # '.^ ,;',*•'''•-. fj^i»i«f»iiii* <*^. V-...„i ^ t £■'■■; ■*5'!;'.tvU'^i«/ Ir . • 'Mi .1 i Bit; A t: '.•,*•; ^;.!' 0'^ Sl-i**^ ■■•'»■■ i i i n I M >4 mill 9 I I r-!. 1 1« (t * («|irtv |» |V liijv !♦ fV |v HI jtt-Kjuf lA^-i^V' £v»;• ^ fe 4» Ilt.'i k ..^ ^.^^r^--- ':»■ IV* ~ «-ta a^ . . i ■■^. *^ V- '0' \ ■ I . \- .ii * 4:»-*--W'*A»^ -^•J^^W ■tii' 1 ^ *■ - ^v -I- -I ^ / • w ».r: »l - V t Y f % /f^':' % .< H - i r% ', \ ^. k % U ■^^1-^ '.' '•I t IB 'tMff 'I 1-r 4t '•^f>^'«Y';'^;>* -^.^ V V hi; I ■ tl 11 : ^ ^ ; lb. '* •*! »— - « I < ' > ; 1 ! I I ." ' f I -V > ♦ : I 1 f. 'il--' i ;;••■ /* )v ^ 11, \ ■■3*»i»*, i-\ 1- :^"^r7 n ^ « '«'R 117 WBLa< 7 ■' rxi -"A- mi::^ f'T " Wdk f ■*, -A **'•* M Hi V 'V^ .^•■■fr; • ;-.. t f,)^^ -^'■■■ / / %■ / / / ^^;. Ifi'l' \ » «~i nn - \ ^/r I k 1«#frfe ■*!'. ij I\>1 H K i] t I -if. 0* i^ / /^/^ Ssf^ it' I ■•• I: • - '*^ ■: M -^ 1 Tt n * m ^~«K«i^ r-N \ i m^' ^f ■■■f~f. 'v-J ifetf H ::::;::i.i././y, !• \ x< ;^ii\' ./ ■ I (' pi ^ff xS^i 1! r I ' •t«. \. ■ t ! w I' ' ..^hm^ .; • «- ■■■I %*'C«-, *V% V',' t: 5! ] 11 "Zm I, I I .-#-- tijeiiii/J\ "•■I ci <" r| s ib t. !:• itf n C; I. ^ «• t« •.(,,< U »i ki iliP ^ 1^1 ^ «^$ E » ^ 1 «i I « M ««t m C« ^- » (kS^ C t. )M ^o IIH /if im J ; • //i Ilillll so J...i...i..J. r h T'J ) I > n * i ■i X!pfm»i»^.^- ■ .1 .'*•• "^ i » ■# ">■ ' . -V / X... ,<;, 1 / 1 ■(. Ok Ji. ^ - . ,; • ^ -':-*'' ^ ■■■■Ml 1^ ; ' -» : <... \ -- 4' -■ w ^ r ( \ I I I r« I i .••"!•. 3 1 I ■ ■ I >. m SfBf*-^ mmmtm ••■i- *... i7^ /:X1 J > M4Mm \V\\\ -■• X 1 - 1 . A. r i i X \ V. J I fl \.i : ] .1 .J, 1 (► f J\ I ■' t^MKt t .3Uli ' JL-^^S f f !:l '/ n ^ i .1 r : w / r^ * >J. ■ A ^. f r n r .•■baP". . :,«. • ■> : ?. ' > "> ■{. A-; / i ' ?' ^i ■- f' i li 1(A r ■ , V.' %ti ^;* 3 t, ' .-.:" » «■ t V I i i! a T. "' |H' ,— 1 2» : Ji Mm zmsM mm ■■-wM •••^ I •J? O.J ^ 1^ •a i Ks; ^^ 1.. ! r t* ¥. y f «^ I li.^ -#«««-' U K JP»' ^ % K i I r 1 i } i : 1 1 ^ < 1^ * , ( ' ) .■ / \ I» f 4 IJ^^ft-i^T^^UBB^ ^''J ■.■.•■•.i} w. r W: t ts>^ t^ 1^ •■■■ b *1 •■K. Ill * I / ,'* I ■ly U .•I *f \ . H ^ / I N. ^:-T ^^m riftr- ■— rf*~"r f ^^ ^r **»«;' . ■it,i , tm* w i* ^ " * ■ '*^t -I t 1 f ;i A I >iiiiaww • • — ^r-TrT-" SS — j; - *'!- . r' '^.-^^SBSst- «ftti^3hi^' irftt,a„ oJ^jJ^^^^>^ 'f^m^'i J, t. 1. 1. •* *• ••"^ zs % % \ ■•■\ x > < •Si *^^lt,^,^v^^ ^^ '5 A \ >e. ji«i^'^' '■^*,.,,. "Sfe,, A^. -r ?J' "!! v^ ^:x :. \ \ -l-^g * ''Hi»*e.ip-' !R;»».-. •«»v!«jjg ijj i^M^A -tftm i-(i. tf i ■-,'' ' . - .,....#i. _t ^- ----— --^^ fc^/ r-v ••V ^'■i.; ^s.-^ >v.iP f- •*■■ r r- *f -i 5' ^ J . »itliliM>.' Mtt- *•■ \ . -/ 'S.V ' 11 mm 1 v\ i ' f. . . \ » •f.v* I. ^ r^T W ■ ♦ , I.- • «i » i • •i -?•• - H i . t ♦"k^ .f % '4 ',1 \ M 1 I Ihr- ^1 f»4 t.1 :hr- § ■^d. I . t' ib^ t. II I : ..| ^S .-*«as!i ^^ f.^^ C,^..'."..*.'.'..' S E ..C'[ a.. s 1 '.' '. ■ f i'l H il ''•JiMi.'^iii^.i / ,*->* ■<f s f: *,,,,.*.)*■' is: \ tt! \ \ ^ i: J;.... ' t '^,. * -.s r 1 / y 4 •= ^'*,^* t r . > I ^•l 'V~ ■\ » ..s r :- ■ u ^ . • 3 'SaaB e^ 'SSb <=a -ew oa -^.^^t t —nil iwij^JWiai ^... wi I •WHiiiaiiwgiiii ^m^ ^ ^ ^ '^y^. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I U lU 12.2 u lU lit Hi 140 1^ 1^ 1^ PhologFaphic ScMices Corporaiion as VVIST MAIN STRUT VMWSTN.N.Y, I4SM (7U)t7a-4S09 tl ^ I h ->'r r> 1v s. s- ? _ — ,..^. .^., _^^ .1 f. i,iu'>'t<">'":> i( H-'-'^S h 1, i > ft % 'h 1 7 •in; \f ■\l M '••<•■•• ^onTofii i I . '^L V t l! T 3 (^ ^ k I VC: ) ft